manualshive.com logo in svg

Rohde & Schwarz FSW13, User Manual

Share
Download
Rohde & Schwarz FSW13 User Manual Download Page 477

Common Analysis and Display Functions

R&S

®

FSW

477

User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 19

Set to Default

Sets the color mapping to the default settings.

Remote command: 

DISPlay[:

​

WINDow<n>]:

​

SGRam|SPECtrogram:

​

COLor:

​

DEFault

​

 

on page 917

7.3.3 How to Configure Traces

The following step-by-step procedures describe the following tasks:

●

How to Configure a Standard Trace

......................................................................477

●

How to Display and Configure a Spectrogram

......................................................478

●

How to Copy Traces

..............................................................................................482

7.3.3.1

How to Configure a Standard Trace

Step-by-step instructions on configuring the trace settings are provided here. For
details on individual functions and settings see 

chapter 7.3.2.1, "Trace Settings"

,

on page 464.

The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in 

chap-

ter 11.8.2, "Configuring the Trace Display and Retrieving Trace Data"

, 

on page 909.

Trace settings are configured in the "Traces" dialog box.

To display the "Traces" dialog box, do one of the following:

●

Press the TRACE key and then select the "Trace Config" softkey.

●

Select "Analysis" from the "Overview", then select the "Traces" tab.

1. For each trace, select the "Trace Mode" and "Trace Detector". Traces with the

trace mode "Blank" are not displayed.

2. To configure several traces to predefined display modes in one step, press the but-

ton for the required function:

● "Preset All Traces"
● "Set Trace Mode Avg | Max | Min"
● "Set Trace Mode Max | ClrWrite | Min"

For details see 

chapter 7.3.2.1, "Trace Settings"

, 

on page 464.

3. For "Average" trace mode, define the number of sweeps to be averaged in the

"Sweep/Average Count" field of the "Sweep Config" dialog box.
(Press the SWEEP key and then select the "Sweep Config" softkey to display the
"Sweep Config" dialog box.)

4. If linear scaling is used, select the "Average Mode: Linear".

5. To improve the trace stability, increase the number of "Sweep Points" or the

"Sweep Time".

All configured traces (not set to "Blank") are displayed after the next sweep.

 

 

Trace Configuration

Summary of Contents for FSW13

Page 1: ...R S FSW Signal and Spectrum Analyzer User Manual User Manual ì 2 1173 9411 02 19 Test Measurement ...

Page 2: ...1313 1668 02 R S U160 1313 3754 02 R S B320 bandwidth extension 1313 7172 02 R S U320 1313 7189 02 R S B500 1313 4296 02 R S B71 analog baseband interface 1313 1651 13 26 1313 6547 02 The firmware of the instrument makes use of several valuable open source software packages For information see the Open Source Acknowledgement on the user documentation CD ROM included in delivery Rohde Schwarz would...

Page 3: ... 5 Setting Up a Network LAN Connection 33 3 1 6 Configuring the Initial Instrument Settings 37 3 1 7 Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode 37 3 2 Instrument Tour 39 3 2 1 Front Panel View 39 3 2 2 Rear Panel View 52 3 3 Trying Out the Instrument 58 3 3 1 Measuring a Basic Signal 59 3 3 2 Displaying a Spectrogram 61 3 3 3 Activating Additional Measurement Channels 62 3 3 4 Performing Sequentia...

Page 4: ...s 110 5 2 Basic Measurements 115 5 2 1 How to Perform a Basic Sweep Measurement 115 5 2 2 Measurement Examples Measuring a Sinusoidal Signal 116 5 2 3 Measurement Example Measuring Levels at Low S N Ratios 119 5 2 4 Measurement Examples Measuring Signal Spectra with Multiple Signals 123 5 2 5 Measurement Examples in Zero Span 129 5 3 Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measurement 135 5 ...

Page 5: ... 3 SEM Results 195 5 6 4 SEM Basics 198 5 6 5 SEM Configuration 208 5 6 6 How to Perform a Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement 225 5 6 7 Measurement Example Multi SEM Measurement 230 5 6 8 Reference SEM File Descriptions 231 5 7 Spurious Emissions Measurement 238 5 7 1 About the Measurement 238 5 7 2 Spurious Emissions Measurement Results 239 5 7 3 Spurious Emissions Basics 240 5 7 4 Spurious Emiss...

Page 6: ... 10 4 Harmonic Distortion Configuration 273 5 10 5 How to Determine the Harmonic Distortion 275 5 11 Third Order Intercept TOI Measurement 275 5 11 1 About the TOI Measurement 276 5 11 2 TOI Basics 276 5 11 3 TOI Results 280 5 11 4 TOI Configuration 281 5 11 5 How to Determine the Third Order Intercept 282 5 11 6 Measurement Example Measuring the R S FSW s Intrinsic Intermodulation 283 5 12 AM Mod...

Page 7: ...4 6 3 1 Impact of the Frequency and Span Settings 385 6 3 2 Frequency and Span Settings 387 6 3 3 How To Define the Frequency Range 391 6 3 4 How to Move the Center Frequency through the Frequency Range 392 6 3 5 How to Keep the Center Frequency Stable 392 6 4 Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration 393 6 4 1 Impact of the Vertical Axis Settings 393 6 4 2 Amplitude Settings 395 6 4 3 Scaling the...

Page 8: ... on Markers and Marker Functions 483 7 4 2 Marker Configuration 493 7 4 3 Marker Function Configuration 507 7 4 4 How to Work With Markers 519 7 4 5 Measurement Example Measuring Harmonics Using Marker Functions 522 7 5 Display and Limit Lines 523 7 5 1 Basics on Display Lines 524 7 5 2 Basics on Limit Lines 524 7 5 3 Settings and Functions for Display and Limit Lines 527 7 5 4 How to Work with Di...

Page 9: ... Reference Frequency Settings 568 9 3 2 Transducer Settings 571 9 3 3 Alignment Settings 576 9 3 4 System Configuration Settings 577 9 3 5 Service Functions 583 9 4 Display Settings 590 9 4 1 General Display Settings 591 9 4 2 Displayed Items 592 9 4 3 Display Theme and Colors 596 9 5 External Monitor Settings 600 9 6 How to Configure the Basic Instrument Settings 601 9 6 1 How to Perform a Self T...

Page 10: ...Network and Remote Control 657 10 5 1 How to Configure a Network 658 10 5 2 How to Operate the Instrument Without a Network 664 10 5 3 How to Log on to the Network 664 10 5 4 How to Share Directories only with Microsoft Networks 666 10 5 5 How to Set Up Remote Desktop 667 10 5 6 How to Start a Remote Control Session from a PC 674 10 5 7 How to Return to Manual Operation 675 11 Remote Commands 676 ...

Page 11: ... Configuring the Result Display 821 11 6 1 General Window Commands 821 11 6 2 Working with Windows in the Display 822 11 6 3 Examples Configuring the Result Display 827 11 7 Setting Basic Measurement Parameters 830 11 7 1 Defining the Frequency and Span 830 11 7 2 Configuring Bandwidth and Sweep Settings 836 11 7 3 Configuring the Vertical Axis Amplitude Scaling 844 11 7 4 Configuring Triggered an...

Page 12: ...nds 1045 11 11 2 Reading Out the CONDition Part 1045 11 11 3 Reading Out the EVENt Part 1046 11 11 4 Controlling the ENABle Part 1047 11 11 5 Controlling the Negative Transition Part 1047 11 11 6 Controlling the Positive Transition Part 1048 11 12 Commands for Remote Instrument Operation 1048 11 13 Emulating Other Instruments Commands 1049 11 13 1 Setting up Instrument Emulation 1049 11 13 2 Refer...

Page 13: ...1173 9411 02 19 13 4 Minimizing the Measurement Duration 1104 13 5 Improving Averaging Results 1104 13 6 Miscellaneous Troubleshooting Hints 1105 13 7 Obtaining Technical Support 1105 List of remote commands base unit 1107 Index 1124 ...

Page 14: ...Contents R S FSW 14 User Manual 1173 9411 02 19 ...

Page 15: ... with their corresponding remote control commands Common Measurement Analysis and Display Functions Description of the settings and functions provided to analyze results independently of the measurement type with their corresponding remote control commands Data Management Description of general functions to handle data files configuration and result data not I Q data General Instrument Setup Descr...

Page 16: ...lp corresponds to the user manuals for the latest product version The web help is availa ble from the R S FSW product page at http www rohde schwarz com product FSW html Downloads Web Help Getting Started This manual is delivered with the instrument in printed form and in PDF format on the CD It provides the information needed to set up and start working with the instrument Basic operations and ha...

Page 17: ...with rated specifications instru ment function repair troubleshooting and fault elimination It contains all information required for repairing the R S FSW by replacing modules Release Notes The release notes describe the installation of the firmware new and modified func tions eliminated problems and last minute changes to the documentation The corre sponding firmware version is indicated on the t...

Page 18: ...o perform the same task In this case the procedure using the touchscreen is described Any elements that can be activated by touching can also be clicked using an additionally connected mouse The alternative procedure using the keys on the instrument or the on screen keyboard is only described if it deviates from the standard operating procedures The term select may refer to any of the described me...

Page 19: ...ustomer requirements Offering low phase noise wide analysis bandwidth and straightforward and intuitive operation the analyzer makes measurements fast and easy This user manual contains a description of the functionality that the instrument pro vides including remote control operation The latest version is available for download at the product homepage http www2 rohde schwarz com product FSW html ...

Page 20: ...ection describes the basic steps to be taken when setting up the R S FSW for the first time Risk of injury and instrument damage The instrument must be used in an appropriate manner to prevent electric shock fire personal injury or damage Do not open the instrument casing Read and observe the Basic Safety Instructions at the beginning of this manual or on the documentation CD ROM in addition to th...

Page 21: ...cted and the airflow perforations are unimpeded The minimum distance from the wall is 10 cm The instrument is dry and shows no sign of condensation The instrument is positioned as described in the following sections The ambient temperature does not exceed the range specified in the data sheet Signal levels at the input connectors are all within the specified ranges Signal outputs are correctly con...

Page 22: ...rotection is provi ded When shipping an instrument the original packaging should be used If you do not have the original packaging use sufficient padding to prevent the instrument from moving around inside the box Pack the instrument in antistatic wrap to protect it from electrostatic charging Secure the instrument to prevent any movement and other mechanical effects dur ing transportation The car...

Page 23: ...olded out The feet may fold in if they are not folded out completely or if the instrument is shifted This may cause damage or injury Fold the feet completely in or completely out to ensure stability of the instrument Never shift the instrument when the feet are folded out When the feet are folded out do not work under the instrument or place anything underneath The feet can break if they are overl...

Page 24: ...them in completely Rackmounting The R S FSW can be installed in a rack using a rack adapter kit order no see data sheet The installation instructions are part of the adapter kit Risk of instrument damage in a rack An insufficient airflow can cause the instrument to overheat which may disturb the operation and even cause damage Make sure that all fan openings are unobstructed that the airflow perfo...

Page 25: ...n A green LED above the POWER key indicates this An orange LED indicates the instrument is in standby mode Warm up time for OCXO When the instrument is switched on the OCXO requires an extended warm up time see data sheet No warm up time is required when starting from standby mode Switching the instrument off 1 Press the POWER key on the front panel The R S FSW switches to standby mode 2 Set the A...

Page 26: ...ure for details refer to the data sheet A message in the status bar Instrument warming up indicates that the operating temperature has not yet been reached Performing a self alignment 1 Press the SETUP key 2 Press the Alignment softkey 3 Select the Start Self Alignment button in the Alignment dialog box Once the system correction values have been calculated successfully a message is displayed To d...

Page 27: ...d automatically To ensure that the instrument software functions properly certain rules must be adhered to concerning the operating system Risk of causing instrument unusability The instrument is equipped with the Windows 7 operating system Additional software can therefore be installed on the instrument The use and installation of additional soft ware may impair instrument function Thus run only ...

Page 28: ...ndow By default the R S FSW provides two user accounts an administrator account Instrument with unrestricted access to the computer domain and a standard user account NormalUser with limited access In both cases the ini tial password is 894129 Note that this password is very weak and it is recommended that you change the password for both users after initial login You can change the password in Wi...

Page 29: ...g the automatic login function 1 In the Start menu select Run The Run dialog box is displayed 2 Enter the command C R_S INSTR USER AUTOLOGIN REG 3 Press the ENTER key to confirm The automatic login function is reactivated It will be applied the next time the instrument is switched on Switching users when using the automatic login function Which user account is used is defined during login However ...

Page 30: ...e large number of available USB devices there is almost no limit to the expansions that are possible with the R S FSW The following list shows various USB devices that can be useful Memory stick for easy transfer of data to from a computer e g firmware updates CD ROM drives for easy installation of firmware applications Keyboard or mouse to simplify the entry of data comments file names etc Printe...

Page 31: ...ers Mouse to configure the mouse properties To access the Windows operating system press the Windows key on the external keyboard Connecting a printer When printing a file the instrument checks whether a printer is connected and turned on and whether the appropriate printer driver is installed If required printer driver installation is initiated A printer driver needs to be installed only once To ...

Page 32: ... For full screen display adjust the monitor s screen resolu tion The R S FSW supports a minimum resolution of 1280x768 pixels 1 Connect the external monitor to the R S FSW 2 Press the SETUP key 3 Press the Display softkey 4 Select the Configure Monitor tab in the Display dialog box The standard Windows Screen Resolution dialog box is displayed 5 If necessary change the screen resolution to be used...

Page 33: ...nistrator rights can configure LAN networks LXI The R S FSW complies with LXI Class C LXI gives you direct access to the LAN set tings described below For further information on the LXI interface refer to chapter 10 4 4 LXI Settings on page 655 3 1 5 1 Connecting the Instrument to the Network There are two methods to establish a LAN connection to the instrument A non dedicated network Ethernet con...

Page 34: ...onfiguration using the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP all address information can be assigned automati cally If the network does not support DHCP or if the instrument is set to use alternate TCP IP configuration the addresses must be set manually By default the instrument is configured to use dynamic TCP IP configuration and obtain all address information automatically This means that it...

Page 35: ...numbers in maximum 6 Enter the Subnet Mask for example 255 255 255 0 The subnet mask consists of four number blocks separated by dots Every block contains 3 numbers in maxi mum 7 Select Configure Network If you have entered an invalid IP address or subnet mask the message out of range is displayed in the status line If the settings are correct the configuration is saved and you are prompted to res...

Page 36: ...ed each time the instrument is restarted Each instrument is delivered with an assigned computer name but this name can be changed To change the computer name 1 Press the SETUP key and then the Network Remote softkey The current Computer Name is displayed in the Network tab 2 Enter the new computer name and close the dialog box 3 1 5 4 Changing the Windows Firewall Settings A firewall protects an i...

Page 37: ...nd US After you have made a change and closed the dialog box the new date and time is also adopted by the instrument 3 1 7 Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode During normal operation the R S FSW uses a solid state drive to store its operating system instrument firmware instrument self alignment data and any user data cre ated during operation If necessary the solid state drive can be remove...

Page 38: ...ilable Storing required data permanently Any data that is to be available for subsequent sessions with the R S FSW such as predefined instrument settings transducer factors or self alignment data must be stored on the instrument permanently prior to activating the secure user mode Self alignment data Note that self alignment data becomes invalid with time and due to temperature changes Therefore t...

Page 39: ...log on Switching users when using the automatic login function In the Start menu select the arrow next to the Shut down button and then Log off The Login dialog box is displayed in which you can enter the different user account name and password The secure user mode setting and automatic login is automatically deactivated when the Instrument user logs on The SecureUser is no longer available The s...

Page 40: ...Instrument damage caused by cleaning agents Cleaning agents contain substances that may damage the instrument for example cleaning agents that contain a solvent may damage the front panel labeling plastic parts or the display Never use cleaning agents such as solvents thinners acetone etc acids bases or other substances The outside of the instrument can be cleaned sufficiently using a soft lint fr...

Page 41: ...e with a dust cloth 2 1 3 4 6 8 9 7 5 Fig 3 2 Touchscreen elements 1 Toolbar with standard application functions e g print save open file etc 2 Tabs for individual measurement channels 3 Channel bar for firmware and measurement settings 4 Input field for measurement setting 5 Softkeys for function access 6 Window title bar with diagram specific trace information 7 Measurement results area 8 Diagra...

Page 42: ...n for about 1 second Toolbar Standard functions can be performed via the icons in the toolbar at the top of the screen You can hide the toolbar display e g when using remote control in order to enlarge the display area for the measurement results Setup Display Displayed Items See the R S FSW User Manual for details The following functions are available Table 3 1 Standard Application Functions in t...

Page 43: ...rent display screenshot as configured In SmartGrid mode only Exit SmartGrid mode Softkeys Softkeys are virtual keys provided by the software Thus more functions can be provi ded than those that can be accessed directly via the function keys on the instrument Softkeys are dynamic i e depending on the selected function key a different list of softkeys is displayed on the right side of the screen A l...

Page 44: ...ker or trace in the display or infor mation in the channel bar or tap it for about 1 second a menu is displayed which con tains the same functions as the corresponding softkey This is useful for example when the softkey display is hidden On screen Keyboard The on screen keyboard is an additional means of interacting with the instrument with out having to connect an external keyboard The on screen ...

Page 45: ...e 3 2 SYSTEM keys SYSTEM key Assigned functions PRESET Resets the instrument to the default state MODE Provides the selection between applications SETUP Provides basic instrument configuration functions e g Reference frequency external internal noise source Date time display configuration LAN interface Self alignment Firmware update and enabling of options Information about instrument configuratio...

Page 46: ...nnectors including a male USB B connector See chapter 3 2 2 5 USB on page 54 All USB connectors support standard 2 0 3 2 1 6 POWER SENSOR The LEMOSA female connector is used to connect power sensors of the R S NRP Zxy family For a detailed list of supported sensors see the data sheet For details on configuring and using power sensors see chapter 6 2 3 Power Sen sors on page 321 3 2 1 7 PROBE The R...

Page 47: ... time and the number of measurement points Selects continuous measurement or single measurement TRACE Configures the measured data acquisition and the analysis of the mea surement data TRIG Sets the trigger mode the trigger threshold the trigger delay and the gate configuration in the case of gated sweep Marker functions MKR Sets and positions the absolute and relative measurement markers markers ...

Page 48: ... a single new measurement Single Sweep Mode RUN CONT Starts a continuous measurement Continuous Sweep Mode Function execution in navigation controls area UNDO Reverts last operation REDO Repeats previously reverted operation 3 2 1 10 Keypad The keypad is used to enter alphanumeric parameters including the corresponding units see also chapter 3 4 4 Entering Data on page 83 It contains the following...

Page 49: ...d element 3 2 1 11 Navigation Controls The navigation controls include a rotary knob navigation keys and UNDO REDO keys They allow you to navigate within the display or within dialog boxes Rotary Knob The rotary knob has several functions For numeric entries increments clockwise direction or decrements counter clockwise direction the instrument parameter at a defined step width In lists toggles be...

Page 50: ...erforming a zero span mea surement with several markers and a limit line defined and accidentally select a dif ferent measurement In this case many settings would be lost However if you press UNDO immediately afterwards the previous status is retrieved i e the zero span measurement and all settings The REDO key repeats the previously reverted action i e the most recently per formed action is repea...

Page 51: ...and input or the probe must be connected to the R S FSW accordingly Since the Digital I Q input and the Analog Baseband input use the same digital signal path both cannot be used simultaneously When one is activated established connec tions for the other are disconnected When the second input is deactivated connec tions to the first are re established This may cause a short delay in data transfer ...

Page 52: ...IF IN with the supplied SMA caps 3 2 1 16 RF INPUT 50 Ω A device under test DUT can be connected to the R S FSW to provide RF input which is then analyzed The DUT is connected to the instrument s RF INPUT via a cable equipped with an appropriate connector Risk of instrument damage Do not overload the input For maximum allowed values see the data sheet For AC coupling a DC input voltage of 50 V mus...

Page 53: ...UT OUTPUT connector 11 SYNC TRIGGER OUTPUT INPUT 12 AUX PORT 13 GPIB interface 14 Analog baseband interface option B71 15 External generator control option B10 16 IF OUT 2GHz connector for models R S FSW43 50 67 only 17 OCXO external reference option B4 18 REF INPUT OUTPUT connectors 3 2 2 1 Removable System Hard Drive The removable system hard drive contains all measurement data from the R S FSW ...

Page 54: ...twork and Remote Operation on page 609 3 2 2 5 USB The rear panel provides four additional female USB USB A connectors to connect devices like a keyboard a mouse or a memory stick see also chapter 3 2 1 5 USB on page 46 Furthermore a male USB DEVICE connector USB B is provided for example for a printer All USB connectors support standard 2 0 3 2 2 6 Bandwidth Extension 160 MHz 320 MHz 500 MHz with...

Page 55: ... Intermediate frequency IF output of approximately 20 MHz Video output 1V Which output is provided is defined in the software INPUT OUTPUT key For details see IF VIDEO DEMOD Output on page 382 3 2 2 8 IF OUTPUT 2 GHz The female SMA connector is only available for instrument models R S FSW43 50 67 and can be used to provide intermediate frequency IF output of approximately 2 GHz at a frequency of 2...

Page 56: ...ntrol the connector usage in the Trigger set tings TRIG key 3 2 2 11 SYNC TRIGGER OUTPUT INPUT The SYNC TRIGGER OUTPUT INPUT connectors allow you to synchronize several devices e g two R S FSWs with respect to the trigger signal but also the reference frequency A 100 MHz signal can be output as a trigger or reference signal to another device and an external trigger or reference signal can be recei...

Page 57: ...xternal generator see the External Generator Control section of the R S FSW User Manual 3 2 2 15 OCXO Option R S FSW B4 This option generates a 10 MHz reference signal with a very precise frequency If installed and if no external signal is used this signal is used as an internal reference It can also be used to synchronize other connected devices via the REF OUTPUT 10 MHz connector Warm up time fo...

Page 58: ... SYNC TRIGGER connector can also be used to synchronize the reference fre quency on several devices see chapter 3 2 2 11 SYNC TRIGGER OUTPUT INPUT on page 56 3 3 Trying Out the Instrument This chapter introduces the most important functions and settings of the R S FSW step by step The complete description of the functionality and its usage is given in the R S FSW User Manual Basic instrument opera...

Page 59: ... out in a defined instrument configuration 2 Press the SETUP key on the front panel 3 Tap the Service softkey 4 Tap the Calibration Signal tab 5 Tap the Calibration Frequency RF option Leave the frequency at the default 64 MHz with a narrowband spectrum The calibration signal is now sent to the RF input of the R S FSW By default a continuous frequency sweep is performed so that the spectrum of the...

Page 60: ...ibration frequency a Tap the Overview softkey to display the configuration Overview b Tap the Frequency button c In the Center field enter 64 on the number pad on the front panel d Press the MHz key next to the number pad 2 Reduce the span to 20 MHz a In the Span field of the Frequency dialog box enter 20 MHz b Close the Frequency dialog box 3 Set the reference level to 25 dBm a In the configurati...

Page 61: ... activated and the evaluation bar with the available evalua tion methods is displayed 3 Drag the Spectrogram icon from the evaluation bar to the diagram area The blue area indicates that the new diagram would replace the previous spectrum display Since we do not want to replace the spectrum drag the icon to the lower half of the display to add an additional window instead Fig 3 6 Adding a Spectrog...

Page 62: ...in parallel and then switch between the channels auto matically to perform the measurements sequentially We will demonstrate this feature by activating additional measurement channels for a different frequency range a zero span measurement and an I Q analysis To activate additional measurement channels 1 Press the MODE key on the front panel 2 On the New Channel tab of the Signal Spectrum Mode dia...

Page 63: ... the span to 1 GHz Fig 3 9 Frequency spectrum of the calibration signal with a larger span 4 Repeat the previous steps to activate a third Spectrum window Change the frequency range for this spectrum display In the Frequency dialog box set the center frequency to 64 MHz and tap Zero Span As the calibration signal does not vary over time the level versus time diagram dis plays a straight line Tryin...

Page 64: ...button to activate a channel for the I Q Analyzer applica tion c Tap the Display Config softkey to activate the SmartGrid mode d Drag the Real Imag I Q icon from the evaluation bar to the SmartGrid Fig 3 11 Inserting a Real Imag diagram for I Q analysis e Close the SmartGrid mode The IQ Analyzer channel displays the real and imaginary signal parts in separate windows Trying Out the Instrument ...

Page 65: ...Measurements Although only one measurement can be performed at any one time the measurements configured in the active channels can be performed sequentially that means one after the other automatically either once or continuously 1 Tap the Sequencer icon in the toolbar 2 Toggle the Sequencer softkey in the Sequencer menu to On A continuous sequence is started i e each channel measurement is perfor...

Page 66: ...the peak in our first Spectrum measurement 1 In the MultiView tab double tap the Spectrum window frequency sweep with spectrogram display to return to the Spectrum channel 2 Tap the spectrum display to set the focus on that window 3 Press the Split Maximize key on the front panel to maximize the spectrum win dow as we currently do not need the spectrogram display 4 Press the RUN SINGLE key on the ...

Page 67: ...tion and value change in the marker area of the diagram 3 3 6 Displaying a Marker Peak List The marker peak list determines the frequencies and levels of peaks in the spectrum automatically We will display a marker peak list for the Spectrum 2 channel 1 Tap the Spectrum 2 tab 2 Press the RUN SINGLE key on the front panel to perform a single sweep for which we will determine the peaks Trying Out th...

Page 68: ...r a Press the MKR key on the front panel b Tap the Marker Config softkey in the Marker menu c Tap the Search tab in the Marker dialog box d In the Threshold field enter 68 dBm e Tap the State box for Threshold to activate its use Only peaks that are larger than 68 dBm will be included in the peak list The marker peak list displays the determined peaks that are above the defined threshold Fig 3 14 ...

Page 69: ... 16 Zoomed display around a peak Zoom mode is automatically disabled and the default selection mode is restored indicated by the highlighted Selection mode icon 3 In figure 3 16 the enlarged peak is represented by a very thick trace This is due to the insufficient number of sweep points The missing sweep points for the zoomed display are interpolated which provides poor results To optimize the res...

Page 70: ... points Fig 3 17 Zoomed peak with increased number of sweep points Note that the trace becomes much more precise 4 Tap the Multiple Zoom icon in the toolbar again and define a zoom area around markers M4 M5 and M6 Fig 3 18 Multiple zoom windows 5 Tap the Multiple Zoom icon in the toolbar again and define a zoom area around marker M8 Trying Out the Instrument ...

Page 71: ...order to restore the results of our measurements at a later time we will store the instrument settings to a file To save the instrument settings to a file 1 Tap the Save icon in the toolbar 2 Press the keyboard key on the front panel to display the online keyboard as you will have to enter text in the next step 3 In the Save dialog box tap the File Name field and enter MyMultiViewSetup using the k...

Page 72: ...estore the settings to the instrument at any time using the settings file 1 Press the PRESET button to restore the default instrument settings so you can check that the stored user settings are actually restored afterwards 2 Tap the Load icon in the toolbar 3 In the Load dialog box select the MyMultiViewSetup dfl file in the default directory C R_S instr user 4 Tap the Load button All instrument s...

Page 73: ...con in the toolbar A screenshot of the current display is created Note that the colors on the screen are inverted in the screenshot to improve printout results 2 In the Save Hardcopy as Portable Network Graphics PNG dialog box enter a file name e g MyMultiViewDisplay The screenshot is stored to MyMultiViewDisplay png 3 4 Operating the Instrument This chapter provides an overview on how to work wit...

Page 74: ...ormation 5 Diagram footer with diagram specific information depending on measurement application 6 Instrument status bar with error messages progress bar and date time display Hiding elements in the display You can hide some of the elements in the display for example the status bar or chan nel bar in order to enlarge the display area for the measurement results Setup Dis play Displayed Items For d...

Page 75: ...MultiView tab An additional tab labelled MultiView provides an overview of all active channels at a glance In the MultiView tab each individual window contains its own channel bar with an additional button Tap this button to switch to the corresponding channel dis play quickly Icons in the channel bar The icon on the tab label indicates that the displayed trace no longer matches the current instru...

Page 76: ... this case the sweep time must be increased Meas Time Measurement time calculated from analysis bandwidth and number of samples for statistics measurements RBW Resolution bandwidth that has been set If the bandwidth does not correspond to the value for automatic coupling a green bullet appears in front of the field VBW Video bandwidth that has been set If the bandwidth does not correspond to the v...

Page 77: ... in the User Manual BBP Baseband power with Digital Baseband Interface R S FSW B17 only EXT External GP_0 General purpose bit with Digital Baseband Interface R S FSW B17 only IFP IF power trigger bandwidth PSE Power sensor RFP RF power SQL Squelch TIM Time VID Video 6dB RRC CHN Filter type for sweep bandwidth see Filter Type on page 302 PA The preamplifier is activated YIG Bypass The YIG filter is...

Page 78: ...signal only if external generator control is active 3 4 1 2 Window Title Bar Each channel in the R S FSW display may contain several windows Each window can display either a graph or a table as a result of the channel measurement Which type of result evaluation is displayed in which window is defined in the display configu ration see chapter 3 4 5 Displaying Results on page 85 The window s title b...

Page 79: ...e than 2 markers a separate marker table is displayed beneath the diagram by default Marker information in marker table In addition to the marker information displayed within the diagram grid a separate marker table may be displayed beneath the diagram This table provides the following information for all active markers Type Marker type N normal D delta T temporary internal PWR power sensor Ref Re...

Page 80: ...LXI configuration mode the instru ment status and any irregularities are indicated in the status bar beneath the diagram In the MultiView tab the status bar always displays the information for the currently selected measurement The following information is displayed Instrument status The instrument is configured for operation with an external reference The optional Digital Baseband Interface R S F...

Page 81: ...due to missing data or wrong settings so that the measurement cannot be completed correctly orange Warning An irregular situation occurred during measurement e g the settings no lon ger match the displayed results or the connection to an external device was interrupted temporarily gray Information Information on the status of individual processing steps gray Message An event or state has occurred ...

Page 82: ...n R S FSW B4 has not yet reached its operating temperature The message usually disappears a few minutes after power has been switched on OVLD Overload of the input signal path after the input mixer only when RF INPUT path is NOT used e g for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R S FSW B17 or the Analog Baseband Interface R S FSW B71 Reduce the input level PLL UNLOCK For Digital Baseband Inte...

Page 83: ... element in the dis play e g a dialog field diagram or table row Which element is focused is indicated by a blue frame diagram window table or is otherwise highlighted softkey marker etc Moving the focus is most easily done by tapping on the element on the touchscreen Alternatively use the Tab key on the on screen keyboard or the rotary knob to move the focus from one element to the next on the di...

Page 84: ...s alphanumeric input you can use the on screen keyboard to enter numbers and special characters see On screen Keyboard on page 44 Alternatively you can use the keypad Every alphanumeric key represents several characters and one number The decimal point key represents special characters and the sign key toggles between capital and small letters For the assignment refer to table 3 8 Entering numbers...

Page 85: ...b Aborting the entry Press the ESC key The dialog box is closed without changing the settings Table 3 8 Keys for alphanumeric parameters Key name upper inscription Series of special characters and number provided 7 7 µ Ω 8 A B C 8 Ä ÆÅ Ç 9 D E F 9 É 4 G H I 4 5 J K L 5 6 M N O 6 Ň Ö 1 P Q R S 1 2 T U V 2 Ü 3 W X Y Z 3 0 blank 0 _ toggles between capital and small letters 3 4 5 Displaying Results T...

Page 86: ...measurement settings for that application The same application can be acti vated with different measurement settings by creating several channels for the same application Whenever you switch channels the corresponding measurement settings are restored Each channel is displayed in a separate tab on the screen An additional tab MultiView provides an overview of all currently active channels at once ...

Page 87: ...is played in a separate window in the channel tab Up to 16 individual windows can be displayed per measurement channel i e per tab To arrange the diagrams and tables on the screen the Rohde Schwarz SmartGrid function helps you find the target posi tion simply and quickly Principally the layout of the windows on the screen is based on an underlying grid the SmartGrid However the SmartGrid is dynami...

Page 88: ...uring any positioning action the underlying SmartGrid is displayed Different colors and frames indicate the possible new positions The position in the SmartGrid where you drop the window determines its position on the screen Fig 3 21 Moving a window in SmartGrid mode The brown area indicates the possible drop area for the window i e the area in which the window can be placed A blue area indicates ...

Page 89: ...dow possibly changing the size and position of the other displayed windows The Delete icon allows you to close the window enlarging the display of the remain ing windows How to Activate SmartGrid Mode All display configuration actions are only possible in SmartGrid mode In SmartGrid mode the evaluation bar replaces the current softkey menu display When the Smart Grid mode is deactivated again the ...

Page 90: ...pears 3 Drag the required icon from the evaluation bar to the SmartGrid which is displayed in the diagram area and drop it at the required position See How to Arrange the Result Windows on page 90 for more information on positioning the window Remote command LAYout ADD WINDow on page 822 LAYout WINDow n ADD on page 826 How to Close a Result Window To close a window activate SmartGrid mode and sele...

Page 91: ...y contain several windows to evaluate the measurement results using different methods A splitter allows you to change the size of neighboring win dows The splitters are not available in SmartGrid mode To change the size of two neighboring windows drag the splitter between the win dows in either direction 3 4 5 4 Switching Between a Split and Maximized Window Display To get an overview of the resul...

Page 92: ... screen elements Selecting a display theme and colors Changing the display update rate Activating or deactivating the touch sensitivity of the screen Zooming into the diagram 3 4 6 Getting Help If any questions or problems concerning the R S FSW arise an extensive online help system is provided on the instrument and can be consulted at any time The help sys tem is context sensitive and provides in...

Page 93: ...ral tabs View shows the selected help topic Contents contains a table of help contents Index contains index entries to search for help topics Search provides text search The Help toolbar provides some buttons To browse the topics in the order of the table of contents Up arrow previous topic Down arrow next topic To browse the topics visited before Left arrow back Right arrow forward To increase or...

Page 94: ...rd and Match case to refine the search Use operators AND OR and NOT To close the Help window Select the Close icon in the upper right corner of the help window Or Press the ESC key on the front panel 3 4 7 Remote Control In addition to working with the R S FSW interactively located directly at the instru ment it is also possible to operate and control it from a remote PC Various methods for remote...

Page 95: ...s and control the instrument from a remote computer through a LAN connection While the instru ment is in operation the instrument screen contents are displayed on the remote com puter and Remote Desktop provides access to all of the applications files and net work resources of the instrument Thus remote operation of the instrument is possible With Windows 7 Remote Desktop Client is part of the ope...

Page 96: ...to see the real and imaginary components of the signal and thus detect the reason for the irregu lar signal Normally when you switch to a different application evaluation is performed on the data that was captured by that application and not the previous one In our example that would mean the irregular signal would be lost Therefore a second oper ating mode is available in the R S FSW Multi Standa...

Page 97: ...d The default operating mode is Sig nal and Spectrum Analyzer mode however the presetting can be changed Remote command INST MODE SAN see INSTrument MODE on page 686 Switching between applications When you switch to a new application a set of parameters is passed on from the cur rent application to the new one center frequency and frequency offset reference level and reference level offset attenua...

Page 98: ... R S FSW Realtime Spectrum Application and MSRT Operating Mode User Manual Spectrogram application Spectrogram measurements are not a separate application but rather a trace evalua tion method thus they are available as an evaluation method for the Display Configu ration not by creating a new channel Spectrograms are configured and activated in the Trace settings See chapter 7 3 1 6 Working with S...

Page 99: ...EV DO BTS Measurements option R S FSW K84 This application provides test measure ments for 1xEV DO BTS downlink signals base station signals according to the test specification For details see the R S FSW K84 K85 User Manual Remote command INST SEL BDO see INSTrument SELect on page 686 1xEV DO MS The 1xEV DO MS application requires an instrument equipped with the 1xEV DO MS Measurements option R S...

Page 100: ...lication provides test measure ments for cdma2000 BTS downlink signals base station signals according to the test specification For details see the R S FSW K82 K83 User Manual Remote command INST SEL BC2K see INSTrument SELect on page 686 cdma2000 MS The cdma2000 MS application requires an instrument equipped with the cdma2000 MS Measurements option R S FSW K83 This application provides test measu...

Page 101: ...R S FSW K30 This application provides noise figure measure ments For details see the R S FSW K30 User Manual Remote command INST SEL NOISE see INSTrument SELect on page 686 Phase Noise The Phase Noise application requires an instrument equipped with the Phase Noise Measurements option R S FSW K40 This application provides measurements for phase noise tests For details see the R S FSW K40 User Manu...

Page 102: ...FSW K76 K77 User Manual Remote command INST SEL MTDS see INSTrument SELect on page 686 Transient Analysis The Transient Analysis application requires an instrument equipped with the Transient Analysis option R S FSW K60 This application provides measurements and evalua tions for Transient Analysis For details see the R S FSW K60 User Manual Remote command INST SEL TA see INSTrument SELect on page ...

Page 103: ...ate the Signal and Spectrum Analyzer operating mode 1 Select the MODE key A dialog box opens that contains all operating modes and applications currently available on your R S FSW 2 Select the Signal and Spectrum Analyzer tab 3 Confirm the message informing you that you are changing operating modes The R S FSW stores and closes all active measurement channels in the current operating mode then ope...

Page 104: ...view of default names see table 11 1 Switching between applications When you switch to a new application a set of parameters is passed on from the cur rent application to the new one center frequency and frequency offset reference level and reference level offset attenuation After initial setup the parameters for the measurement channel are stored upon exiting and restored upon re entering the cha...

Page 105: ...4 5 Running a Sequence of Measurements Only one measurement can be performed at any time namely the one in the currently active channel However in order to perform the configured measurements consecu tively a Sequencer function is provided The Sequencer function is slightly different in MSRA or MSRT operating mode For details see the R S FSW MSRA User Manual or the R S FSW Realtime Spectrum Applic...

Page 106: ...to single sweep mode each measurement is performed once until all measurements in all active channels have been performed Continuous Sequence Similar to continuous sweep mode the measurements in each active channel are performed one after the other repeatedly in the same order until sequential oper ation is stopped This is the default Sequencer mode Channel defined Sequence First a single sequence...

Page 107: ...ndividual sweeps RUN SINGLE starts the Sequencer in single mode while RUN CONT starts the Sequencer in continuous mode The Single Sweep and Continuous Sweep softkeys control the sweep mode for the currently selected channel only the sweep mode only has an effect the next time the Sequencer activates that channel and only for a channel defined sequence In this case a channel in single sweep mode is...

Page 108: ...Continuous Sequence The measurements in each active channel are performed one after the other repeatedly in the same order until sequential operation is stopped This is the default Sequencer mode Channel defined Sequence First a single sequence is performed Then only channels in continu ous sweep mode are repeated Channel defined sequence is not available in Multi Standard Real time MSRT operating...

Page 109: ...after the other in the order of the tabs until the Sequencer is stopped The result displays in the individual channels are updated as the measurements are performed To stop the Sequencer To stop the Sequencer temporarily press the highlighted RUN SINGLE or RUN CONT key not for a channel defined sequence To continue the Sequencer press the key again To stop the Sequencer permanently select the Sequ...

Page 110: ...rum application The results however may differ slightly as hardware settings are not adapted auto matically as for the Spectrum application Additionally the analysis interval used for the measurement is indicated as in all MSRA applications For more information see the R S FSW MSRA User Manual Available Measurement Functions 110 Basic Measurements 115 Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR ...

Page 111: ...on methods are also available see chap ter 7 Common Analysis and Display Functions on page 440 After a preset the R S FSW performs a basic frequency sweep Frequency Sweep 111 Zero Span 112 Ch Power ACLR 112 C N C No 112 OBW 113 Spectrum Emission Mask 113 Spurious Emissions 113 APD 113 CCDF 114 Time Domain Power 114 TOI 114 AM Mod Depth 114 Harmonic Distortion 114 EMI 115 Marker Functions 115 All F...

Page 112: ...annel power for one or more carrier sig nals depending on the current measurement configuration and opens a submenu to configure the channel power measurement For details see chapter 5 3 Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measurement on page 135 Remote command CALC MARK FUNC POW SEL ACP see CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer SELect on page 698 Results CALC MARK FUNC POW RES ACP see CAL...

Page 113: ...hapter 5 6 Spectrum Emission Mask SEM Measurement on page 194 Remote command SENS SWE MODE ESP see SENSe SWEep MODE on page 731 Results CALC MARK FUNC POW RES CPOW PPOW see CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer sb RESult on page 696 CALC LIM FAIL see CALCulate LIMit k FAIL on page 987 TRACe n DATA on page 922 TRACe n DATA X on page 924 chapter 11 5 6 Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask on page 729 Spur...

Page 114: ...MMary STATe on page 789 chapter 11 5 9 Measuring the Time Domain Power on page 787 TOI Measures the third order intercept point and opens a submenu to configure the mea surement For details see chapter 5 11 Third Order Intercept TOI Measurement on page 275 Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion TOI STATe on page 799 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion TOI RESult on page 800 chapter 11 5 11 Measuri...

Page 115: ... page 803 Marker Functions In addition to the measurement functions some special marker functions are available See chapter 7 4 3 Marker Function Configuration on page 507 All Functions Off Switches off all measurement functions and returns to a basic frequency sweep 5 2 Basic Measurements Basic measurements are common sweeps in the time or frequency domain which pro vide an overview of the basic ...

Page 116: ...rt the measurement press the RUN SINGLE key again The key is no longer high lighted The results are not deleted until a new measurement is started 8 To repeat the same number of sweeps without deleting the last trace select the Continue Single Sweep softkey in the Sweep menu To start continuous sweeping 1 If you want to average the trace or search for a maximum over more or less than 10 sweeps con...

Page 117: ...tainty is determined by the refer ence frequency of the R S FSW the resolution of the marker frequency display and the number of sweep points 1 Select PRESET to reset the instrument 2 Connect the signal to be measured to the RF INPUT connector on the R S FSW 3 Set the center frequency to 128 MHz 4 Reduce the frequency span to 1 MHz Note Coupled settings When the frequency span is defined the resol...

Page 118: ...the diagram reference level or immediately below it Low Reference Levels If the selected reference level is lower than the highest signal that occurs in the spec trum the signal path in the R S FSW is overloaded In this case the message IFOVL is displayed in the error message field In the presettings the value of the reference level is 0 dBm If the input signal is 30 dBm the reference level can be...

Page 119: ...e frequency 5 Select MKR to activate marker 1 and automatically set it to the maximum of the trace The level and the frequency of the marker are displayed in the marker results in the diagram or the marker table 6 Select MKR FUNC Signal Count to activate the signal counter The result of the signal counter is displayed in the marker results 7 If necessary increase the resolution of the signal count...

Page 120: ...width on page 403 chapter 6 5 1 2 Smoothing the Trace Using the Video Bandwidth on page 404 chapter 7 3 1 1 Mapping Samples to Sweep Points with the Trace Detector on page 452 This measurement example shows the different factors influencing the S N ratio Table 5 2 Signal generator settings e g R S SMU Frequency 128 MHz Level 95 dBm 1 Preset the R S FSW 2 Set the center frequency to 128 MHz 3 Set t...

Page 121: ...atically switches on the sample detector The RF signal therefore can be more clearly distinguished from noise Fig 5 2 RF sine wave signal with low S N ratio with an averaged trace 6 Instead of trace averaging you can select a video filter that is narrower than the resolution bandwidth Set the trace mode back to Clear Write then set the VBW to 10 kHz manually in the Bandwidth configuration dialog T...

Page 122: ... to 100 kHz The displayed noise is reduced by approximately 10 dB The signal therefore emerges from noise by about 10 dB Compared to the previous setting the video bandwidth has remained the same i e it has increased relative to the smaller reso lution bandwidth The averaging effect of the video bandwidth is therefore reduced The trace will be noisier Fig 5 4 Reference signal at a smaller resoluti...

Page 123: ...e displayed as a single component see also chapter 6 5 1 1 Separating Signals by Selecting an Appropriate Resolution Bandwidth on page 403 Two signals with the same amplitude can be resolved if the resolution bandwidth is smaller than or equal to the frequency spacing of the signal If the resolution bandwidth is equal to the frequency spacing the spectrum display shows a level drop of 3 dB pre cis...

Page 124: ...es additional voltages which are visible in the trace in the transition area between the two signals Fig 5 6 Measurement of two equally leveled RF sinusoidal signals with the resolution band width which corresponds to the frequency spacing of the signals Matching generator and R S FSW frequencies The level drop is located exactly in the center of the display only if the generator frequencies match...

Page 125: ...dth which is larger than their frequency spacing 6 Set the resolution bandwidth to 1 kHz The two generator signals are shown with high resolution However the sweep time becomes longer At smaller bandwidths the noise display decreases simulta neously 10 dB decrease in noise floor for a decrease in bandwidth by a factor of 10 Basic Measurements ...

Page 126: ...olved with a narrow bandwidth and measured separately The modulation depth of a carrier modulated with a sinusoidal signal can then be measured Since the dynamic range of a signal ana lyzer is very large extremely small modulation depths can also be measured precisely For this purpose the R S FSW provides measurement routines that output the modu lation depth numerically in percent directly Signal...

Page 127: ... the main marker and outputs the numeric value in the marker information Fig 5 10 Measurement of the AM modulation depth The modulation depth is displayed as MDepth The frequency of the AF signal can be obtained from the frequency display of the delta marker 5 2 4 3 Measuring AM Modulated Signals The R S FSW rectifies the RF input signal that is removes the negative parts and displays it as a magn...

Page 128: ...an 4 Set the sweep time to 2 5 ms 5 Set the reference level to 6 dBm and the display range to linear AMPT Scale Config Scaling Linear Percent 6 Define triggering in response to the AF signal using the video trigger to produce a static image a Press the TRIG key b Select Video c Set the Trg Gate Level to 50 The trigger level is displayed as a horizontal line across the entire measurement diagram Th...

Page 129: ...ment Examples in Zero Span For radio transmission systems that use the TDMA method for example GSM trans mission quality is determined not only by spectral characteristics but also by character istics in zero span A timeslot is assigned to each user since several users share the same frequency Smooth operation is ensured only if all users adhere exactly to their assigned timeslots Both the power d...

Page 130: ...r 10 dB AMPT 5 Set the attenuation to 20 dB AMPT Rf Atten Manual 6 Set the resolution bandwidth to 1 MHz BW Res BW 7 Set the sweep time to 1 ms SWEEP Sweeptime Manual The R S FSW shows the GSM burst continuously across the display 8 Using the video trigger set triggering on the rising edge of the burst a Press the TRIG key b Set the Trg Gate Source to Video c Set the Trg Gate Level to 70 The R S F...

Page 131: ... R S FSW displays the average mean power during the activation phase of the burst Fig 5 14 Measurement of the average power during the burst of a GSM signal Measuring the Edges of a GSM Burst with High Time Resolution Due to the high time resolution of the R S FSW at the 0 Hz display range the edges of TDMA bursts can be measured precisely The edges can be shifted to the display area using the tri...

Page 132: ... key b Select All Functions Off 2 Increase the time resolution to 100 µs SWEEP Sweeptime Manual 3 Shift the rising edge of the GSM burst to the center of the display by defining a trig ger offset a Press the TRIG key b Select Trigger Offset c By turning the rotary knob counterclockwise reduce the trigger offset until the burst edge is displayed in the center of the display or enter 50 µs The R S F...

Page 133: ... the Signal to Noise Ratio of Burst Signals When TDMA transmission methods are used the signal to noise ratio or the dynamic range for deactivation can be measured by comparing the power values during the activation phase and the deactivation phase of the transmission burst Therefore the R S FSW provides a measurement for absolute and relative power in zero span In the following example the measur...

Page 134: ...e step 3 in Measuring the Edges of a GSM Burst with High Time Resolution on page 131 8 Activate power measurement within the activation phase of the burst in zero span a Press the MEAS key b Select Time Domain Power c Select Time Dom Power Config d Set the Limits state to On e Select the Left Limit input field f By turning the rotary knob clockwise move the vertical line S1 to the start of the bur...

Page 135: ...nnel is useful to detect interference The results are displayed as a bar chart for the individual channels About Channel Power Measurements 136 Channel Power Results 136 Channel Power Basics 138 Channel Power Configuration 148 MSR ACLR Configuration 158 How to Perform Channel Power Measurements 172 Measurement Examples 176 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement 182 Reference Predefined CP ...

Page 136: ... only if the assumption of a Gaussian amplitude distribution is correct Apart from this common method the R S FSW also has a true power detector i e an RMS detector It displays the power of the test signal within the selected resolution bandwidth correctly irrespective of the amplitude distribution without additional correc tion factors being required The R S FSW allows you to perform ACLR measure...

Page 137: ...ured 3 The channel power the power of the upper and lower adjacent channel the power of the next higher and lower channel alternate channel 1 and of the next but one higher and lower adja cent channel alternate channel 2 are measured 12 The channel power the power of the upper and lower adjacent channel and the power of all the higher and lower channels alternate channels 1 to 11 are measured In t...

Page 138: ...al using the TRAC DATA commands see TRACe n DATA on page 922 In this case the measured power value for each sweep point by default 1001 is returned 5 3 3 Channel Power Basics Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used in channel power measurements is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration settings Measurement Methods 138 Measurement Repeatability 1...

Page 139: ...summed up and the sum is divided by the number of trace points in the channel 3 The result is multiplied by the quotient of the selected channel bandwidth and the noise bandwidth of the resolution filter RBW Since the power calculation is performed by integrating the trace within the channel bandwidth this method is called the IBW method Integration Bandwidth method Fast ACLR The integrated bandwi...

Page 140: ...tio for CDMA2000 signals with zero span Fast ACLR 5 3 3 2 Measurement Repeatability The repeatability of the results especially in the narrow adjacent channels strongly depends on the measurement time for a given resolution bandwidth A longer sweep time may increase the probability that the measured value converges to the true value of the adjacent channel power but obviously increases measurement...

Page 141: ...ity of power measurements in the transmit chan nel and of relative power measurements in the adjacent channels as a function of sweep time The standard deviation of measurement results is calculated from 100 consecutive measurements Take scaling into account if comparing power values Fig 5 23 Repeatability of adjacent channel power measurements on CDMA2000 signals in the fast ACLR mode 5 3 3 3 Rec...

Page 142: ...nt time is to be increased to 200 ms The number of A D converter values N used to calculate the power is defined by the sweep time The time per trace pixel for power measurements is directly proportional to the selected sweep time If the sample detector is used it is best to select the smallest sweep time possible for a given span and resolution bandwidth The minimum time is obtained if the settin...

Page 143: ...channel spacing the adjacent channel spacing and the bandwidth of one of adjacent channels ADJ ALT1 or ALT2 whichever is furthest away from the transmission chan nels No of transmission channels 1 x transmission channel spacing 2 x adjacent channel spacing adjacent channel bandwidth measurement margin The measurement margin is approx 10 of the value obtained by adding the channel spacing and the c...

Page 144: ...iguration dialog box see VBW on page 410 The video bandwidth VBW is set as a function of the channel bandwidth see formula above and the smallest possible VBW with regard to the available step size is selected Detector The RMS detector correctly indicates the power irrespective of the characteristics of the signal to be measured The whole IF envelope is used to calculate the power for each measure...

Page 145: ... channel power measurements is significantly smaller than the signal bandwidth the signal path may be overloaded although the trace is still signifi cantly below the reference level The reference level is not influenced by the selection of a predefined standard or by the automatic setting adjustment The reference level can be set automatically using the Auto Level function in the AUTO SET menu or ...

Page 146: ... and num ber of transmit channels Fig 5 25 Sub block definition As opposed to common ACLR channel definitions the Tx channels are defined at absolute frequencies rather than by a spacing relative to the common center fre quency Each transmit channel can be assigned a different technology used to prede fine the required bandwidth Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measurement ...

Page 147: ...f the upper adjacent channels refers to the CF of the last Tx channel in the last sub block Channel display for MSR signals As in common ACLR measurements the individual channels are indicated by different colored bars in the diagram The height of each bar corresponds to the measured power of that channel In addition the name of the channel is indicated above the bar Sub blocks are named A B C D E...

Page 148: ...y for the ACLR measurement with the R S FSW No checks or limitations are implemented concerning the channel definitions apart from the maximum number of channels to be defined Thus you will not be notified if trans mit channels for a specific sub block lie outside the sub block s defined frequency range or if transmit and CACLR channels overlap 5 3 4 Channel Power Configuration Channel Power CP an...

Page 149: ...CP ACLR Measurement Settings 149 Channel Setup 155 5 3 4 1 General CP ACLR Measurement Settings General measurement settings are defined in the ACLR Setup dialog in the General Settings tab Standard 150 Predefined Standards 150 User Defined Standards 150 Number of Channels Tx ADJ 152 Reference Channel 152 Noise cancellation 153 Fast ACLR 153 Selected Trace 153 Absolute and Relative Values ACLR Mod...

Page 150: ...en such a standard is loaded the required channel settings are automati cally set on the R S FSW However the settings can be changed The predefined standards contain the following settings Channel bandwidths Channel spacings Detector Trace Average setting Resolution Bandwidth RBW Weighting Filter Predefined standards can be selected via the CP ACLR Standard softkey in the CH Power menu or in the G...

Page 151: ... nels Channel spacings Weighting filters Resolution bandwidth Video bandwidth Detector ACLR limits and their state Sweep time and sweep time coupling Trace and power mode MSR only sub block and gap channel definition User defined standards are managed in the Manage dialog box which is displayed when you select the Manage User Standards button in the General Settings tab of the CP ACLR Setup dialog...

Page 152: ...nel powers are measured with adequate accuracy For more information on how the number of channels affects the measured powers see chapter 5 3 2 Channel Power Results on page 136 Remote command Number of Tx channels SENSe POWer ACHannel TXCHannel COUNt on page 704 Number of Adjacent channels SENSe POWer ACHannel ACPairs on page 702 Reference Channel The measured power values in the adjacent channel...

Page 153: ...ailable for the following trace detectors see Detector on page 466 RMS Average Sample Positive Peak Remote command SENSe POWer NCORrection on page 845 Fast ACLR If activated instead of using the IBW method the R S FSW sets the center frequency to the different channel center frequencies consecutively and measures the power with the selected measurement time sweep time number of channels Remote com...

Page 154: ...fected by this setting Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer MODE on page 696 Setting a Fixed Reference for Channel Power Measurements Set CP Reference For pure channel power measurements no adjacent channels defined with only one Tx channel the currently measured channel power can be used as a fixed reference value for subsequent channel power measurements When you select this button...

Page 155: ...x Remote command SENSe SWEep TIME on page 842 5 3 4 2 Channel Setup The Channel Settings tab in the ACLR Setup dialog box provides all the channel settings to configure the channel power or ACLR measurement You can define the channel settings for all channels independent of the defined number of used Tx or adjacent channels see Number of Channels Tx ADJ on page 152 For details on setting up channe...

Page 156: ...bandwidth The value entered for any Tx channel is automatically also defined for all subsequent Tx channels Thus only one value needs to be entered if all Tx channels have the same bandwidth The value entered for any ADJ or ALT channel is automatically also defined for all alternate ALT channels Thus only one value needs to be entered if all adjacent channels have the same bandwidth Remote command...

Page 157: ...spac ings ALT1 ALT2 are multiplied by the same factor new spacing value old spac ing value Again only one value needs to be entered for equal channel spacing For different spacing configure the spacings from top to bottom For details see chapter 5 3 6 2 How to Set up the Channels on page 173 Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing CHANnel ch on page 704 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ACHannel on...

Page 158: ...be defined manually where they are available Remote command Activating Deactivating SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe CHANnel ch on page 706 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe ACHannel on page 706 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe ALTernate ch on page 706 Alpha value SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa CHANnel ch on page 706 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ACHannel on page 705 SENSe POWer ACHannel ...

Page 159: ...nals on page 145 The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in chap ter 11 5 3 Measuring the Channel Power and ACLR on page 700 General MSR ACLR Measurement Settings 159 MSR Sub block and Tx Channel Definition 164 MSR Adjacent and Gap Channel Setup 167 5 3 5 1 General MSR ACLR Measurement Settings General MSR ACLR measurement settings are defined in the MSR ACLR Setup dia lo...

Page 160: ...ttings Channel bandwidths Channel spacings Detector Trace Average setting Resolution Bandwidth RBW Weighting Filter Predefined standards can be selected via the CP ACLR Standard softkey in the CH Power menu or in the General Settings tab of the CP ACLR Setup dialog box For details on the available standards see chapter 5 3 9 Reference Predefined CP ACLR Standards on page 183 Remote command CALCula...

Page 161: ...eep time and sweep time coupling Trace and power mode MSR only sub block and gap channel definition User defined standards are managed in the Manage dialog box which is displayed when you select the Manage User Standards button in the General Settings tab of the CP ACLR Setup dialog box In the Manage dialog box you can save the current measurement settings as a user defined standard or load a stor...

Page 162: ... than one Tx channel is defined you must select which one is to be used as a reference channel Tx Channel 1 Transmission channel 1 is used Not available for MSR ACLR Min Power Tx Channel The transmission channel with the lowest power is used as a reference channel Max Power Tx Chan nel The transmission channel with the highest power is used as a reference channel Default Lowest Highest Channel The...

Page 163: ...Bm Hz absolute values or in dBc relative to the specified reference Tx channel Abs The absolute power in the adjacent channels is displayed in the unit of the y axis e g in dBm dBµV Rel The level of the adjacent channels is displayed relative to the level of the transmission channel in dBc Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel MODE on page 722 Channel Power Levels and Density Power Unit By default t...

Page 164: ...etup channel bandwidth channel spacing can be optimized automatically The adjustment is carried out only once If necessary the instrument settings can be changed later The following settings are optimized by Adjust Settings Frequency Span on page 143 Resolution Bandwidth RBW on page 143 Video Bandwidth VBW on page 144 Detector on page 144 Trace Averaging on page 145 Note The reference level is not...

Page 165: ...nition 165 Sub block Center Frequency 166 RF Bandwidth 166 Number of Tx Channels Tx Count 166 Tx Channel Definition 166 Tx Center Frequency 166 Technology Used for Transmission 167 Tx Channel Bandwidth 167 Weighting Filters 167 Sub block Definition Sub blocks are groups of transmit channels in an MSR signal Up to 5 sub blocks can be defined They are defined as an RF bandwidth around a center frequ...

Page 166: ...ede fine the required bandwidth The Tx channel settings for the individual sub blocks are configured in individual sub tabs of the Tx Channel Settings tab For details on configuring MSR Tx channels see chapter 5 3 6 3 How to Configure an MSR ACLR Measurement on page 174 Note Channel names In MSR ACLR measurements Tx channel names correspond to the specified technology for LTE including the bandwid...

Page 167: ...ology Each Tx channel is defined independently of the others automatic bandwidth configu ration for subsequent channels as in common ACLR measurements is not performed The bandwidth for each channel is indicated by a colored bar in the display Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock sb BANDwidth BWIDth CHANnel ch on page 717 Weighting Filters Tx Channel Definition Weighting filters allow you to...

Page 168: ...inition 171 Gap CACLR Channel Spacings 171 Gap CACLR Channel Bandwidths 171 Weighting Filters 171 Limit Checking 172 Number of Adjacent Channels ADJ Count Defines the number of adjacent channels above and below the Tx channel block in an MSR signal The carrier channel to which the relative adjacent channel power values should be referenced must be defined see Reference Channel on page 152 Remote c...

Page 169: ...elected technology but can be changed For MSR signals adjacent channels are defined in relation to the center frequency of the first and last transmission channel in the entire block i e The spacing of the lower adjacent channels refers to the CF of the first Tx channel in the first sub block The spacing of the upper adjacent channels refers to the CF of the last Tx channel in the last sub block I...

Page 170: ...d whether they exceed user defined or standard defined limits A relative or absolute limit can be defined or both for each individual adjacent channel Both limit types are considered regardless whether the measured levels are absolute or relative values The check of both limit values can be activated independently If any active limit value is exceeded the measured value is displayed in red and mar...

Page 171: ...spacing can be deter mined according to the following formula indicated for lower channels Spacing CF of the gap channel left sub block center RF bandwidth of left sub block 2 Spacing CF of the gap channel left sub block center RF bandwidth of left sub block 2 See also figure 5 24 and figure 5 25 For details see chapter 5 3 6 3 How to Configure an MSR ACLR Measurement on page 174 Remote command SE...

Page 172: ...14 CALCulate LIMit ACPower GAP gap RESult on page 715 5 3 6 How to Perform Channel Power Measurements The following step by step instructions demonstrate the most common tasks when per forming channel power measurements How to Perform a Standard Channel Power Measurement 172 How to Set up the Channels 173 How to Configure an MSR ACLR Measurement 174 How to Manage User Defined Configurations 175 Ho...

Page 173: ... limits for a limit check on the measured power levels Changes to an existing standard can be stored as a user defined standard see chap ter 5 3 6 4 How to Manage User Defined Configurations on page 175 In the Ch Power menu select the CP ACLR Config softkey then select the Channel Settings tab to configure the channels in the ACLR Setup dialog box In the Channel Setup dialog box you can define the...

Page 174: ... number of sub blocks up to 5 5 Select the Tx Channel Settings tab to configure the sub blocks and transmission channels For each sub block a Define the center frequency position and bandwidth of the sub block as well as the number of transmission channels it contains b For each transmission channel in the sub block define the center frequency and select the technology used for transmission If nec...

Page 175: ...d 5 3 6 4 How to Manage User Defined Configurations You can define measurement configurations independently of a predefined standard and save the current ACLR configuration as a user standard in an xml file You can then load the file and thus the settings again at a later time User defined standards are not supported for Fast ACLR and multicarrier ACLR measurements Compatibility to R S FSP User st...

Page 176: ...n the Ch Power menu or the Set CP Reference button in the ACLR Setup dialog box The channel power currently measured on the Tx channel is stored as a fixed ref erence power The reference value is displayed in the Reference field of the result table in relative ACLR mode 3 Start a new measurement The resulting power is indicated relative to the fixed reference power 4 Repeat this for any number of ...

Page 177: ...screen the numeric values of the results and the channel configuration in the lower part of the screen The various channels are rep resented by vertical lines on the graph The frequency span resolution bandwidth video bandwidth and detector are selected automatically to give correct results To obtain stable results especially in the adjacent channels 30 kHz bandwidth which are narrow in comparison...

Page 178: ...R S FSW Signal generator settings e g R S FSW SMU Frequency 1950 MHz Level 4 dBm Modulation 3GPP W CDMA Reverse Link Procedure 1 Preset the R S FSW 2 Set the center frequency to 1950 MHz 3 Select the Channel Power ACLR measurement function from the Select Mea surement dialog box 4 Set the W CDMA 3GPP REV standard for adjacent channel power measurement in the ACLR Setup dialog box Channel Power and...

Page 179: ...he power in the transmission channel to obtain the maximum dynamic range The fol lowing figure shows the result of the measurement Fig 5 27 Measuring the relative adjacent channel power on a W CDMA uplink signal The R S FSW measures the power of the individual channels with zero span A root raised cosine filter with the parameters α 0 22 and chip rate 3 84 Mcps receive filter for W CDMA is used as...

Page 180: ... in 1 dB steps with the 1 dB RF attenuator the optimum range spreads from 10 dBm to 14 dBm To set the attenuation parameter manually the following method is recommended Set the RF attenuation so that the mixer level measured channel power RF attenuation is between 10 dBm and 14 dBm This method is automated with the Auto Level function Especially in remote control mode e g in production environment...

Page 181: ...t mea surement results Test setup Leave the RF input of the R S FSW open circuited or terminate it with 50 Ω Procedure 1 Preset the R S FSW 2 Set the center frequency to 1 GHz and the span to 1 MHz 3 To obtain maximum sensitivity set RF attenuation to 0 dB and the reference level to 40 dBm 4 Select the Channel Power ACLR measurement function from the Select Mea surement dialog box 5 In the ACLR Se...

Page 182: ...larger dynamic range see Optimization on page 413 Reduce the sweep time and thus the amount of data to be captured and calcula ted however consider the requirements regarding the standard deviation To improve the stability of the measured results increase the sweep time which also leads to more averaging steps Instead of trace averaging use an RMS detector with a higher sweep time to obtain better...

Page 183: ...CLR standards with remote command parameters Standard Remote parameter None NONE Multi Standard Radio MSR EUTRA LTE Square EUTRa EUTRA LTE Square RRC REUTra W CDMA 3GPP FWD FW3Gppcdma W CDMA 3GPP REV RW3Gppcdma CDMA IS95A FWD F8CDma CDMA IS95A REV R8CDma CDMA IS95C Class 0 FWD FIS95c0 CDMA IS95C Class 0 REV RIS95c0 CDMA J STD008 FWD F19Cdma CDMA J STD008 REV R19Cdma CDMA IS95C Class 1 FWD FIS95c1 ...

Page 184: ... Configuration 186 How to Determine the Carrier to Noise Ratio 187 5 4 1 About the Measurement The largest signal in the frequency span is the carrier It is searched when the C N or C NO function is activated and is marked using a fixed reference marker FXD To determine the noise power a channel with a defined bandwidth at the defined cen ter frequency is analyzed The power within this channel is ...

Page 185: ...he noise of the test setup is active in the channel The carrier to noise ratio is displayed after the subsequent mea surement has been completed Frequency Span The frequency span should be set to approximately 4 times the channel bandwidth in order to measure the carrier to noise ratio correctly This setting is defined automati cally by the Adjust Settings function 5 4 2 Carrier to Noise Results A...

Page 186: ...ee chapter 6 1 Configuration Overview on page 312 The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in chap ter 11 5 4 Measuring the Carrier to Noise Ratio on page 726 C N 186 C No 186 Channel Bandwidth 187 Adjust Settings 187 C N Switches the measurement of the carrier noise ratio on or off If no marker is active marker 1 is activated The measurement is performed on the trace that...

Page 187: ... measurement margin The adjustment is performed once if necessary the setting can be changed later on Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet on page 699 5 4 4 How to Determine the Carrier to Noise Ratio 1 Press the C N C NO softkey to configure the carrier to noise ratio measurement 2 To change the channel bandwidth to be analyzed press the Channel Bandwidth softkey 3 To optimize the settings ...

Page 188: ...tal transmitted power A percentage between 10 and 99 9 can be set Measurement principle The bandwidth containing 99 of the signal power is to be determined for example The algorithm first calculates the total power of all displayed points of the trace In the next step the points from the right edge of the trace are summed up until 0 5 of the total power is reached Auxiliary marker 1 is positioned ...

Page 189: ... see How to determine the OBW for a multicarrier signal using search limits on page 193 Prerequisites To ensure correct power measurement especially for noise signals and to obtain the correct occupied bandwidth the following prerequisites and settings are necessary Only the signal to be measured is displayed in the window or search limits are defined to include only one carrier signal An addition...

Page 190: ...erforming a new sweep Thus the OBW for a multicarrier signal can be determined using only one sweep Remote command The determined occupied bandwidth can also be queried using the remote command CALC MARK FUNC POW RES OBW or CALC MARK FUNC POW RES AOBW While the OBW parameter returns only the occupied bandwidth the AOBW parameter also returns the position and level of the temporary markers T1 and T...

Page 191: ... limits for OBW measurement The OBW measurement uses the same search limits as defined for marker search see Search Limits on page 500 However only the left and right limits are consid ered The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in chap ter 11 5 5 Measuring the Occupied Bandwidth on page 727 Power Bandwidth 191 Channel Bandwidth 192 Adjust Settings 192 Search Limits Left...

Page 192: ...ptimized Frequency span 3 channel bandwidth RBW 1 40 of channel bandwidth VBW 3 RBW Detector RMS The reference level is not affected by Adjust Settings For an optimum dynamic range it should be selected such that the signal maximum is close to the reference level see Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level on page 397 The adjustment is carried out only once If necessary the instrument...

Page 193: ...ion from the Select Measurement dialog box 2 Select the OBW Config softkey to display the Occupied Bandwidth configuration dialog box 3 Define the percentage of power Power Bandwidth that defines the bandwidth to be determined 4 Define search limits so the search area contains only the first carrier signal a Enter values for the left or right limits or both b Enable the use of the required limits ...

Page 194: ... FSW supports Spectrum Emission Mask SEM measurements About the Measurement 194 Typical Applications 195 SEM Results 195 SEM Basics 198 SEM Configuration 208 How to Perform a Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement 225 Measurement Example Multi SEM Measurement 230 Reference SEM File Descriptions 231 5 6 1 About the Measurement The Spectrum Emission Mask SEM measurement defines a measurement that moni t...

Page 195: ... lations of the mask may interfere with other transmissions The 3GPP TS 34 122 standard for example defines a mask for emissions outside the transmission channel This mask is defined relative to the input signal power Three frequency ranges to each side of the transmission channel are defined 5 6 3 SEM Results As a result of the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement the measured signal levels the res...

Page 196: ...ence range Tx Bandwidth Tx bandwidth used by the reference range RBW RBW used by the reference range Range results Range Low Frequency range start the peak value was found in Range Up Frequency range end the peak value was found in RBW RBW of the range Frequency Frequency of the peak power level Power Abs Absolute peak power level within the range Power Rel Peak power level within the range relati...

Page 197: ...surement Furthermore you can export the results of the result summary to a file which can be exported to another application for further analysis Results for SEM with multiple sub blocks As of firmware version 1 91 and in the Spectrum application only spectrum emissions can be measured for multiple sub blocks of channels see chapter 5 6 4 5 SEM with Multiple Sub Blocks Multi SEM on page 205 for de...

Page 198: ...POW RES PPOW see CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer sb RESult on page 696 The measured power trace can be queried using TRAC DATA and TRAC DATA X see TRACe n DATA on page 922 and TRACe n DATA X on page 924 The measured peak power list can be queried using TRAC DATA LIST see TRACe n DATA on page 922 5 6 4 SEM Basics Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used in SEM measure ments is p...

Page 199: ...sert or delete ranges The changes of the sweep list are only kept until you load another parameter set by pressing PRESET or by loading an XML file If you want a parameter set to be availa ble permanently create an XML file for this configuration for details refer to How to save a user defined SEM settings file on page 229 If you load one of the provided XML files the sweep list contains ranges an...

Page 200: ...ll minimum sweep point requirements in all ranges the global Sweep Points setting is increased By default each range is supplied with a minimum of one sweep point This allows you to increase the resolution within a specific range for detailed analysis without increasing the overall number of sweep points and thus the measurement time for the SEM measurement Symmetrical ranges You can easily define...

Page 201: ...ne definitions In the Sweep List you can define a limit line for each power class that varies its level according to the specified frequency ranges Special limit lines are automatically defined for each power class according to the current Sweep List settings every time the settings change These limit lines are labeled _SEM_LINE_ xxx _ABS 0 3 and _SEM_LINE_ xxx _REL 0 3 where xxx is an index to di...

Page 202: ...ange If you use a function to define the relative limit start or stop value the signal is checked against an additional condition if the power exceeds the absolute limit or the higher of the absolute and relative function values the check fails Relative limit line functions A new function allows you to define limit lines whose start or end points or both are variable depending on the carrier power...

Page 203: ...ts remain unchanged and still consist of several ranges Thus measurement settings that apply only to the results such as limits or transducer factors can nevertheless be defined individually for each range Prerequisites Fast SEM mode is available if the following criteria apply The frequency ranges are consecutive without frequency gaps The following sweep settings are identical for details see ch...

Page 204: ...e displayed as one single range The sweep time is defined as the sum of the individual sweep times initially but can be changed If Symmetrical Setup mode is active when Fast SEM mode is activated not all sweep list settings can be configured symmetrically automatically see also Symmetric Setup on page 215 Any other changes to the sweep settings of the combined range are applied to each included ra...

Page 205: ...ocks may include gaps or overlap and each sub block defines a separate mask The behavior in the overlapping masks is defined by multi limit line calculation Up to three sub blocks with two gaps can be defined For each sub block the familiar configuration settings concerning ranges limit lines and MSR can be defined individually Comparison to traditional SEM measurement The default SEM measurement ...

Page 206: ...k in the overlapping regions To answer this question we must distinguish the following cases For the reference range no limit checking is performed as the reference range contains the carrier For other ranges only the limit lines defined for ranges between the carriers that is the reference ranges to either side are significant In other words if a limit line def inition covers the frequency area o...

Page 207: ... one to the right of the mid frequency The left subrange uses the limits and parameters of the left sub block the right subrange uses the limits and parameters of the right sub block Different RBWs in overlapping ranges If different RBWs are defined for the overlapping ranges the RBW as well as the VBW attenuation reference level transducer filter type and proportional sweep time of the range with...

Page 208: ...ted via the Spectrum Emission Mask button in the Select Measurement dialog box The measurement is started immediately with the default settings It can be configured via the MEAS CONFIG key or in the Spectrum Emission Mask configuration dialog box which is displayed when you select the SEM Setup button in the Overview or one of the softkeys from the SEMask menu The remote commands required to perfo...

Page 209: ...see chapter 5 6 5 2 Multi SEM Sub Block Settings on page 215 The following settings are available in individual tabs of the Spectrum Emission Mask configuration dialog box Sweep List 209 Multi SEM Sub Block Settings 215 Reference Range 216 Power Classes 218 MSR Settings 219 Standard Files 222 List Evaluation Results Configuration 224 5 6 5 1 Sweep List For SEM measurements the input signal is spli...

Page 210: ... 214 Delete Range 215 Symmetric Setup 215 Range Start Range Stop Sets the start frequency stop frequency of the selected range In order to change the start stop frequency of the first or last range respectively select the appropriate span with the SPAN key If you set a span that is smaller than the over all span of the ranges the measurement includes only the ranges that lie within the defined spa...

Page 211: ...ically Remote command SENSe ESPectrum sb HighSPeed on page 733 Filter Type Sets the filter type for this range For details on filter types see chapter 6 5 1 6 Which Data May Pass Filter Types on page 406 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range FILTer TYPE on page 735 RBW Sets the resolution bandwidth for this range For details on the RBW see chapter 6 5 1 1 Separating Signals by Selecting an...

Page 212: ...RANGe range INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 738 RF Attenuator Sets the attenuation value for the range For details on attenuation see chapter 6 4 1 2 RF Attenuation on page 394 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range INPut ATTenuation on page 737 Preamp Switches the preamplifier on or off For details on the preamplifier see Preamplifier option B24 on page 399 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum sb...

Page 213: ... stop frequency of the range dBm Remote command SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range LIMit PClass ABSolute STARt on page 739 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range LIMit PClass ABSolute STOP on page 740 Rel Limit Start Stop n Sets a relative limit value for the n th power class at the start or stop frequency of the range dBc By default this value is a fixed relative limit i e no function is defined To define a ...

Page 214: ...6 NONE reference ranges only the limit of the reference range is used SUM sum of the two limit lines calculated for linear powers is used MAX maximum of the two limit lines is used Remote command SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range MLCalc on page 745 Minimum Sweep Points Defines the minimum number of sweep points for the range If necessary to fulfill all minimum sweep point requirements in all ranges t...

Page 215: ...while Symmetric Setup mode is on Sym Setup mode is automatically also deactivated If Fast SEM mode is activated while Symmetric Setup mode is on not all range set tings can be set automatically 5 6 5 2 Multi SEM Sub Block Settings As of firmware version 1 91 and in the Spectrum application only spectrum emissions can be measured for multiple sub blocks of channels see chapter 5 6 4 5 SEM with Mult...

Page 216: ...tings file or a multi standard radio configuration for a particular sub block For details see chapter 5 6 5 6 Standard Files on page 222 and chapter 5 6 5 5 MSR Settings on page 219 Note that either a standard or an MSR setting can be selected if one is selected the other is disabled Remote command SENSe ESPectrum sb PRESet STANdard on page 730 chapter 11 5 6 3 Configuring a Multi SEM Measurement ...

Page 217: ...ower Determines the peak power within the reference range Remote command SENSe ESPectrum sb RTYPe on page 749 Channel Power Settings If the Power Reference Type Channel Power was selected additional parameters can be configured Tx Bandwidth Channel Power Settings Defines the bandwidth used for measuring the channel power with minimum span Tx Bandwidth span of reference range Remote command SENSe E...

Page 218: ...er Classes Defines which power classes are considered for the SEM measurement Limits can be defined only for used power classes It is only possible to select either one specific power class or all of the defined power classes If All is selected the power class that corresponds to the currently measured power in the reference range is used for monitoring The limits assigned to that power class are ...

Page 219: ... Sweep List Switches to the Sweep List tab of the Spectrum Emission Mask dialog box and focuses the Limit Check setting for the corresponding power class 1 4 in the refer ence range see Limit Check n on page 213 Adding or Removing a Power Class Adds a new power class at the end of the list or removes the last power class After adding or removing the last power class is adapted to end at INF Note t...

Page 220: ...y for MSR measurements i e the combination of available carriers to measure BC1 LTE FDD and W CDMA BC2 LTE FDD W CDMA and GSM EDGE BC3 LTE TDD and TD SCDMA Remote command SENSe ESPectrum sb MSR BCATegory on page 755 Base Station Class Defines the class of the base station according to its sending range This setting is required to calculate the SEM limits according to standard 3GPP 37 141 V12 2 0 R...

Page 221: ...th span required to measure all available carriers in MSR SEM measurements Remote command SENSe ESPectrum sb MSR RFBWidth on page 759 Carrier Adjacent to RF Bandwidth Edge For particular measurement setups the specification demands specific limits for the SEM ranges These settings are only available for Band Category 2 GSM EDGE present A GSM EDGE carrier is located at the edge of the RF band In th...

Page 222: ...the current measurement settings as a user defined standard xml file or load stored measurement settings Furthermore you can delete an existing settings file For details see chapter 5 6 6 1 How to Manage SEM Settings Files on page 228 Selecting the Storage Location Drive Path Files 222 File Name 223 Load Standard 223 Save Standard 223 Delete Standard 224 Restore Standard Files 224 Selecting the St...

Page 223: ...e Contain the name of the data file without the path or extension By default the name of a settings file consists of a base name followed by an under score Multiple files with the same base name are extended by three numbers e g limit_lines_005 For details on the file name and location see chapter 8 3 2 2 Storage Location and File Name on page 546 Note Secure user mode In secure user mode settings...

Page 224: ...lable at the time of deliv ery The XML files from the C R_S instr sem_backup folder are copied to the C R_S instr sem_std folder Note that this function will overwrite customized standards that have the same name as predefined standards Remote command SENSe ESPectrum sb PRESet RESTore on page 730 5 6 5 7 List Evaluation Results Configuration In the List Evaluation dialog box which is displayed whe...

Page 225: ... the decimal separator for evaluation in other languages Define the file name and storage location in the file selection dialog box that is dis played when you select the Save function For details see chapter 5 6 8 2 ASCII File Export Format Spectrum Emission Mask on page 237 Remote command MMEMory STORe LIST on page 1013 FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on page 991 5 6 6 How to Perform a Spectrum Emissi...

Page 226: ...e required limit values for monitoring If the signal consists of a transmission channel and adjacent channels the channel ranges can usually be used for the range definition 3 If the signal power level to be monitored may vary and the limits will vary accord ingly define power classes For each range of levels that can be monitored in the same way define a power class a Select the Overview softkey ...

Page 227: ...ks in the display during an SEM measurement select the Analysis button in the Overview and activate the Show Peaks option 10 To save the current SEM measurement settings to a file to re use them later save a settings file as described in How to save a user defined SEM settings file on page 229 11 Start a sweep The determined powers and limit deviations for each range are indicated in the Result Su...

Page 228: ...sure to select the correct vertical tab for the corresponding sub block within each subtab of the Spectrum Emission Mask configuration dialog Define a function to be used for overlapping ranges in the Multi Limit Calc field of the sweep list 6 Start a sweep The determined powers and limit deviations for each sub block each gap and each range are indicated in the Result Summary If activated the pea...

Page 229: ...ct the file you want to delete 2 Select the Delete button 3 Confirm the message The settings file is removed from the R S FSW How to restore default SEM settings files The R S FSW is delivered with predefined settings files which can be edited and over written However you can restore the original files In the Standard Files tab of the Spectrum Emission Mask dialog box select the Restore Standard F...

Page 230: ... following measurement example demonstrates an SEM measurement for a signal with multiple sub blocks Test setup Signal Generator 1 Coupler 6 dB R S FSW Signal Generator 2 Signal generator settings e g R S FSW SMU Device Standard Center Frequency Level Test Model SigGen 1 3GPP FDD 900 MHz 0 dBm 1 16 SigGen 2 EUTRA LTE 906 5 MHz 0 dBm 1_1_5MHz Setting up the measurement 1 Preset the R S FSW 2 Set th...

Page 231: ...The results of the measurement for each sub block are displayed in the Result Summary The summarized limit line is indicated in the Spectrum graph Fig 5 36 Multi SEM measurement results of the measurement for each sub block 5 6 8 Reference SEM File Descriptions This reference provides details on the format of the SEM settings and result files Format Description of SEM XML Files 231 ASCII File Expo...

Page 232: ... is not able to interpret the XML file and error messages are shown on the screen It is recom mended that you make a copy of an existing file and edit the copy of the file Basically the file consists of three elements that can be defined The BaseFormat element The PowerClass element The Range element The BaseFormat element It carries information about basic settings In this element only the Refere...

Page 233: ...een in the tables either view one of the default files already stored on the R S FSW in the C r_s instr sem_std directory or check the structure as shown below Below a basic example of the structure of the file is shown containing all mandatory attributes and child nodes Note that the PowerClass element and the range element are themselves elements of the BaseFormat element and are to be inserted ...

Page 234: ...it Value Value Limit RBW Bandwidth Bandwidth Type FilterType VBW Bandwidth Bandwidth Detector Detector Detector Sweep Mode SweepMode Time SweepTime Amplitude ReferenceLevel Unit dBm Value Value RFAttenuation Mode Auto Unit dB Value Value Preamplifier State State Amplitude MeasPointsMin 1 MeasPointsMin CalcRuleMulti Sum CalcRuleMulti Range Table 5 13 Attributes and child nodes of the BaseFormat ele...

Page 235: ...nge is 200 Yes Unit dBm Yes InclusiveFlag true Yes StopPower Value power in dBm The stop power must be equal to the start power of the next power class The StopPower value of the last range is 200 Yes Unit dBm InclusiveFlag false Yes DefaultLimitFailMode Absolute Relative Absolute and Rel ative Absolute or Relative Yes Table 5 15 Attributes and child nodes of the Range element normal ranges Child ...

Page 236: ...t nodes has to have a relative unit e g dBc the other one must have an absolute unit e g dBm Yes Start Value numeric_value Power limit at start fre quency Yes Unit dBm Hz dBm dBc dBr dB Sets the unit of the start value Stop Value numeric_value Power limit at stop fre quency Unit dBm Hz dBm dBc dBr dB Sets the unit of the stop value LimitFailMode Absolute Relative Absolute and Rel ative Absolute or...

Page 237: ... is exported the data is stored in ASCII format as described below The first part of the file lists information about the signal analyzer and the general setup File contents Explanation File header Type FSW 26 Model Version 1 00 Firmware version Date 31 Mar 11 Storage date of data set Mode ANALYZER SEM Operating mode and measurement function Center Freq 13250000000 000000 Hz X axis settings Freq O...

Page 238: ...wer in dBm of peak relative power in dBc of peak related to the channel power distance to the limit line in dB positive value means above the limit limit fail pass 0 fail 1 2 2515000 12750000 30000 13257632500 43 8447 22747802734 0 33028793334960938 49 66971206 6650391 FAIL 5 7 Spurious Emissions Measurement The R S FSW supports Spurious Emissions measurements About the Measurement 238 Spurious Em...

Page 239: ... lines and the limit check results are also indicated In addition to the graphical results a result table can be displayed to evaluate the measured powers and limit check results see also chapter 5 7 3 2 Limit Lines in Spurious Measurements on page 241 The details of the evaluation list can be configured The following information is provided in the evaluation list for each range Column Description...

Page 240: ...s Emissions Basics Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used in Spurious Emis sions measurements is provided here for a better understanding of the required config uration settings Ranges and Range Settings 240 Limit Lines in Spurious Measurements 241 5 7 3 1 Ranges and Range Settings Conditions for ranges The following rules apply to ranges The minimum span of a range is 20 Hz ...

Page 241: ...d it is strongly recommended that you use only this limit line definition In the Sweep List you can define a limit line that varies its level according to the specified frequency ranges A distinguished limit line is automatically defined according to the current Sweep List settings every time the settings change This limit line is labeled _SPURIOUS_LINE_ABS_ xxx where xxx is an index to distinguis...

Page 242: ... the default settings It can be configured via the MEAS CONFIG key or in the Spurious Emissions dialog box which is displayed when you select the Spurious Setup button in the Overview or the Sweep List softkey from the Spurious Emissions menu For details on using the configuration Overview see chapter 6 1 Configuration Overview on page 312 The remote commands required to perform these tasks are de...

Page 243: ...p 246 Insert before after Range 246 Delete Range 246 Range Start Range Stop Sets the start frequency stop frequency of the selected range If you set a span that is smaller than the overall span of the ranges the measurement includes only the ranges that lie within the defined span and have a minimum span of 20 Hz Remote command SENSe LIST RANGe range FREQuency STARt on page 769 SENSe LIST RANGe ra...

Page 244: ...NSe LIST RANGe range BANDwidth VIDeo on page 766 Sweep Time Mode Activates or deactivates the auto mode for the sweep time For details on the sweep time mode see chapter 6 5 1 7 How Long the Data is Mea sured Sweep Time on page 407 Remote command SENSe LIST RANGe range SWEep TIME AUTO on page 773 Sweep Time Sets the sweep time value for the range For details on the sweep time see chapter 6 5 1 7 H...

Page 245: ...eamplifier see Preamplifier option B24 on page 399 Remote command SENSe LIST RANGe range INPut GAIN STATe on page 770 Sweep Points Sets the number of sweep points for the specified range For details on sweep points see chapter 6 5 1 8 How Much Data is Measured Sweep Points and Sweep Count on page 407 Remote command SENSe LIST RANGe range POINts VALue on page 772 Stop After Sweep This command confi...

Page 246: ...sert before after Range Inserts a new range to the left of the currently focused range before or to the right after The range numbers of the currently focused range and all higher ranges are increased accordingly The maximum number of ranges is 30 Delete Range Deletes the currently focused range The range numbers are updated accordingly 5 7 4 2 Adjusting the X Axis to the Range Definitions The fre...

Page 247: ...n detected during an active list evaluation are marked with blue squares in the diagram Remote command CALCulate n ESPectrum PSEarch PEAKsearch PSHow on page 761 Margin Although a margin functionality is not available for the limit check a margin threshold for the peak values to be displayed in the evaluation list and diagram if activated can be defined Only peaks that exceed the margin value are ...

Page 248: ...SEParator on page 991 5 7 5 How to Perform a Spurious Emissions Measurement 1 Press the MEAS key then select the Spurious Emissions measurement 2 Define the span of the signal to be monitored in the general span settings 3 Select the Overview softkey then select the Spurious Setup button The Spurious Emissions dialog box is displayed 4 Split the frequency span of the measurement into ranges for si...

Page 249: ...can be exported to another application for further analysis for example 1 Configure and perform an Spurious Emissions measurement as described in chap ter 5 7 5 How to Perform a Spurious Emissions Measurement on page 248 2 Select the Evaluations button in the Overview 3 If necessary change the Decimal Separator to COMMA for evaluation in other languages 4 Select the Save button 5 In the file selec...

Page 250: ...TRACE 1 Trace Mode CLR WRITE x Unit Hz y Unit dBm List evaluation settings Margin 6 000000 s Peak List margin PeaksPerRange 25 Max number of peaks per range to be detected Values 3 Number of detected peaks File data section 0 9000 150000 1000 79500 25 006643295288086 12 006643295288086 PASS 0 9000 150000 1000 101022 11126961483 47 075 111389160156 34 075111389160156 PASS 0 9000 150000 1000 58380 1...

Page 251: ...al statistic functions can be switched on at a time When a statistic function is switched on the R S FSW is set into zero span mode automatically The R S FSW measures the statistics of the signal applied to the RF input with the defined analysis bandwidth To avoid affecting the peak amplitudes the video bandwidth is automatically set to 10 times the analysis bandwidth The sample detector is used f...

Page 252: ...f being excee ded e g 0 01 The statistical functions provide information on such signal criteria 5 8 3 APD and CCDF Results Amplitude Probability Distribution APD As a result of the Amplitude Probability Distribution APD function the probability of measured amplitude values is displayed During a selectable measurement time all measured amplitude values are assigned to an amplitude range bin The nu...

Page 253: ...Cumulative Distribution Function CCDF shows the probability that the mean signal power amplitude will be exceeded in percent The level above the mean power is plotted along the x axis of the graph The origin of the axis corresponds to the mean power level The probability that a level will be exceeded is plotted along the y axis A red line indicates the ideal Gaussian distribution for the measured ...

Page 254: ...is and y axis of the statistics diagram can be configured In particular you can restrict the range of amplitudes to be evaluated and the probabili ties to be displayed Remote commands CALCulate n STATistics CCDF X t on page 785 CALCulate STATistics RESult t on page 785 5 8 4 APD and CCDF Basics Gated Triggering Statistic measurements on pulsed signals can be performed using a gated trigger An exte...

Page 255: ...Scaling for Statistics Diagrams 259 5 8 5 1 Basic Settings APD measurements are selected via the APD button in the Select Measurement dialog box CCDF measurements are selected via the CCDF button in the Select Measurement dialog box The measurements are started immediately with the default settings They can be configured via the MEAS CONFIG key or in the APD CCDF Statistical Measurements APD CCDF ...

Page 256: ...257 Percent Marker CCDF only Defines a probability value Thus the power which is exceeded with a given probability can be determined very easily If marker 1 is deactivated it is switched on automati cally Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m Y PERCent on page 779 Analysis Bandwidth Defines the analysis bandwidth For correct measurement of the signal statistics the analysis bandwidth has to be wider...

Page 257: ...and SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe k STATe range on page 781 Edit Gate Ranges Opens a dialog box to configure up to 3 gate ranges for each trace For details see chapter 5 8 5 2 Gate Range Definition for APD and CCDF on page 257 Adjust Settings Adjusts the level settings according to the measured difference between peak and min imum power for APD measurement or peak and mean power for CCDF measurement in ...

Page 258: ... the defined period is not longer than the total measurement time of the cur rent measurement Keep in mind that the measurement time depends on the band width and the number of samples see Number of Samples on page 257 The cur rent measurement time is indicated as Meas Time in the channel bar Remote command SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe PERiod on page 780 Range x Use Activates tracing of the defined ran...

Page 259: ...ements can be configured in the Scaling dialog box which is displayed when you select the AMPT key and then the Scale Config softkey The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in chap ter 11 5 8 4 Scaling the Diagram on page 782 In statistical diagrams the x axis displays the signal level values y axis in standard display while the y axis displays the probability of the valu...

Page 260: ...l irrespec tive of the selected unit The scaling of the x axis is changed accordingly The setting range is 200 dB in 0 1 dB steps Remote command DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 845 Y Axis Defines the scaling settings for the probability distribution Y Unit Y Axis Defines the scaling type of the y axis as either percentage or absolute The default value is absolute scaling Remot...

Page 261: ...2 Start a sweep As soon as the defined number of samples have been measured the statistical evaluation is displayed To perform a statistic measurement using gate ranges For pulsed signals the transmission intervals should not be included in the statistical evaluation Thus you must define gate ranges to be included in the measurement 1 Press the MEAS CONFIG key then select the APD Config or CCDF Co...

Page 262: ...he defined number of samples have been measured the statistical evaluation is displayed Only the signal levels within the pulse periods are consid ered 5 8 7 Examples 5 8 7 1 Configuration Example Gated Statistics A statistics evaluation has to be done over the useful part of the signal between t3 and t4 The period of the GSM signal is 4 61536 ms t1 External positive trigger slope t2 Begin of burs...

Page 263: ...bandwidth is too small for a digitally modulated signal the amplitude distribution at the output of the IF filter becomes a Gaussian dis tribution according to the central limit theorem and thus corresponds to a white noise signal The true amplitude distribution of the signal therefore cannot be determined 1 Preset the R S FSW 2 Set the reference level to 60 dBm The R S FSW s intrinsic noise is di...

Page 264: ...Measurement dia log box Fig 5 38 CCDF of white noise The CCDF trace indicates the probability that a level will exceed the mean power The level above the mean power is plotted along the x axis of the graph The origin of the axis corresponds to the mean power level The probability that a level will be exceeded is plotted along the y axis Statistical Measurements APD CCDF ...

Page 265: ...me Domain Power Results 265 Time Domain Power Basics Range Definition Using Limit Lines 266 Time Domain Power Configuration 267 How to Measure Powers in the Time Domain 268 Measurement Example 268 5 9 1 About the Measurement Using the Time Domain Power measurement function the R S FSW determines the power of the signal in zero span by summing up the power at the individual measure ment points and ...

Page 266: ...omain Power on page 787 5 9 3 Time Domain Power Basics Range Definition Using Limit Lines The range of the measured signal to be evaluated for the power measurement can be restricted using limit lines The left and right limit lines S1 S2 define the evaluation range and are indicated by vertical red lines in the diagram If activated the power results are only calculated from the levels within the l...

Page 267: ... from the points of the displayed trace or a segment thereof The linear mean value of the equivalent voltages is calcula ted Std Dev The standard deviation of the measurement points from the mean value The measurement of the mean power is automatically switched on at the same time Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary PPEak STATe on page 790 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary PPE...

Page 268: ...ng the corresponding softkeys 3 To restrict the power evaluation range define limits a Select the Time Dom Power Config softkey to display the Time Domain Power configuration dialog box b Switch on the limits by setting the Limit State to On The limit lines S1 and S2 are displayed c Define the left limit limit line S1 the right limit S2 or both 4 Start a sweep The measured powers are displayed in ...

Page 269: ...om the Select Measure ment dialog box 8 In the Time Domain Power configuration dialog box set all four results to ON 9 Set the Limit State to ON 10 Define the left limit at 326 μs and the right limit at 538 μs This range corresponds to the useful part of the GSM burst The mean power of the useful part of the GSM burst is calculated to be 13 dBm 5 10 Harmonic Distortion Measurement The harmonics an...

Page 270: ... every signal contains harmonics Harmonics are generated by nonlinear characteristics which add frequencies to a pure sinewave They can often be reduced by low pass filters Since the signal analyzer itself has a nonlinear characteristic for example in its first mixer measures must be taken to ensure that harmonics produced in the signal analyzer do not cause spurious results If necessary the funda...

Page 271: ...ved from the straight line equations and the given intercept point d2 S H I PI 1 where d2 harmonic distortion S H I second harmonic intercept PI mixer level dBm The mixer level is the RF level applied to the RF input minus the set RF attenuation The formula for the internally generated level P1 at the 2nd harmonic in dBm is P1 2 PI S H I 2 The lower measurement limit for the harmonic is the noise ...

Page 272: ...y the displayed noise is increased by 10 dB due to the additional attenuation If the harmonic is exclu sively generated by the signal analyzer the level of the harmonic is reduced by 20 dB or is lost in noise If both the DUT and the signal analyzer contribute to the har monic the reduction in the harmonic level is correspondingly smaller High sensitivity harmonics measurements If harmonics have ve...

Page 273: ...harmonic Frequency RBW Power Remote commands The results can also be queried using remote commands The first harmonic frequency can be read out via the general center frequency com mand SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 831 THD CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion HARMonics DISTortion on page 797 List of harmonics CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion HARMonics LIST on page 798 5 10 4 Harmonic Distortion Configurat...

Page 274: ...m 1 to 26 Default is 10 Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion HARMonics NHARmonics on page 797 Harmonic Sweep Time Defines the sweep time for the zero span measurement on each harmonic frequency This setting is identical to the normal sweep time for zero span see also Sweep Time on page 411 Remote command SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO on page 842 Harmonic RBW Auto Enables disables the automatic adj...

Page 275: ...llowing procedure 1 Select the Harmonic Distortion measurement function from the Select Measure ment dialog box 2 Define the number of harmonics to be determined using the No of Harmonics softkey 3 Perform a sweep The trace for the determined harmonics are displayed in the diagram separated by red display lines The measured power for each harmonic in relation to the funda mental is indicated in th...

Page 276: ...ird order intercept point TOI a two tone signal with equal carrier levels is expected at the R S FSW input Marker 1 and marker 2 both normal markers are set to the maximum of the two signals Marker 3 and marker 4 are placed on the intermodulation products The R S FSW calculates the third order intercept point from the level difference between the first 2 markers and the markers 3 and 4 and display...

Page 277: ...rmonic of useful signal PU1 and signal PU2 fi1 2 fu1 fu2 1 fi2 2 fu2 fu1 2 Dependency on level of useful signals The level of the intermodulation products depends on the level of the useful signals If the two useful signals are increased by 1 dB the level of the intermodulation products increases by 3 dB which means that the spacing aD3 between intermodulation signals and useful signals is reduced...

Page 278: ... of the third order increase three times as quickly as the useful signals The intercept point is the fictitious level where the two lines intersect It cannot be measured directly since the useful level is previously limited by the maximum two port output power Calculation method However the intercept point can be calculated from the known line slopes and the measured spacing aD3 at a given level a...

Page 279: ...e that is required Since phase noise decreases as the carrier offset increases its influence decreases with increasing fre quency offset from the useful signals The following diagrams illustrate the intermodulation free dynamic range as a function of the selected bandwidth and of the level at the input mixer signal level set RF attenuation at different useful signal offsets Fig 5 42 Intermodulatio...

Page 280: ...s of the useful signals and those of the intermodulation products sep arately using a small span The measurement time will be reduced in particular if the offset of the useful signals is large To find signals reliably when frequency span is small it is best to synchronize the signal sources and the R S FSW 5 11 3 TOI Results As a result of the TOI measurement the following values are displayed in ...

Page 281: ...rcept TOI measurements are selected via the Third Order Intercept button in the Select Measurement dialog box The measurement is started immedi ately with the default settings It can be configured via the MEAS CONFIG key or in the Third Order Intercept dialog box which is displayed as a tab in the Analysis dialog box or when you select the TOI Config softkey from the TOI menu Third Order Intercept...

Page 282: ...ch Signals Performs a new search on the input signals and recalculates the TOI according to the measured values Remote command CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion TOI SEARchsignal ONCE on page 800 5 11 5 How to Determine the Third Order Intercept The precise TOI for the R S FSW in relation to the input signals is provided in the data sheet 1 Apply a two tone signal with equal carrier levels to the R S FSW i...

Page 283: ...B 4 Set the resolution bandwidth to 10 kHz The noise is reduced the trace is smoothed further and the intermodulation prod ucts can be seen clearly 5 Set the VBW to 1 kHz Measuring intermodulation using the Third Order Intercept TOI measurement function 1 Press the MEAS key and select the Third Order Intercept measurement function from the Select Measurement dialog box The R S FSW activates four m...

Page 284: ...ixer When the RF attenuation is added the mixer level is reduced and the intermodulation distance is increased With an additional RF attenuation of 10 dB the levels of the intermodulation products are reduced by 20 dB The noise level is however increased by 10 dB Increase the RF attenuation to 20 dB to reduce intermodulation products The R S FSW s intrinsic intermodulation products disappear below...

Page 285: ...d marker 1 is set to the peak level which is consid ered to be the carrier level Delta markers 2 and 3 are automatically set symmetrically to the carrier on the adjacent peak values of the trace The markers can be adjusted manually if necessary The R S FSW calculates the power at the marker positions from the measured levels The AM modulation depth is calculated as the ratio between the power valu...

Page 286: ...n the Select Measurement dialog box The measurement is started immediately with the default settings It can be configured via the MEAS CONFIG key or in the AM Modulation Depth dialog box which is displayed as a tab in the Analysis dialog box or when you select the AM Mod Depth Config softkey from the AM Mod Depth menu The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in chap ter 11...

Page 287: ...delta markers Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m X on page 932 CALCulate n DELTamarker m X on page 931 CALCulate n DELTamarker m X RELative on page 942 Search Signals Performs a new search on the input signal and recalculates the AM Modulation Depth according to the measured values Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion MDEPth SEARchsignal ONCE on page 801 5 12 4 Optimizing and Troubleshoot...

Page 288: ...tromagnetic compati bility EMC standards The functionality of the measurement is particularly useful in research and development The EMI measurement features EMI marker functionality Marker demodulation Measurement bandwidths and detectors for EMI measurements Logarithmic scaling of the frequency axis Additional predefined limit lines for EMC standards Predefined transducer factors LISN control 5 ...

Page 289: ...ring the initial measurement and at the peak marker positions during the final test After the final measurement you can check the signal levels against specified limits 5 13 2 EMI Measurement Results As the result of an R S FSW EMI measurement the measured signal levels and active markers are displayed in a Spectrum diagram Fig 5 44 EMI measurement results Initial peak search results Marker Table ...

Page 290: ...sult Value measured during final EMI test using specified detector at marker frequency 5 13 3 EMI Measurement Basics Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used in EMI measure ments is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration set tings Resolution Bandwidth and Filter Types 290 Detectors and Dwell Time 291 Frequency Resolution Sweep Points and Scaling ...

Page 291: ...k search is configured in the trace settings see chapter 7 3 2 1 Trace Settings on page 464 while the detector for the final test is configured in the EMI marker settings see chapter 5 13 4 1 EMI Marker Con figuration on page 299 Dwell time EMC tests often require a specific dwell time for an EMI measurement The dwell time defines how long the R S FSW measures the signal at the individual frequenc...

Page 292: ...he sample detector displays the last value from the samples allocated to a pixel The sample detector is used for noise or phase noise marker calculation However it is unreliable if the displayed span is much greater then the resolution bandwidth or if the tuning steps of the local oscillator are too large The sample detector is not recommen ded for EMI tests Quasipeak detector CISPR filter only Th...

Page 293: ...t is calibrated with the RMS value of an unmodula ted sinusoidal signal The average value is determined by lowpass filters of the 2nd order simulating a mechanical pointer instrument The filter bandwidth and time lag of the detector depend on the measured frequency The time lag of the simulated pointer instrument reflects the weighting factor of the sig nal depending on its form modulation etc Tab...

Page 294: ...he simulated pointer instrument reflects the weighting factor of the signal depending on its form modulation etc Table 5 18 Required parameters depending on frequency for RMS Average detector Band A Band B Band C D Band E Frequency range 150 kHz 150 kHz to 30 MHz 30 MHz to 1 GHz 1 GHz IF bandwidth 200 Hz 9 kHz 120 kHz 1 MHz Time lag of simula ted pointer instru ment 160 ms 160 ms 100 ms 100 ms Cor...

Page 295: ...bands measured with a single resolution bandwidth There are sufficient sweep points to make sure that a signal is found during the refined mea surement even when covering 30 MHz to 1 GHz with logarithmic scaling and 120 kHz RBW 5 13 3 4 Controlling V Networks LISN For measurements on power lines the R S FSW EMI measurement adds functionality to control a line impedance stabilization network LISN d...

Page 296: ...verts the results into the correct unit and magnitude A transducer factor consists of a maximum of 1001 reference values Each reference value includes frequency unit and level The R S FSW EMI measurement adds several predefined transducer factors In addi tion you can also create new and edit existing transducer factors For more information see chapter 9 2 Basics on Transducer Factors on page 566 5...

Page 297: ...y with a different weighting detec tor for each trace In this case the R S FSW searches for peaks on all traces separately provided that you have assigned at least one marker to each trace A typical selection for EMI measurement is to use the peak and the average detector After initial measurement search for peaks on the peak trace and the average trace separately so that the distribution of narro...

Page 298: ...the frequencies of the marker positions The dwell time is identical for all EMI final measurements and is thus defined in the EMI measurement configuration Select a dwell time according to the character istics of the measured signal See also chapter 5 13 3 2 Detectors and Dwell Time on page 291 5 13 3 8 Limit Checks General limit line functionality is provided by the R S FSW base unit The base uni...

Page 299: ...marker configuration To configure EMI markers select the EMI measurement then press the MEAS CONFIG or MKR key and select Marker Config Selected Marker 299 Marker State 299 Marker Position X value 299 Marker Type 300 Reference Marker 300 Linking to Another Marker 300 Assigning the Marker to a Trace 300 Final Test Detector 301 Select Marker 301 Selected Marker Marker name The marker which is curren...

Page 300: ... can also be selected instead of another marker Remote command CALCulate n DELTamarker m MREF on page 930 Linking to Another Marker Links the current marker to the marker selected from the list of active markers If the x axis value of the inital marker is changed the linked marker follows on the same x position Linking is off by default Using this function you can set two markers on different trac...

Page 301: ... 16 1 1 that was detected during the dwell time The quasipeak detector is only available for the CISPR filter and not for an RBW of 1 MHz CISPR Aver age Determines a weighted average signal level according to CISPR 16 1 1 The average value according to CISPR 16 1 1 is the maximum value detected while calculating the linear average value during the speci fied dwell time The CISPR Average detector i...

Page 302: ...hus the detector is configured in the EMI marker settings see Final Test Detector on page 301 Filter Type 302 RBW 303 Automatic Peak Search 303 Dwell Time 303 Frequency Axis Scaling 303 Res BW CISPR 304 Res BW MIL 304 Filter Type Defines the filter type The following filter types are available Normal 3dB Channel RRC 5 Pole not available for sweep type FFT CISPR 6 dB requires EMI R S FSW K54 option...

Page 303: ...ate Resolution Bandwidth on page 403 For measurements on I Q data in the frequency domain the maximum RBW is 1 MHz For EMI measurements using the quasipeak detector the 1 MHz RBW filter is not available see chapter 5 13 3 1 Resolution Bandwidth and Filter Types on page 290 Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution on page 836 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution AUTO on page 836 Automatic Peak...

Page 304: ...ion TYPE on page 837 Filter bandwidth SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution on page 836 Res BW MIL Defines the measurement bandwidth for military EMC standards For more information see chapter 5 13 3 1 Resolution Bandwidth and Filter Types on page 290 Remote command Filter type SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution TYPE on page 837 Filter bandwidth SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution on page 836 5 13 4 3 LI...

Page 305: ...phases see table 5 19 Off disables LISN control and output Remote command INPut LISN TYPE on page 807 Phase Selects the phase to be measured Phase N and L1 are included in all four LISN Phase L2 and L3 are only included in four line networks You can select one phase only for each measurement Remote command INPut LISN PHASe on page 806 150 kHz Highpass Filter Enables or disables the use of an addit...

Page 306: ... page 515 Limit Lines General limit line functionality is provided by the R S FSW base unit The base unit also provides various predefined limit lines that you can use for various applications The R S FSW EMI measurement adds further predefined limit lines designed in com pliance with several EMC standards Limit line configuration is described in chapter 7 5 3 2 Limit Line Settings and Func tions ...

Page 307: ...t the Marker Config softkey and activate the number of markers or delta markers you want to analyze b For each active marker select a detector to be used for the Final Test i e the subsequent EMI measurement at the marker position c If you already know which frequencies cause irregular values set the markers to those positions Otherwise perform an initial peak search to obtain an over view see ste...

Page 308: ... a new EMI measurement If activated a peak search is performed For each active marker a final measure ment is performed using the specified detector for the specified dwell time If acti vated the signal is demodulated at the active marker positions The specified traces to be checked are compared with the active limit lines The status of the limit check for the final measurement is indicated in the...

Page 309: ...elect the Res BW CISPR softkey A CISPR 6 dB filter is configured b Set the bandwidth to 1 MHz The R S FSW shows the currently selected resolution bandwidth in the diagram header 8 Configure the traces for the initial EMI measurement a Press the TRACE key b Press the Trace Config softkey to configure two traces c Define the detectors to use for the initial measurement Select the peak detec tor for ...

Page 310: ...ing the specified detector for the specified dwell time If activated the signal is demodulated During the initial measurement demodula tion is performed for the entire measurement span during the final measurement only the detected peak marker positions are demodulated for the defined dwell time The specified traces to be checked are compared with the active limit line The sta tus of the limit che...

Page 311: ...re weighted correctly Pulsed signals or signals that fluctuate slowly the dwell time must cover at least the time until the first signal peak is measured can require long dwell time unmodulated signals or signals with a high modulation frequency the dwell time must cover at least the time until the first signal peak is measured usually shorter than for pulsed signals Electromagnetic Interference E...

Page 312: ...3 Bandwidth Filter and Sweep Configuration 402 Trigger and Gate Configuration 418 Adjusting Settings Automatically 437 6 1 Configuration Overview Throughout the measurement channel configuration an overview of the most important currently defined settings is provided in the configuration Overview The Overview is displayed when you select the Overview icon which is available at the bottom of all so...

Page 313: ...ons Measurement Configuration on page 242 7 Optionally Outputs See chapter 6 2 6 Output Settings on page 381 8 Analysis See chapter 7 Common Analysis and Display Functions on page 440 9 Display See chapter 7 1 Result Display Configuration on page 440 To configure settings Select any button to open the corresponding dialog box Preset Channel Select the Preset Channel button in the lower lefthand co...

Page 314: ...T OVLD and a message box informs you that the RF Input was discon nected Furthermore a status bit bit 3 in the STAT QUES POW status register is set In this case you must decrease the level at the RF input connector and then close the message box Then measurement is possible again Reactivating the RF input is also possible via the remote command INPut ATTenuation PROTection RESet 6 2 1 2 RF Input f...

Page 315: ...ting probes Probes are automatically detected when you plug them into the upper BASEBAND INPUT connectors on the front panel of the R S FSW The detected information on the probe is displayed in the Probes tab of the Input dialog box individually for each connector Availability of probe input Analog baseband input from connected probes can only be analyzed in applications that support I Q data proc...

Page 316: ... useful when you are measuring power levels that fall below the noise floor of the R S FSW itself for example when measuring the noise level of an amplifier In this case you can first connect an external noise source whose noise power level is known in advance to the R S FSW and measure the total noise power From this value you can determine the noise power of the R S FSW Then when you measure the...

Page 317: ...s provided Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R S FSW User Manual 6 2 1 6 IF and Video Signal Output The measured IF signal or displayed video signal i e the filtered and detected IF sig nal can be provided at the IF VIDEO DEMOD or IF OUT output connector The video output is a signal of 1 V It can be used for example to control demodula ted audio frequencies The IF o...

Page 318: ... R S RTO oscilloscope If IF 2 GHZ OUT output is activated the measured values are no longer available on the display thus the trace data currently displayed on the R S FSW becomes invalid A message in the status bar indicates this situation The message also indicates whether the sidebands of the IF spectrum output are in normal or inverted order compared to the RF signal which depends on the used ...

Page 319: ... by alternating current AC or direct cur rent DC AC coupling blocks any DC voltage from the input signal This is the default setting to prevent damage to the instrument Very low frequencies in the input signal may be dis torted However some specifications require DC coupling In this case you must protect the instrument from damaging DC input voltages manually For details refer to the data sheet Re...

Page 320: ... bandwidth In order to use the maximum bandwidth for signal analysis you can deactivate the YIG preselector at the input of the R S FSW which may lead to image frequency display Note that the YIG preselector is active only on frequencies greater than 8 GHz There fore switching the YIG preselector on or off has no effect if the frequency is below that value Note For the following measurements the Y...

Page 321: ...e chapter 6 2 1 3 Using Probes on page 315 For general information on the R S RTO probes see the device manuals Microbutton Action 321 Microbutton Action Active R S probes except for RT ZS10E have a configurable microbutton on the probe head By pressing this button you can perform an action on the instrument directly from the probe Select the action that you want to start from the probe Run single...

Page 322: ...r a measurement at a specified power level e g from a signal generator see Using a Power Sensor as an External Power Trig ger on page 323 Signal source Power sensor R S FSW Fig 6 1 Power sensor support standard test setup Using the power sensor with several applications The power sensor cannot be used from the R S FSW firmware and the R S Power Viewer Plus virtual power meter for displaying result...

Page 323: ...wer triggers R S NRP Z81 R S NRP Z85 R S NRP Z86 With the R S FSW the power sensors can be connected to the Power Sensor inter face directly and no further cables are required They can then be configured as an external power sensor trigger Fig 6 2 Connecting a power sensor using the POWER SENSOR interface The R S FSW receives an external trigger signal when the defined trigger level is measured by...

Page 324: ... 6 6 1 2 Gated Measurements on page 422 For details see How to Configure a Power Sensor as an External PSE Trigger on page 330 6 2 3 2 Power Sensor Settings Power sensor settings are available in the Power Sensor tab of the Input dialog box Each sensor is configured on a separate tab State 325 Continuous Value Update 325 Select 325 Zeroing Power Sensor 325 Frequency Manual 326 Frequency Coupling 3...

Page 325: ... STATe on page 901 Select Selects the individual power sensor for usage if power measurement is generally acti vated State function The detected serial numbers of the power sensors connected to the instrument are provided in a selection list For each of the four available power sensor indexes Power Sensor 1 Power Sensor 4 which correspond to the tabs in the configura tion dialog one of the detecte...

Page 326: ...e display is relative to the reference value that is defined with either the Meas Ref setting or the Reference Value setting Remote command UNIT n PMETer p POWer on page 901 UNIT n PMETer p POWer RATio on page 901 Meas Time Average Selects the measurement time or switches to manual averaging mode In general results are more precise with longer measurement times The following settings are recommend...

Page 327: ... Time Average setting The values for the average count range from 0 to 256 in binary steps 1 2 4 8 For average count 0 or 1 one reading is performed The general averaging and sweep count for the trace are independent from this setting Results become more stable with extended average particularly if signals with low power are measured This setting can be used to minimize the influence of noise in t...

Page 328: ...SENSe PMETer p TRIGger HYSTeresis on page 902 Trigger Holdoff Using the power sensor as an external trigger Defines the minimum time in seconds that must pass between two trigger events Trigger events that occur during the holdoff time are ignored Remote command SENSe PMETer p TRIGger HOLDoff on page 902 Drop Out Time Using the power sensor as an external trigger Defines the time the input signal ...

Page 329: ...t the sensor you want to configure To have newly connected power sensors assigned to a tab automatically default select Auto 5 Define the frequency of the signal whose power you want to measure a To define the frequency manually select Frequency Manual and enter a fre quency b To determine the frequency automatically select Frequency Coupling and then either Center to use the center frequency or M...

Page 330: ...pts you to disconnect all signals from the input of the power sensor 4 Disconnect all signals sending input to the power sensor and press ENTER to con tinue 5 Wait until zeroing is complete A corresponding message is displayed How to Configure a Power Sensor as an External PSE Trigger The following step by step instructions demonstrate how to configure a power sensor to be used as an external powe...

Page 331: ...yzer can control which signal the generator is to send which is in turn mea sured by the analyzer This process is referred to as external generator control The generator in this setup is referred to as a tracking generator A measurement with a tracking generator is useful to measure any effects on the power level caused by the cables and connectors from the signal generator and the signal analyzer...

Page 332: ...nterface allows for considerably higher measurement rates than pure GPIB control because the frequency stepping of the R S FSW is directly coupled with the frequency stepping of the generator For details see Coupling the Frequencies on page 338 In figure 6 3 the TTL connection is illustrated using an SMU generator for example Fig 6 3 TTL connection for an SMU generator The external generator can b...

Page 333: ... of the R S FSW External reference frequency In order to enhance measurement accuracy a common reference frequency should be used for both the R S FSW and the generator If no independent 10 MHz reference frequency is available it is recommended that you connect the reference output of the generator with the reference input of the R S FSW and that you enable usage of the external reference on the R...

Page 334: ...R27B11 3 X SMB100A3 X SMR30 X SMB100A40 X SMR30B11 3 X SMBV100A3 X SMR40 X SMBV100A6 X SMR40B11 3 X SMC100A1 SMR50 X SMC100A3 SMR50B11 3 X SME02 X SMR60 X SME03 X SMR60B11 3 X SME06 X SMT02 SMF100A X SMT03 SMF22 X SMT06 SMF22B2 X SMU02 X SMF43 X SMU02B31 2 X SMF43B2 X SMU03 2 X SMG SMU03B31 2 X SMGL SMU04 2 X SMGU SMU04B31 2 X SMH SMU06 2 X SMHU SMU06B31 2 X SMIQ02 X SMV03 SMIQ02B X SMW03 1 Requir...

Page 335: ...iles can be edited or duplicated for varying measurement setups or other instru ments The existing setup files can be displayed in an editor in read only mode directly from the External Generator configuration dialog box From there they can be edited and stored under a different name and are then available on the R S FSW For details see To define a new generator setup file on page 351 Calibration ...

Page 336: ... and can be activated or deactiva ted as required If normalization is activated NOR is displayed in the channel bar next to the indication that an external generator is being used Ext Gen The normal ized trace from the calibration sweep is a constant 0 dB line as calibration trace reference trace 0 As long as the same settings are used for measurement as for calibration the normal ized measurement...

Page 337: ...t TG in the channel bar you can restore the calibration settings which are stored with the refer ence dataset on the R S FSW Storing the normalized reference trace as a transducer factor The inverse normalized reference trace can also be stored as a transducer factor for use in other R S FSW applications that do not support external generator control The normalized trace data is converted to a tra...

Page 338: ...ibration is displayed on this ref erence line indicated by a red line in the diagram By default the reference line is dis played at the top of the diagram If you shift the reference line the normalized trace is shifted as well Shifting the reference line and normalized trace You can shift the reference line and thus the normalized trace in the result display by changing the Reference Position or t...

Page 339: ...the R S FSW Numerator multiplication factor for the current analyzer frequency Denominator division factor for the current analyzer frequency FOffset frequency offset for the current analyzer frequency for example for frequency converting measurements or harmonics measurements The value range for the offset depends on the selected generator The default setting is 0 Hz Offsets other than 0 Hz are i...

Page 340: ... TRIGGER The R S FSW can only measure a value when the generator signals the end of the setting procedure via the BLANK signal Using the TTL interface allows for considerably higher measurement rates than pure GPIB control because the frequency stepping of the R S FSW is directly coupled with the frequency stepping of the generator Reverse sweep The frequency offset for automatic coupling can be u...

Page 341: ...ence setting and measurement APX approximation Normalization on Deviation from the reference setting occurs Aborted normalization or no calibration performed yet Error and status messages The following status and error messages may occur during external generator control Message Description Ext Generator GPIB Handshake Error Ext Generator TCPIP Handshake Error Ext Generator TTL Handshake Error Con...

Page 342: ...el of the external generator Source Power on page 345 in External Generator Measurement Configuration Increasing the reference level Reference Level in the Amplitude menu 6 2 4 3 External Generator Control Settings The External Generator settings are available in the Input dialog box if the R S FSW External Generator Control option R S FSW B10 is installed For each measurement channel one external...

Page 343: ...age 335 Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator TYPE on page 888 Interface Type of interface connection used The following interfaces are currently supported GPIB TCP IP not by all generators For details on which signal generators support which interfaces see the documenta tion of the corresponding signal generator Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator INTerface on page 8...

Page 344: ...e EXTernal ROSCillator SOURce on page 887 Edit Generator Setup File Displays the setup file for the currently selected Generator Type in read only mode in an editor Although the existing setup files are displayed in read only mode in the editor they can be saved under a different name using File SaveAs Be careful however to adhere to the required syntax and commands Errors will only be detected an...

Page 345: ... the data sheet Remote command SOURce EXTernal POWer LEVel on page 886 Source Offset Constant level offset for the external generator Values from 200 dB to 200 dB in 1 dB steps are allowed The default setting is 0 dB Offsets are indicated by the LVL label in the channel bar see also Displayed Information and Errors on page 341 With this offset attenuators or amplifiers at the output connector of t...

Page 346: ... RF input of the R S FSW However the frequency used by the generator may differ from the input from the R S FSW The RF frequency may be multiplied by a specified factor or a frequency offset can be added or both Note The input for the generator frequency is not validated i e you can enter any val ues However if the allowed frequency ranges of the generator are exceeded an error message is displaye...

Page 347: ...tive see Source State on page 345 Calibrate Transmission 347 Calibrate Reflection Short 347 Calibrate Reflection Open 348 Source Calibration Normalize 348 Recall 348 Save As Trd Factor 348 Reference Position 349 Reference Value 349 Calibrate Transmission Starts a transmission type measurement to determine a reference trace This trace is used to calculate the difference for the normalized values Fo...

Page 348: ...alize Switches the normalization of measurement results on or off This function is only available if the memory contains a reference trace that is after a calibration has been performed For details on normalization see Normalization on page 336 Remote command SENSe CORRection STATe on page 891 Recall Restores the settings that were used during source calibration This can be useful if instrument se...

Page 349: ...r calibration is displayed on this reference line indicated by a red line in the diagram If you shift the reference line the normalized trace is shifted as well Remote command DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RPOSition on page 849 Reference Value Defines the reference value to be displayed at the specified Result Frequency Start This setting can be used to shift the reference line and thus the norma...

Page 350: ...erface and the address used to connect the generator to the R S FSW 8 If the generator supports TTL Synchronization activate this function 9 Select Reference External to synchronize the analyzer with the generator 10 Switch to the Measurement Configuration subtab 11 Set the Source State to On 12 Define the generator output level as the Source Power 13 Optionally to define a constant level offset f...

Page 351: ...e the new generator see also Displayed Information and Errors on page 341 5 Save the file under a different name with the extension gen a In the editor select File SaveAs b Select Save as type All Files c Specify a name with the extension gen 6 In the R S FSW firmware close the External Generator Config dialog and re open it Now you can select the new generator type from the selection list on the ...

Page 352: ...eference Value to the same value as the gain or attenuation the inserted component causes 5 Optionally shift the reference line further down in the result display by decreasing the Reference Position The normalized reference trace moves to the position of the measured trace 6 Optionally zoom into the measured trace by changing the y axis scaling or the range AMPT Scale Config Range The measured tr...

Page 353: ... analyzer with the generator 7 Switch to the Measurement Configuration sub tab 8 Set the Source State to On 9 Define the generator output level as the Source Power 20 dBm 10 Set the Coupling State to Auto The Result Frequency Start value for the generator is indicated as 100 0 MHz The Result Frequency Stop value is indicated as 300 0 MHz 11 Switch to the Source Calibration sub tab 12 Select the So...

Page 354: ...top of the diagram 100 Fig 6 8 Normalized measurement results after calibration Measuring the effects of the DUT After calibration we can insert the band elimination filter our DUT in the measurement setup 1 Connect the signal generator output to the band elimination filter 2 Connect the band elimination filter output to the RF INPUT connector on the front panel of the R S FSW Data Input and Outpu...

Page 355: ...om the top of the diagram to the middle of the diagram by changing the position of the reference point 0 0 dB to 50 In the Source Calibration tab enter Position 50 At the same time the range of the displayed y axis moves from 100 0 dB to 0 dB to 50 dB to 50 dB Fig 6 10 Reference line shifted to middle of diagram 50 Data Input and Output ...

Page 356: ...ill compensate these effects in the result display on the R S FSW by moving the reference line 1 Connect a 3 dB attenuator between the band elimination filter output and the RF INPUT connector on the R S FSW The measurement results are now 3 dB lower Fig 6 11 Measurement results with additional attenuator 2 In the Source Calibration tab enter Reference Value 3 dB The reference line is shifted down...

Page 357: ...hifted you can zoom into the measured trace to determine the offsets to the reference line which represent the effects of the band elimination filter in the measurement setup Change the y axis scaling to 1 dB div or the range to 10 dB a Press the AMPT key then select Scale Config Range b Enter 10 dB Fig 6 13 Reference line with measurement results using larger scale Data Input and Output ...

Page 358: ...ge of the input sig nal at a high cost a single very accurate filter is used Therefore the input signal must be converted to the frequencies covered by the single accurate filter This is done by a mixer which converts and multiplies the frequency of the input signal with the help of the local oscillator LO The result is a higher and lower intermediate frequency IF The local oscillator can be tuned...

Page 359: ...s By default the pre defined range is used How ever you can take advantage of the extended frequency range by overriding the defined start and stop frequencies by the maximum possible values RF Overrange option Additional ranges If due to the LO frequency the conversion of the input signal is not possible using one harmonic the band must be split An adjacent partially overlapping frequency range c...

Page 360: ... value to be entered is not the voltage but the short circuit current The current is defined in the Bias Settings or set to the value of the conversion loss table see Bias Settings on page 371 and Bias on page 375 Fig 6 14 Bias circuit of the R S FSW The voltage U0 at the output of the operational amplifier can be set in the range 2 0 to 2 0 V An open circuit voltage Vbias of 0 5 to 0 5 V is obtai...

Page 361: ...e frequency range covered by the table the con version loss is assumed to be the same as that for the first and last reference value see figure 6 15 Fig 6 15 Conversion loss outside the band s frequency range Predefined conversion loss tables are often provided with the external mixer and can be imported to the R S FSW Alternatively you can define your own conversion loss tables Conversion loss ta...

Page 362: ...aximum value permitted by the firmware Automatic Signal Identification Automatic signal identification allows you to compare the upper and lower band results of the mixer thus detecting unwanted mixer products due to conversion Note that automatic signal identification is only available for measurements that per form frequency sweeps not in vector signal analysis or the I Q Analyzer for instance S...

Page 363: ...splay either the test sweep the upper side band sweep or the ref erence sweep lower side band sweep Function Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Signal ID Signal ID upper side band Signal ID lower side band Auto ID Auto ID Signal ID Auto ID Signal ID upper side band Signal ID lower side band Auto ID Tolerance for the comparison of test sweep and reference Since the LO frequency is displaced downwards in the r...

Page 364: ...requency range containing a blanked signal in detail using a small span e g an image frequency response part of the signal may nevertheless be displayed This happens when the displayed components of a blanked signal have a level differ ence which is smaller than the user defined threshold when compared with the noise floor These components are therefore not blanked out An unwanted signal with a S ...

Page 365: ... signal recorded in the test sweep was generated by mixing with the 3rd order harmonic Since the frequency axis scaling is based on the 2nd order the mixer product or the resulting diagram of the IF filter is compressed by a factor of 2 3 The signal recorded in the reference sweep was generated by mixing with the fundamental of the LO signal Since the frequency axis scaling is based on the 2nd ord...

Page 366: ...owing if the R S FSW B21 option is installed Press the INPUT OUTPUT key then select the External Mixer Config softkey From the Overview select Input then switch to the External Mixer tab under Input Source Note that external mixers are not supported in MSRA MSRT mode Mixer Settings 366 Basic Settings 370 Managing Conversion Loss Tables 372 Creating and Editing Conversion Loss Tables 373 Mixer Sett...

Page 367: ...nal mixer for input If activated ExtMix is indicated in the channel bar of the application together with the used band see Band on page 368 Remote command SENSe MIXer STATe on page 868 RF Start RF Stop Displays the start and stop frequency of the selected band read only The frequency range for the user defined band is defined via the harmonics configura tion see Range 1 2 on page 369 For details o...

Page 368: ... see Range 1 2 on page 369 Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND VALue on page 871 RF Overrange If enabled the frequency range is not restricted by the band limits RF Start and RF Stop In this case the full LO range of the selected harmonics is used Remote command SENSe MIXer RFOVerrange STATe on page 874 Preset Band Restores the presettings for the selected band Note changes to the band and mi...

Page 369: ...ic HIGH STATe on page 872 Harmonic Order Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration Defines which of the available harmonic orders of the LO is used to cover the fre quency range By default the lowest order of the specified harmonic type is selected that allows con version of input signals in the whole band If due to the LO frequency the conversion is not possible using one harmonic the band is split ...

Page 370: ...on page 361 For details on importing tables see Import Table on page 373 Remote command Average for range 1 SENSe MIXer LOSS LOW on page 874 Table for range 1 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe LOW on page 873 Average for range 2 SENSe MIXer LOSS HIGH on page 873 Table for range 2 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe HIGH on page 873 Basic Settings The basic settings concern general use of an external mixer They are only a...

Page 371: ...ed mixer products are suppressed in this calculated trace Note that automatic signal identification is only available for measurements that per form frequency sweeps not in vector signal analysis or the I Q Analyzer for instance See also Automatic Signal Identification on page 362 Remote command SENSe MIXer SIGNal on page 869 Auto ID Threshold Defines the maximum permissible level difference betwe...

Page 372: ...pairs that describe the correction values for conversion loss at certain frequencies The correction values for frequencies between the reference points are obtained via interpolation The currently selected table for each range is displayed at the top of the dialog box All conversion loss tables found in the instrument s C r_s instr user cvl direc tory are listed in the Modify Tables list New Table...

Page 373: ... CVL CLEAr on page 876 Import Table Imports a stored conversion loss table from any directory and copies it to the instru ment s C r_s instr user cvl directory It can then be assigned for use for a specific frequency range see Conversion loss on page 369 Creating and Editing Conversion Loss Tables Conversion loss tables can be defined and edited in the Edit conversion loss table dialog box which i...

Page 374: ...e 376 Shift x 376 Shift y 376 Save 376 File Name Defines the name under which the table is stored in the C r_s instr user cvl directory on the instrument The name of the table is identical with the name of the file without extension in which the table is stored This setting is mandatory The ACL extension is automatically appended during storage Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 87...

Page 375: ...ge 877 Bias The bias current which is required to set the mixer to its optimum operating point It corresponds to the short circuit current The bias current can range from 10 mA to 10 mA The actual bias current is lower because of the forward voltage of the mixer diode s Tip You can also define the bias interactively while a preview of the trace with the changed setting is displayed see Bias Settin...

Page 376: ...irst and last reference value The current configuration of the conversion loss function as described by the position value entries is displayed in the preview pane to the right of the table Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL DATA on page 876 Insert Value Inserts a new position value entry in the table If the table is empty a new entry at 0 Hz is inserted If entries already exist a new entry is in...

Page 377: ...OUT IF IN and IF IN female connectors option R S FSW B21 Both two port and three port mixers can be used Connect the mixer as follows Use the supplied coaxial cable to feed in the LO signal If no external mixers are con nected to the R S FSW cover the two front connectors LO OUT IF IN and IF IN with the SMA caps supplied 1 Connect the LO OUT IF IN output of the R S FSW to the LO port of the extern...

Page 378: ...s Band to define the required frequency range 3 From the Band selection list select the required band 4 In the Mixer Settings select Conversion Loss Table for Range 1 to define fre quency dependent level correction 5 From the selection list select a conversion loss table stored on the instrument No further settings are necessary since the selected file contains all required parame ters If the sele...

Page 379: ...and assignment to a specific fre quency range To shift the conversion loss values In order to increase each reference value in the conversion loss table a constant value a0 the values can be shifted either in x directoin or in y direction 1 Select INPUT Input Source Config External Mixer Conversion Loss Table 2 Select the assigned conversion loss table 3 Select Edit Table 4 Select Shift y and ente...

Page 380: ...nal with f 14 5 GHz to the input of the multiplier To activate and configure the external mixer 1 Select INPUT Input Source Config External Mixer ON to activate the external mixer for the current application 2 Select Mixer Settings Band to define the required frequency range 3 From the Band selection list select the band V 4 In the Mixer Settings select Conversion Loss Table for Range 1 to define ...

Page 381: ... also the insertion loss a0 of the cable used to tap off the IF signal are to be taken into account This addi tional loss is frequency dependent 1 Determine the insertion of the cable at the used intermediate frequency 2 Increase each reference value in the conversion loss table by the insertion loss a0 a Select INPUT Input Source Config External Mixer Conversion Loss Table b Select the assigned c...

Page 382: ... at the IF VIDEO DEMOD output connector The frequency at which this value is available is defined in IF Wide Out Frequency on page 383 IF 2 GHz Out The measured IF value is available at the IF OUT output connector at a frequency of 2 GHz with a bandwidth of 2 GHz This setting is only available for instrument models R S FSW43 50 67 For further prerequisites see IF 2 GHz Output on page 318 VIDEO The...

Page 383: ... the supply voltage for an external noise source on or off External noise sources are useful when you are measuring power levels that fall below the noise floor of the R S FSW itself for example when measuring the noise level of a DUT For details see chapter 6 2 1 4 Input from Noise Sources on page 316 Remote command DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce on page 904 Trigger 2 3 Defines the usage of the varia...

Page 384: ...gger 2 3 Defines the length of the pulse sent as a trigger to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger port PULSe LENGth on page 860 Send Trigger Output Type Trigger 2 3 Sends a user defined trigger to the output connector immediately Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high si...

Page 385: ...tepping Through the Frequency Range Center Frequency Stepsize Using the arrow keys you can move the center frequency in discrete steps through the available frequency range The step size by which the center frequency is increased or decreased is defined by the Center Frequency Stepsize The Center Frequency Stepsize also defines the step size by which the value is increased or decreased when you us...

Page 386: ...ween the sweep points is equal e g 200 kHz However if high and low frequencies appear in the same display it is difficult to deter mine individual frequencies precisely or to distinguish frequencies that are close together In a logarithmic display lower frequencies are distributed amoung a much larger area of the display while high frequencies are condensed to a smaller area Now it is much easier ...

Page 387: ...hat means the distance between two sweep points should not exceed the RBW If this condition is not met signals or interferences could be missed especially narrowband interferences 6 3 2 Frequency and Span Settings Frequency and span settings can be configured via the Frequency dialog box Signal tracking is configured in the Signal Tracking tab of this dialog box For details see chapter 6 3 3 How T...

Page 388: ...391 Tracking Threshold 391 Signal Track Trace 391 Center frequency Defines the normal center frequency of the signal The allowed range of values for the center frequency depends on the frequency span span 0 spanmin 2 fcenter fmax spanmin 2 zero span 0 Hz fcenter fmax fmax and spanmin are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 831 Span Defines the frequency span T...

Page 389: ...ling Logarithmic scaling of the frequency axis however is common for EMI measurements over large frequency ranges as it enhances the resolution of the lower frequencies On the other hand high frequencies get more crowded and become harder to distinguish For more information see chapter 6 3 1 4 Coping with Large Frequency Ranges Logarithmic Scaling on page 386 Remote command DISPlay WINDow n TRACe ...

Page 390: ... step size for the center frequency to 50 of the span RBW X Span RBW Sets the step size for the center frequency to a manually defined fac tor of the span RBW The X Factor defines the percentage of the span RBW Values between 1 and 100 in steps of 1 are allowed The default setting is 10 Center Sets the step size to the value of the center frequency and removes the coupling of the step size to span...

Page 391: ...l Tracking Activates or deactivates signal tracking This function is only available for spans 0 If activated after each sweep the center frequency is set to the maximum level of the specified trace found within the searched bandwidth Remote command CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion STRack STATe on page 835 Tracking Bandwidth Signal Tracking Defines the search bandwidth for signal tracking around the cente...

Page 392: ...pan button To return to the previously set frequency range select the Last span button 6 3 4 How to Move the Center Frequency through the Frequency Range In some cases it may be useful to move the center frequency through a larger fre quency range for example from one harmonic to another 1 In the Frequency dialog box define the Center Frequency Stepsize This is the size by which the center frequen...

Page 393: ...mined frequency spectrum or for the measurement time horizontal x axis The settings for the vertical axis regarding amplitude and scaling are described here Impact of the Vertical Axis Settings 393 Amplitude Settings 395 Scaling the Y Axis 399 How to Optimize the Amplitude Display 401 6 4 1 Impact of the Vertical Axis Settings Some background knowledge on the impact of the described settings is pr...

Page 394: ...ove this value may lead to incorrect measurement results which is indicated by the RF OVLD status display Furthermore higher input levels may damage the instrument Therefore the required RF attenuation is determined automatically according to the reference level by default High attenuation levels also avoid intermodulation On the other hand attenuation must be compensated for by re amplifying the ...

Page 395: ...area Logarithmic scaling is useful when large ranges of values must be combined in one display Loga rithmic scaling is best applied to measurement values in logarithmic units dB dBm etc In addition to linear or logarithmic scaling the vertical axis can be set to display either absolute or relative values Absolute values show the measured levels while relative values show the difference between the...

Page 396: ...ctly which is indicated by the IF OVLD status display The reference level is also used to scale power diagrams the reference level is then used as the maximum on the y axis Since the R S FSW hardware is adapted according to this value it is recommended that you set the reference level close above the expected maximum signal level to ensure an optimum measurement no compression good signal to noise...

Page 397: ...WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 845 Unit Reference Level The R S FSW measures the signal voltage at the RF input In the default state the level is displayed at a power of 1 mW dBm Via the known input impedance 50 Ω or 75 Ω see Impedance on page 319 conversion to other units is possible The fol lowing units are available and directly convertible dBm dBmV dBμV dBμA dBpW Volt Ampere Watt...

Page 398: ...ectronic Attenuation Option B25 If option R S FSW B25 is installed you can also activate an electronic attenuator In Auto mode the settings are defined automatically in Manual mode you can define the mechanical and electronic attenuation separately Note Electronic attenuation is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span 13 6 GHz In Auto mode RF attenuation is provided b...

Page 399: ...y the instrument s inherent noise which increases the dynamic range In this case a reference measurement of the instrument s inherent noise is carried out The measured noise power is then subtracted from the power in the channel that is being analyzed first active trace only The inherent noise of the instrument depends on the selected center frequency resolu tion bandwidth and level setting Theref...

Page 400: ...required to define these settings are described in chap ter 11 7 3 Configuring the Vertical Axis Amplitude Scaling on page 844 Range 400 Ref Level Position 400 Auto Scale Once 401 Scaling 401 Range Defines the displayed y axis range in dB The default value is 100 dB Remote command DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe on page 849 Ref Level Position Defines the reference level position i e the position of...

Page 401: ...ic units dB and A V Watt Linear Unit Linear scaling in the unit of the measured signal Linear Per cent Linear scaling in percentages from 0 to 100 Absolute The labeling of the level lines refers to the absolute value of the refer ence level not available for Linear Percent Relative The scaling is in dB relative to the reference level only available for logarithmic units dB The upper line of the gr...

Page 402: ...of Available RRC and Channel Filters 416 6 5 1 Impact of the Bandwidth Filter and Sweep Settings The bandwidth filter and sweep settings are closely related and interdependant The values available for resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth depend on the selected filter type In addition these settings have an impact on other measurement parame ters The following equation shows the interdependency...

Page 403: ...sely in the center of the two signals Decreasing the resolution bandwidth makes the level drop larger which thus makes the individual signals clearer The highest sensitivity is obtained at the smallest bandwidth 1 Hz If the bandwidth is increased the reduction in sensitivity is proportional to the change in bandwidth Increasing the bandwidth by a factor of 3 increases the displayed noise by approx...

Page 404: ...table trace curves even when using an RMS or average detector Normally if the RMS or average detector is used the sweep time should be increased to get more stable traces 6 5 1 3 Coupling VBW and RBW The video bandwidth can be coupled to the resolution bandwidth automatically In this case if the resolution bandwidth is changed the video bandwidth is automatically adjusted Coupling is recommended i...

Page 405: ...y default Auto sweep type the R S FSW automatically uses the sweep type with the highest sweep rate depending on these measurement settings Restrictions for FFT mode FFT mode is not available when using 5 Pole filters Channel filters or RRC filters or the Quasi peak detector In this case sweep mode is used The same applies when an external generator option R S FSW B10 is active Optimization In FFT...

Page 406: ... optimization Optimization for zero span sweeps For normal sweeps in the time domain zero span the optimization mode determines the selection of the A D converter prefilter which depends on the RBW In Dynamic mode the narrowest possible prefilter is used In Speed mode the widest possible prefilter is used In Auto mode a medium sized prefilter is used 6 5 1 6 Which Data May Pass Filter Types While ...

Page 407: ...ccur In this case the R S FSW displays the error message Sweep time too low and marks the indicated sweep time with a red bullet Further more a status bit indicates an error see STATus QUEStionable TIMe Register on page 640 The sweep time can be coupled to the span not zero span video bandwidth VBW and resolution bandwidth RBW automatically If the span resolution bandwidth or video bandwidth is ch...

Page 408: ...ode This is particularly of interest when using the trace configurations Average or Max Hold to take previously recorded measurements into account for averaging maximum search see chap ter 7 3 1 2 Analyzing Several Traces Trace Mode on page 455 6 5 2 Bandwidth Filter and Sweep Settings To configure the bandwidth filter and sweep Bandwidth and filter settings can be configured via the Bandwidth tab...

Page 409: ...User Manual 1173 9411 02 19 Fig 6 22 Bandwidth dialog box Fig 6 23 Sweep dialog box for spectrogram display RBW 410 VBW 410 Sweep Time 411 Span RBW 411 RBW VBW 411 Filter Type 412 Default Coupling 412 Bandwidth Filter and Sweep Configuration ...

Page 410: ...on page 403 For measurements on I Q data in the frequency domain the maximum RBW is 1 MHz For EMI measurements using the quasipeak detector the 1 MHz RBW filter is not available see chapter 5 13 3 1 Resolution Bandwidth and Filter Types on page 290 Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution on page 836 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution AUTO on page 836 VBW Defines the video bandwidth automat...

Page 411: ...42 SENSe SWEep TIME on page 842 Span RBW Sets the coupling ratio if RBW is set to auto mode For more information see chapter 6 5 1 4 Coupling Span and RBW on page 404 Auto 100 resolution bandwidth span 100 This coupling ratio is the default setting of the R S FSW Manual The coupling ratio is defined manually The span resolution bandwidth ratio can be set in the range from 1 to 10000 Remote command...

Page 412: ...uration Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution TYPE on page 837 Default Coupling Sets all coupled functions to the default state AUTO In addition the ratio RBW VBW is set to SINE 1 1 and the ratio SPAN RBW to 100 For more information see chapter 6 5 1 3 Coupling VBW and RBW on page 404 Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution AUTO on page 836 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo AUTO on ...

Page 413: ...ements Table 6 2 Optimization parameters in FFT mode Optimization mode Description Dynamic Optimizes the dynamic range by using the narrowest possible partial span depend ing on the RBW The autorange function for the internal IF gain calculation is activated to obtain the best control range for the A D converter Speed Optimizes the sweep rate by using the widest possible partial span depending on ...

Page 414: ... Type on page 405 FFT is not available in the following cases when using 5 Pole filters Channel filters or RRC filters when using the Quasi peak detector when an external generator option B10 is active In these cases frequency sweep is used Remote command SENSe SWEep TYPE on page 843 Single Sweep RUN SINGLE After triggering starts the number of sweeps set in Sweep Count The measurement stops after...

Page 415: ... In this case a channel in continuous sweep mode is swept repeatedly Furthermore the RUN CONT key controls the Sequencer not individual sweeps RUN CONT starts the Sequencer in continuous mode For details on the Sequencer see chapter 4 5 1 The Sequencer Concept on page 105 Remote command INITiate CONTinuous on page 694 Continue Single Sweep After triggering repeats the number of sweeps set in Sweep...

Page 416: ...s only Remote command CALCulate SGRam SPECtrogram CONT on page 914 Frame Count Spectrogram Frames Determines how many frames are plotted during a single sweep measurement as opposed to a continuous sweep The maximum number of possible frames depends on the history depth see History Depth on page 474 For more details see Time Frames on page 459 Remote command CALCulate SGRam SPECtrogram FRAMe COUNt...

Page 417: ...kHz CFILter 4 kHz CFILter DAB Satellite 4 5 kHz CFILter 5 kHz CFILter 6 kHz CFILter 6 kHz a 0 2 RRC APCO 8 5 kHz CFILter ETS300 113 12 5 kHz channels 9 kHz CFILter AM Radio 10 kHz CFILter 12 5 kHz CFILter CDMAone 14 kHz CFILter ETS300 113 20 kHz channels 15 kHz CFILter 16 kHz CFILter ETS300 113 25 kHz channels 18 kHz a 0 35 RRC TETRA 20 kHz CFILter 21 kHz CFILter PDC 24 3 kHz a 0 35 RRC IS 136 25 ...

Page 418: ...ILter 28 MHz CFILter 40 MHz CFILter 80 MHz CFILter These filters are only available with option R S FSW B8 Resolution Bandwidths 10 MHz 6 6 Trigger and Gate Configuration Triggering means to capture the interesting part of the signal Choosing the right trigger type and configuring all trigger settings correctly allows you to detect various incidents in your signals Gating allows you to restrict me...

Page 419: ...s advanced trigger settings are available Hysteresis to avoid unwanted trigger events caused by noise Holdoff to define exactly which trigger event will cause the trigger in a jittering sig nal Trigger Source 419 Trigger Offset 419 Trigger Hysteresis 420 Trigger Drop Out Time 420 Trigger Holdoff 421 Trigger Source The trigger source defines which source must fulfill the condition that triggers the...

Page 420: ...r event is ignored as the signal does not exceed the hysteresis threshold before it reaches the trigger level again on the rising edge On the falling edge however two trigger events occur as the signal exceeds the hysteresis before it falls to the trigger level the second time Trigger level T T T Trigger hysteresis T Fig 6 24 Effects of the trigger hysteresis See Hysteresis on page 431 Trigger Dro...

Page 421: ...rst If a drop out time is defined the power level must remain below the trigger level at least for the duration of the drop out time as defined above However if a drop out time is defined that is longer than the pulse width this condition cannot be met before the final pulse so a trigger event will not occur until the pulsed signal is over Drop Out T T T Fig 6 26 Trigger drop out time for falling ...

Page 422: ...ing behaviour can be achieved When the gate source signal is active the input signal data is collected when the gate signal is inactive the input signal is ignored Edge The gate opens and the measurement starts when a defined level in the gate source is exceeded and stops when the defined Gate Length is reached The Gate Mode Level is not supported for Rohde Schwarz power sensors The sig nal sent b...

Page 423: ...Common Measurement Settings R S FSW 423 User Manual 1173 9411 02 19 Fig 6 28 Effects of Gate mode Gate delay and Gate length Trigger and Gate Configuration ...

Page 424: ...ncy components generated during switching Similarly the spectrum can also be analyzed for an inactive carrier The sweep can be controlled by an external gate or by the internal power trigger Fig 6 29 GSM signal with GATE OFF Fig 6 30 GSM signal with GATE ON Gated sweep operation is also possible for zero span measurements This allows you to display level variations of individual slots for instance...

Page 425: ... settings are applied to the measurement diagram directly The preview diagram displays a zero span measurement at the center frequency with the defined RBW and sweep time This is useful to analyze bursts for example to determine the required gate settings The main diagram remains unchanged concern ing the zero span settings Only the trigger and gate settings are applied to the mea surement 6 6 2 T...

Page 426: ...27 Trigger Settings 427 Trigger Source 427 Free Run 428 External Trigger 1 2 3 428 Video 428 IF Power 429 Baseband Power 429 RF Power 429 Power Sensor 430 Time 430 Trigger Level 430 Repetition Interval 430 Drop Out Time 431 Trigger Offset 431 Hysteresis 431 Trigger Holdoff 431 Slope 432 Trigger 2 3 432 Output Type 432 Level 432 Pulse Length 433 Send Trigger 433 Gate Settings 433 Gated Trigger 433 ...

Page 427: ...enter frequency Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 831 RBW Preview Defines the bandwidth value The available resolution bandwidths are specified in the data sheet Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible bandwidth Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution on page 836 Sweep Time Preview Defines the sweep time Allowed values depend on the ratio of span to RBW and RBW...

Page 428: ...ng Started manual External Trigger 1 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 1 INPUT connector on the front panel External Trigger 2 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 2 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the front panel Note Connector must be configured for Input in the Outputs con figuration see Trigger 2 3 on page 383 External Trigger 3 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Not...

Page 429: ...o a possible change in sweep types the trigger bandwidth may vary considerably for the same RBW setting Remote command TRIG SOUR IFP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 854 SWE EGAT SOUR IFP for gated triggering see SENSe SWEep EGATe SOURce on page 857 Baseband Power Trigger Source Trigger Settings Defines triggering on the baseband power for baseband input via the Digital Baseband Interface R S F...

Page 430: ... by these sensors merely reflects the instant the level is first exceeded rather than a time period However only time periods can be used for gating in level mode Thus the trigger impulse from the sensors is not long enough for a fully gated measurement the measurement cannot be completed Remote command TRIG SOUR PSE see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 854 SWE EGAT SOUR PSE for gated triggering se...

Page 431: ...gger switched off Maximum allowed range limited by the sweep time pretriggermax sweep time For the Time trigger source this function is not available Remote command TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME on page 851 Hysteresis Trigger Settings Defines the distance in dB to the trigger level that the trigger source must exceed before a trigger event occurs Settting a hysteresis avoids unwanted trigger event...

Page 432: ...ilable for the connector Output The R S FSW sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected devices Further trigger parameters are available for the connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger port LEVel on page 859 OUTPut TRIGger port DIRection on page 858 Output Type Trigger 2 3 Type of signal to be sent to the output Device Trig gered Default Sends a trigger when the R S FSW ...

Page 433: ...gering on or off If the gate is switched on a gate signal applied to one of the TRIGGER INPUT con nectors or the internal IF power detector controls the sweep of the analyzer Gate Mode Gate Settings Sets the gate mode For more information see chapter 6 6 1 2 Gated Measurements on page 422 Edge The gate opens and the measurement starts when a defined level in the gate source is exceeded and stops w...

Page 434: ... the TRIG key and then the Trigger Gate Config softkey The following tasks are described 6 6 3 1 How to Determine the Required Trigger Gate Parameters 434 6 6 3 2 How to Configure a Triggered Measurement 435 6 6 3 3 How to Configure a Gated Measurement 436 6 6 3 1 How to Determine the Required Trigger Gate Parameters 1 In the Trigger and Gate dialog box switch on Show Preview A zero span measureme...

Page 435: ...l trigger as described for the other power triggers To define a power trigger 1 In the Trigger and Gate dialog box define the Trigger Source IF Power or Video Note that the video signal corresponds to the envelope of the IF signal it has been processed by the resolution and video filters and the selected detector 2 Define the Trigger Level the power level at which the measurement will start For a ...

Page 436: ...6 4 How to Output a Trigger Signal Using one of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors of the R S FSW the internal trigger signal can be output for use by other connected devices For details on the connectors see the R S FSW Getting Started manual To output a trigger to a connected device 1 In the Trigger In Out tab of the Trigger and Gate dialog box set the trigger to be used to Output Note...

Page 437: ...o adjust funtion for a triggered measurement you are asked how the R S FSW should behave default The measurement for adjustment waits for the next trigger The measurement for adjustment is performed without waiting for a trigger The trigger source is temporarily set to Free Run After the measurement is com pleted the original trigger source is restored The trigger level is adjusted as fol lows For...

Page 438: ...level measurement if necessary see Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 438 Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 863 Resetting the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Auto Resets the measurement duration for automatic settings to the default value Spectrum application 1 ms Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE on page 862 Changing the Automatic Measure...

Page 439: ... and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines a lower threshold the signal must fall below compared to the last mea surement before the reference level is adapted automatically Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis LOWer on page 862 Adjusting Settings Automatically ...

Page 440: ... 523 7 1 Result Display Configuration Measurement results can be evaluated in many different ways for example graphi cally as summary tables statistical evaluations etc Thus the result display is highly configurable to suit your specific requirements and optimize analysis Here you can find out how to optimize the display for your measurement results Basic operations concerning the R S FSW display ...

Page 441: ...AY ADD 1 RIGH DIAG see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 822 Marker Table Displays a table with the current marker values for the active markers This table may be displayed automatically if configured accordingly see Marker Table Display on page 497 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH MTAB see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 822 Results CALCulate n MARKer m X on page 932 CALCulate n MARKer m Y on page 943 Marker Peak...

Page 442: ... or sweep time the y axis shows the measurement time A third dimension the power level is indicated by different colors Thus you can see how the strength of the signal varies over time for different frequencies The spectrogram display consists of two diagrams the standard spectrum result dis play upper diagram and the spectrogram result display lower diagram For details see chapter 7 3 1 6 Working...

Page 443: ...aluation method can be displayed in multiple windows simultaneously New windows are added by dragging an evaluation icon from the evaluation bar to the screen The position of each new window depends on where you drop the eval uation icon in relation to the existing windows All display configuration actions are only possible in SmartGrid mode When Smart Grid mode is activated the evaluation bar rep...

Page 444: ...be replaced the drop area is highlighted in a darker color shade Positioning the window The screen can be divided into up to four rows Each row can be split into up to four columns where each row can have a different number of columns However rows always span the entire width of the screen and may not be interrupted by a column A single row is available as the drop area for the window in the Smart...

Page 445: ...IG menu The SmartGrid functions and the evaluation bar are displayed To close the SmartGrid mode and restore the previous softkey menu select the Close icon in the right hand corner of the toolbar or press any key on the front panel 7 1 2 3 How to Add a New Result Window Each type of evaluation is displayed in a separate window Up to 16 individual windows can be displayed per measurement channel i...

Page 446: ...nge the Result Windows 1 Select an icon from the evaluation bar or the Move icon for an existing evaluation window 2 Drag the evaluation over the SmartGrid A blue area shows where the window will be placed 3 Move the window until a suitable area is indicated in blue 4 Drop the window in the target area The windows are rearranged to the selected layout and Delete and Move icons are displayed in eac...

Page 447: ... 407 Single Zoom Versus Multiple Zoom 447 Zoom Functions 448 How to Zoom Into a Diagram 449 7 2 1 Single Zoom Versus Multiple Zoom Two different zoom modes are available single zoom and multiple zoom A single zoom replaces the current diagram by a new diagram which displays an enlarged extract of the trace This function can be used repetitively until the required details are visible In multiple zo...

Page 448: ...2 2 Zoom Functions The zoom functions are only available from the toolbar Single Zoom 448 Multiple Zoom 448 Restore Original Display 449 Deactivating Zoom Selection mode 449 Single Zoom A single zoom replaces the current diagram by a new diagram which displays an enlarged extract of the trace This function can be used repetitively until the required details are visible Remote command DISPlay WINDo...

Page 449: ...e zoom DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom STATe on page 908 for each multiple zoom window Deactivating Zoom Selection mode Deactivates zoom mode Tapping the screen no longer invokes a zoom but selects an object Remote command DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM STATe on page 907 single zoom DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom STATe on page 908 for each multiple zoom window 7 2 3 How to Zoom Into a Diagram The ...

Page 450: ...Repeat these steps if necessary to enlarge the diagram further Scrolling in the zoomed display You can scroll the diagram area to display the entire diagram using the scrollbars at the right and at the bottom of the diagram To return to selection mode in the diagram While you are in zoom mode touching the screen changes the zoom area In order to select or move a trace or marker you must switch bac...

Page 451: ... separate window see figure 7 4 3 In the overview diagram select the next area to be enlarged The second zoom area is indicated in the overview diagram and a second zoom window is displayed 4 Repeat these steps if necessary to zoom into further trace areas up to four To move or change zoom areas In multiple zoom mode you can change the size or position of the individual zoom areas easily at any ti...

Page 452: ...ral Trace Results Trace Math Evaluation 457 Working with Spectrograms 458 7 3 1 1 Mapping Samples to Sweep Points with the Trace Detector A trace displays the values measured at the sweep points The number of samples taken during a sweep is much larger than the number of sweep points that are dis played in the measurement trace Example Assume the following measurement parameters Sample rate 32 MSa...

Page 453: ...ive of the wave form CW carrier modulated carrier white noise or impulsive signal Correc tion factors as needed for other detectors to measure the power of the different signal classes are not required Average Av Calculates the linear average of all samples contained in a sweep point To this effect R S FSW uses the linear voltage after envelope detection The sampled linear values are summed up and...

Page 454: ...MS detector and VBW If the RMS detector is selected the video bandwidth in the hardware is bypassed Thus duplicate trace averaging with small VBWs and RMS detector no longer occurs However the VBW is still considered when calculating the sweep time This leads to a longer sweep time for small VBW values Thus you can reduce the VBW value to ach ieve more stable trace curves even when using an RMS de...

Page 455: ...t in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one This mode is especially useful with modulated or pulsed signals The signal spectrum is filled up upon each sweep until all signal components are detected in a kind of envelope This mode is not available for statistics measurements Min Hold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R S FSW...

Page 456: ...oise is effectively reduced without need for restarting the averaging process after a change of the signal In Single Sweep mode the current trace is averaged with the previously stored averaged trace No averaging is carried out for the first sweep but the measured value is stored in the trace memory The next time a sweep is per formed the trace average is calculated according to the following form...

Page 457: ...y visible against noise since with this type of averaging noise suppression is improved while the sinewave signals remain unchanged For noise or pseudo noise signals the positive peak amplitudes are decreased in loga rithmic averaging due to the characteristic involved and the negative peak values are increased relative to the average value If the distorted amplitude distribution is aver aged a va...

Page 458: ...he power level is indicated by different colors Thus you can see how the strength of the signal varies over time for different frequencies Example Spectrogram for the calibration signal In this example you see the spectrogram for the calibration signal of the R S FSW compared to the standard spectrum display Since the signal does not change over time the color of the frequency levels does not chan...

Page 459: ...ector See chapter 7 3 1 1 Mapping Samples to Sweep Points with the Trace Detector on page 452 Frames are sorted in chronological order beginning with the most recently recorded frame at the top of the diagram frame number 0 With the next sweep the previous frame is moved further down in the diagram until the maximum number of captured frames is reached The display is updated continuously during th...

Page 460: ...ings 20 sweeps will be performed for each single sweep measurement The first 10 will be averaged to create the first frame the next 10 will be averaged to create the second frame As you can see increasing the sweep count increases the accuracy of the individual traces while increasing the frame count increases the number of traces in the diagram Especially for Average or Min hold and Max hold trac...

Page 461: ...ECtrogram FRAMe COUNt on page 915 CALCulate SGRam SPECtrogram HDEPth on page 916 CALCulate SGRam SPECtrogram FRAMe SELect on page 915 Timestamps CALCulate SGRam SPECtrogram TSTamp STATe on page 917 CALCulate SGRam SPECtrogram TSTamp DATA on page 916 Storing results MMEMory STORe n SGRam on page 1014 Color Maps Spectrograms assign power levels to different colors in order to visualize them The lege...

Page 462: ...parts of interest are displayed at all The Shape and Focus of the Color Curve The color mapping function assigns a specified color to a specified power level in the spectrogram display By default colors on the color map are distributed evenly How ever if a certain area of the value range is to be visualized in greater detail than the rest you can set the focus of the color mapping to that area Cha...

Page 463: ...ge from 105 5 dBm to 60 dBm blue green and yellow which occurs more often in the example The range from 60 dBm to 20 dBm on the other hand is dominated by various shades of red only Fig 7 10 Non linear color curve shape 0 5 Fig 7 11 Spectrogram with shifted color curve Markers in the Spectrogram Markers and delta markers are shaped like diamonds in the spectrogram They are only displayed in the sp...

Page 464: ...is means that only markers posi tioned on frame 0 are visible To view markers that are positioned on a frame other than frame 0 in the spectrum result display you must stop the measurement and select the corresponding frame 7 3 2 Trace Configuration Trace configuration includes the following settings and functions Trace Settings 464 Trace Math 469 Trace Data Export Configuration 470 Spectrogram Se...

Page 465: ... Softkeys 468 Copy Trace 468 Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 Selects the corresponding trace for configuration The currently selected trace is high lighted orange For details see chapter 7 3 3 1 How to Configure a Standard Trace on page 477 Remote command Selected via numeric suffix of TRACe 1 6 commands Trace Mode Defines the update mode for subsequent traces For details see chapt...

Page 466: ...iew The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and displayed Blank Removes the selected trace from the display Remote command DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t MODE on page 910 Detector Defines the trace detector to be used for trace analysis For details see chapter 7 3 1 1 Mapping Samples to Sweep Points with the Trace Detector on page 452 Note For EMI measurements the trace detector is used for ...

Page 467: ...onverted into linear units prior to averag ing After the averaging the data is converted back into its original unit Logarithmic For logarithmic scaling the values are averaged in dBm For linear scaling the behavior is the same as with linear averaging Power Activates linear power averaging The power level values are converted into unit Watt prior to averag ing After the averaging the data is conv...

Page 468: ...to Detector Negative Peak Traces 4 6 Blank Auto Detector Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Softkeys Displays the Traces settings and focuses the Mode list for the selected trace For details see chapter 7 3 3 1 How to Configure a Standard Trace on page 477 Remote command DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t STATe on page 911 Copy Trace The Copy Trace softkey opens the Copy Trace tab of the Trace Configuration di...

Page 469: ...from trace 1 The result is displayed in trace 1 and refers to the zero point defined with the Trace Math Position setting The following sub tractions can be performed T1 T2 T1 Subtracts trace 2 from trace 1 T1 T3 T1 Subtracts trace 3 from trace 1 T1 T4 T1 Subtracts trace 4 from trace 1 T1 T5 T1 Subtracts trace 5 from trace 1 T1 T6 T1 Subtracts trace 6 from trace 1 To switch off the trace math use ...

Page 470: ...BpW the data is converted into V prior to subtraction i e subtraction is done in V Log Activates logarithmic subtraction This subtraction method only takes effect if the grid is set to a loga rithmic scale i e the unit of the data is dBm In this case the values are subtracted in dBm Otherwise i e with linear scaling the behav ior is the same as with linear subtraction Power Activates linear power ...

Page 471: ...rnatively you can select one specific trace only for export see Trace to Export The results are output in the same order as they are displayed on the screen window by window trace by trace and table row by table row Remote command FORMat DEXPort TRACes on page 1012 Include Instrument Measurement Settings Includes additional instrument and measurement settings in the header of the export file for r...

Page 472: ... Export Format on page 557 Note Secure user mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see chapter 3...

Page 473: ...am result display Remote command CALCulate SGRam SPECtrogram STATe on page 917 Selecting a frame to display Selects a specific frame loads the corresponding trace from the memory and displays it in the Spectrum window Note that activating a marker or changing the position of the active marker automati cally selects the frame that belongs to that marker This function is only available in single swe...

Page 474: ...or Maps on page 461 Continuous Sweep RUN CONT After triggering starts the sweep and repeats it continuously until stopped This is the default setting While the measurement is running the Continuous Sweep softkey and the RUN CONT key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again The results are not deleted until a new measurement is started...

Page 475: ...y displayed measurement channel is updated For details on the Sequencer see chapter 4 5 1 The Sequencer Concept on page 105 Remote command INITiate IMMediate on page 694 CALCulate SGRam SPECtrogram CONT on page 914 Clear Spectrogram Resets the spectrogram result display and clears the history buffer This function is only available if a spectrogram is selected Remote command CALCulate SGRam SPECtro...

Page 476: ...lue range Start Stop Defines the lower and upper boundaries of the value range of the spectrogram Remote command DISPlay WINDow n SGRam SPECtrogram COLor LOWer on page 918 DISPlay WINDow n SGRam SPECtrogram COLor UPPer on page 918 Shape Defines the shape and focus of the color curve for the spectrogram result display 1 to 0 More colors are distributed amoung the lower values 0 Colors are distribut...

Page 477: ... Traces dialog box To display the Traces dialog box do one of the following Press the TRACE key and then select the Trace Config softkey Select Analysis from the Overview then select the Traces tab 1 For each trace select the Trace Mode and Trace Detector Traces with the trace mode Blank are not displayed 2 To configure several traces to predefined display modes in one step press the but ton for t...

Page 478: ...required to perform these tasks are described in chap ter 11 8 2 2 Configuring Spectrograms on page 914 The following tasks are described here To display a spectrogram on page 478 To remove the spectrogram display on page 479 To set a marker in the spectrogram on page 479 To configure a spectrogram on page 479 To select a color scheme on page 480 To set the value range graphically using the color ...

Page 479: ...ote that the frame number is always 0 or a negative value The marker is only visible in the spectrum diagram if it is defined for the currently selected frame In the spectrogram result display all markers are visible that are positioned on a visible frame To configure a spectrogram 1 Configure the spectrogram frames a Select the SWEEP key b Select the Sweep Config softkey c In the Sweep Average Co...

Page 480: ...log box select the option for the color scheme to be used Editing the value range of the color map The distribution of the measured values is displayed as a histogram in the Color Map ping dialog box To cover the entire measurement value range make sure the first and last bar of the histogram are included To ignore noise in a spectrogram for example exclude the lower power levels from the histogra...

Page 481: ...o start at 90 dBm Thus you enter 10 in the Start field The R S FSW shifts the start point 10 to the right to 90 dBm Adjusting the reference level and level range Note that changing the reference level and level range of the measurement also affects the color mapping in the spectrogram Editing the shape of the color curve The color curve is a tool to shift the focus of the color distribution on the...

Page 482: ...lower values 0 defines a linear distribution A positive value 0 to 1 focusses the higher values 7 3 3 3 How to Copy Traces You can copy the trace settings from one trace to another in the Copy Trace tab of the Traces dialog box Select the Source trace and then the button for the Copy to trace Remote command TRACe n COPY on page 913 7 4 Marker Usage Markers help you analyze your measurement results...

Page 483: ...r Function Configuration 507 How to Work With Markers 519 Measurement Example Measuring Harmonics Using Marker Functions 522 7 4 1 Basics on Markers and Marker Functions Some background knowledge on marker settings and functions is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration settings Markers are used to mark points on traces to read out measurement results and to select ...

Page 484: ...use the Marker dialog box To position the selected marker to a special value use the softkeys in the Marker To menu To determine more sophisticated marker results use the special functions in the Marker Function dialog box In addition to basic markers sophisticated marker functions are provided for special results such as noise or demodulation Marker Types 484 Activating Markers 485 Marker Results...

Page 485: ...itched on again the markers along with coupled functions are restored to their original positions provided the markers have not been used on another trace 7 4 1 3 Marker Results Normal markers point to a sweep point on the time or frequency axis and display the associated numeric value for that sweep point Delta markers indicate an offset between the level at the delta marker position and the leve...

Page 486: ...o a peak value once Peak Search Searching for a peak value within a restricted search area Search Limits Creating a marker table with all or a defined number of peak values for one sweep Marker Peak List Updating the marker position to the current peak value automatically after each sweep Auto Peak Search Creating a fixed reference marker at the current peak value of a trace Peak Search Peak searc...

Page 487: ... 20 dB is required In this case the amplitude must rise at least 20 dB before falling again before a peak is detected Marker peak list The marker peak list determines the frequencies and levels of peaks in the spectrum It is updated automatically after each sweep How many peaks are displayed can be defined as well as the sort order In addition the detected peaks can be indicated in the diagram The...

Page 488: ... to the current marker position then counts the zero crossings of the IF thus the term signal counter and derives the precise frequency value Signal counting can be performed explicitely at the current marker position Signal Count marker function or implicitely by the R S FSW for certain functions Signal counting is only possible while the instrument is not sweeping Thus to perform a signal count ...

Page 489: ...ctors to analyze the noise density from the marker level Since the noise power is indicated with reference to 1 Hz bandwidth the bandwidth correction value is deducted from the marker level It is 10 x lg 1 Hz BWNoise where BWNoise is the noise or power bandwidth of the set resolution filter RBW RMS detector With the exception of bandwidth correction no further corrections are required since this d...

Page 490: ... span The result of the phase noise measurement is the difference in level between the refer ence point and the noise power density It is indicated as the function result of the phase noise marker in the Marker Table The sample detector is automatically used and the video bandwidth set to 0 1 times the resolution bandwidth RBW The two settings are taken into account in the correction values used f...

Page 491: ...on for the temporary markers cannot be determined uniquely for example due to noise dashes are displayed as a result 7 4 1 10 Measuring the Power in a Channel Band When you want to determine the noise power in a transmission channel you could use a noise marker and multiply the result with the channel bandwidth However the results would only be accurate for flat noise Band power markers allow you ...

Page 492: ...ector is used 7 4 1 11 Demodulating Marker Values and Providing Audio Output The R S FSW provides demodulators for AM FM and PM signals The demodulation marker function sends the demodulated data at the current marker frequency to the audio output Thus a displayed signal can be identified acoustically through the use of the internal loudspeaker or with headphones This function is not available for...

Page 493: ...ker Settings 493 Marker Search Settings and Positioning Functions 498 7 4 2 1 Marker Settings Marker settings can be configured via the MARKER key or in the Marker dialog box To display the Marker dialog box do one of the following Press the MKR key then select the Marker Config softkey In the Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Marker tab The remote commands required to define the...

Page 494: ... Marker 494 Marker State 494 Marker Position X value 495 Frame Spectrogram only 495 Marker Type 495 Reference Marker 495 Linking to Another Marker 495 Assigning the Marker to a Trace 496 Select Marker 496 All Markers Off 496 Selected Marker Marker name The marker which is currently selected for editing is highlighted orange Remote command Marker selected via suffix m in remote commands Marker Stat...

Page 495: ...he marker relative to the speci fied reference marker marker 1 by default Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m STATe on page 932 CALCulate n DELTamarker m STATe on page 930 Reference Marker Defines a marker as the reference marker which is used to determine relative analysis results delta marker values If a fixed reference point is configured see Defining a Fixed Reference on page 497 the reference...

Page 496: ...r functions are also deactiva ted Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m TRACe on page 932 Select Marker Opens a dialog box to select and activate or deactivate one or more markers quickly Remote command Marker selected via suffix m in remote commands All Markers Off Deactivates all markers in one step Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m AOFF on page 931 General Marker Settings Some general marker se...

Page 497: ...ing is most suitable to move the marker over a larger distance Sweep Points The marker position is moved from one sweep point to the next This setting is required for a very precise positioning if more sweep points are collected than the number of pixels that can be displayed on the screen It is the default mode Remote command CALCulate MARKer X SSIZe on page 933 Defining a Fixed Reference Instead...

Page 498: ...search results can be influenced by special settings Most marker positioning functions and the search settings are available in the MKR menu Search settings are also available via the MARKER key or in the vertical Marker Con fig tab of the Analysis dialog box horizontal Search Settings tab For more information on searching for signal peaks see chapter 7 4 1 4 Searching for Signal Peaks on page 486...

Page 499: ... Absolute Determines the next maximum minimum to either side of the current peak Right Determines the next maximum minimum to the right of the current peak Remote command CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum LEFT on page 940 CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum LEFT on page 937 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum NEXT on page 940 CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum NEXT on page 937 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum R...

Page 500: ...xcursion is 6 dB For more information see chapter 7 4 1 4 Searching for Signal Peaks on page 486 Remote command CALCulate n MARKer PEXCursion on page 934 Auto Max Min Peak Search If activated a maximum or minimum peak search is performed automatically for marker 1 after each sweep For spectrogram displays define which frame the peak is to be searched in For EMI measurements these functions are not...

Page 501: ...e command CALCulate MARKer X SLIMits STATe on page 935 CALCulate THReshold STATe on page 936 Marker Search Settings for Spectrograms Spectrograms show not only the current sweep results but also the sweep history Thus when searching for peaks you must define the search settings within a single time frame x direction and within several time frames y direction These settings are only available for s...

Page 502: ... current peak Absolute Determines the next maximum minimum to either side of the current peak Right Determines the next maximum minimum to the right of the current peak Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum LEFT on page 937 CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum NEXT on page 937 CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum RIGHt on page 938 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum LEFT on page 938 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum NE...

Page 503: ...6 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam SPECtrogram Y MAXimum NEXT on page 950 CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam SPECtrogram Y MINimum ABOVe on page 947 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam SPECtrogram Y MINimum ABOVe on page 950 CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam SPECtrogram Y MINimum BELow on page 947 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam SPECtrogram Y MINimum BELow on page 950 CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam SPECtrogram Y MINimum ...

Page 504: ...CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum PEAK on page 939 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum PEAK on page 941 Marker Search Area Defines which frames the search is performed in Visible Only the visible frames are searched Memory All frames stored in the memory are searched Remote command CALCulate n MARKer SGRam SPECtrogram SARea on page 945 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam SPECtrogram SARea on page 949 Exclude...

Page 505: ...age 302 Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum AUTO on page 937 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum AUTO on page 938 Search Limits The search results can be restricted by limiting the search area or adding search con ditions Search Limits Left Right Search Limits If activated limit lines are defined and displayed for the search Only results within the limited search range are considered For details ...

Page 506: ...vated For spectrogram displays define which frame the peak is to be searched in Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum PEAK on page 938 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK on page 940 Search Next Peak Sets the selected marker delta marker to the next lower maximum of the assigned trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated For spectrogram displays define which frame the next peak is...

Page 507: ...FUNCtion CENTer on page 830 Reference Level Marker Level Sets the reference level to the selected marker level Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion REFerence on page 844 7 4 3 Marker Function Configuration Special marker functions can be selected via the Marker Function dialog box To display this dialog box do one of the following Press the MKR FUNC key then select the Select Marker Functi...

Page 508: ...tion Config tab Then select the Signal Count button Select the Signal Count Con fig softkey For details see chapter 7 4 1 5 Performing a Highly Accurate Frequency Measure ment Signal Count on page 488 A measurement example is described in chap ter 5 2 2 2 Measuring the Signal Frequency Using the Signal Counter on page 119 Signal counters are not available for measurements on I Q based data Signal ...

Page 509: ...ged in the Marker Function dialog box are also changed in the Marker dialog box and vice versa To display the Noise Measurement Config dialog box do one of the following Press the MKR FUNC key then select the Select Marker Function softkey Then select the Noise Measurement button Select the Noise Meas Config softkey In the Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Marker Function Config ...

Page 510: ...2 CALCulate n DELTamarker m STATe on page 930 Noise Measurement State Activates or deactivates noise measurement for the marker in the diagram This function is only available for normal markers If activated the marker displays the noise power density measured at the position of the marker For details see chapter 7 4 1 7 Measuring Noise Density on page 488 Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCti...

Page 511: ...se Noise on page 490 Phase Noise Measurement State 511 Defining a Reference Point 511 Switching All Phase Noise Measurements Off 512 Phase Noise Measurement State Activates or deactivates phase noise measurement for the reference point in the dia gram This function is only available for delta markers If activated the delta markers display the phase noise measured at defined offsets from the refere...

Page 512: ...All Phase Noise Measurements Off Deactivates phase noise measurement for all markers Remote command CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion PNOise STATe on page 957 7 4 3 4 n dB Down Marker A special marker can be defined to determine a characteristic bandwidth or time span in a measured signal n dB down markers are configured in the N dB Down Config dialog box using the n dB down function To display t...

Page 513: ...ion depending on the mea surement results a fixed reference marker can be defined for trace analysis Once positioned the reference marker does not move during subsequent sweeps unless you explicitely move it manually When you select this marker function a vertical and a horizontal red display line are displayed marked as FXD A normal marker is activated and set to the peak value and a delta marker...

Page 514: ... Marker dialog box and vice versa To display the Band Power Config dialog box do one of the following Press the MKR FUNC key then select the Select Marker Function softkey Then select the Band Power button Select the Band Power Config softkey In the Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Marker Function Config tab Then select the Band Power button Select the Band Power Config softkey ...

Page 515: ...sity The result is a power level in relation to the bandwidth displayed in dBm Hz Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion BPOWer MODE on page 958 Switching All Band Power Measurements Off Deactivates band power measurement for all markers Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion BPOWer STATe on page 959 7 4 3 7 Marker Demodulation A special marker can be used to demodulate the signal at a...

Page 516: ...mmand CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DEModulation STATe on page 966 Continuous Demodulation If activated the signal is demodulated continuously not only at the marker position and sent to the audio output This allows you to monitor the frequency range acousti cally assuming the sweep time is long enough For zero span and EMI measurements demodulation is always active continuously Remote command CAL...

Page 517: ...he same value The trigger source in the channel bar is indicated as SQL for squelch The squelch level is indicated by a red line in the diagram Remote command SENSe DEMod SQUelch STATe on page 966 Squelch level Defines the level threshold below which the audible AF is cut off if squelching is enabled The video trigger level is set to the same value The squelch level is indicated by a red line in t...

Page 518: ... FPEaks STAT on page 955 Sort Mode Defines whether the peak list is sorted according to the x values or y values In either case the values are sorted in ascending order Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks SORT on page 954 Maximum Number of Peaks Defines the maximum number of peaks to be determined and displayed Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks LIST SIZE on page 9...

Page 519: ...ating All Marker Functions All special marker functions can be deactivated in one step Use the All Functions Off button in the Marker Functions dialog box 7 4 4 How to Work With Markers The following step by step instructions demonstrate in detail how to work with markers How to Analyze a Signal Point in Detail 519 How to Use a Fixed Reference Marker 520 How to Output the Demodulated Signal Accous...

Page 520: ...r 1 To display a fixed reference marker do one of the following Press the MKR FUNC key then select the Reference Fixed marker function In the Marker dialog box in the Reference Fixed area of the Marker Config tab set the State to On A vertical and a horizontal red display line are displayed marked as FXD The normal marker 1 is activated and set to the peak value of the trace assigned to marker 1 a...

Page 521: ...ults are determined immediately according to the default settings 6 Define how long you want to hear the output signal when the marker value is reached by entering the duration in the Marker Stop Time field Alternatively the audio signal can be output continuously regardless of the marker value in this case set Continuous Demodulation to On 7 Select the modulation type AM FM PM of the signal 8 To ...

Page 522: ... 25 dBm Procedure 1 Preset the R S FSW 2 Set the center frequency to 128 MHz 3 Set the span to 100 kHz The R S FSW displays the reference signal with a span of 100 kHz and resolution bandwidth of 1 kHz 4 Switch on the marker by pressing the MKR key The marker is positioned on the trace maximum 5 Set the measured signal frequency and the measured level as reference values a Press the MKR FUNC key b...

Page 523: ...y is set to the 2nd harmonic 8 Place the delta marker on the 2nd harmonic in the Marker To menu select the Peak softkey The delta marker moves to the maximum of the 2nd harmonic The displayed level result is relative to the reference point level fundamental wave level The other harmonics are measured by repeating steps step 7 and step 8 with the cen ter frequency being incremented or decremented i...

Page 524: ...is identified by one of the following abbreviations in the diagrams D1 Display Line 1 D2 Display Line 2 F1 Frequency Line 1 F2 Frequency Line 2 T1 Time Line 1 T2 Time Line 2 7 5 2 Basics on Limit Lines Limit lines are used to define amplitude curves or spectral distribution boundaries in the result diagram which are not to be exceeded They indicate for example the upper limits for interference rad...

Page 525: ... also exceed the specified frequency or time range The minimum frequency for a data point is 200 GHz the maximum frequency is 200 GHz For the time range representation negative times may also be entered The allowed range is 1000 s to 1000 s Fig 7 16 Example for an upper limit line Limits and Margins Limit lines define strict values that must not be exceeded by the measured signal A margin is simil...

Page 526: ...e diagram without editing the configured values or positions of the individual data points This option is only available if relative scaling is used Thus a new limit line can be easily generated based upon an existing limit line which has been shifted horizontally or vertically Defining a shift width for the values or position of the individual data points changes the line configuration thus chang...

Page 527: ...olation for limit check Fig 7 18 Limit violation for limit check 7 5 3 Settings and Functions for Display and Limit Lines For remote operation see chapter 11 8 4 Configuring Display and Limit Lines on page 975 Display Line Settings 528 Limit Line Settings and Functions 528 Display and Limit Lines ...

Page 528: ...INe k on page 976 CALCulate n TLINe Line on page 977 CALCulate n TLINe Line on page 977 Horizontal Line 1 2 Activates a horizontal display line D1 D2 in the diagram at the specified level Remote command CALCulate n DLINe k on page 975 CALCulate n DLINe k on page 975 7 5 3 2 Limit Line Settings and Functions Up to 8 limit lines can be displayed simultaneously in the R S FSW Many more can be stored ...

Page 529: ...ngs for individual lines see Limit Line Details on page 531 For more basic information on limit lines see chapter 7 5 2 Basics on Limit Lines on page 524 Name 529 Unit 529 Compatibility 530 Visibility 530 Traces to be Checked 530 Comment 530 Included Lines in Overview View Filter 530 Show lines for all modes 530 X Offset 530 Y Offset 531 Create New Line 531 Edit Line 531 Copy Line 531 Delete Line ...

Page 530: ...e active limit lines a message is indicated in the diagram Remote command CALCulate LIMit k TRACe t CHECk on page 986 Comment An optional description of the limit line Included Lines in Overview View Filter Defines which of the stored lines are included in the overview Show compat ible Only compatible lines Whether a line is compatible or not is indicated in the Compatibility setting Show all All ...

Page 531: ... OFFSet on page 980 CALCulate LIMit k UPPer OFFSet on page 983 Create New Line Creates a new limit line Edit Line Edit an existing limit line configuration Copy Line Copy the selected limit line configuration to create a new line Remote command CALCulate LIMit k COPY on page 985 Delete Line Delete the selected limit line configuration Remote command CALCulate LIMit k DELete on page 985 Disable All...

Page 532: ...e data is stored under this name with a LIN extension Remote command CALCulate LIMit k NAME on page 982 Comment Defines an optional comment for the limit line The text may contain up to 40 charac ters Remote command CALCulate LIMit COMMent on page 978 Threshold Defines an absolute threshold value only for relative scaling of the y axis For details on thresholds see chapter 7 5 2 Basics on Limit Li...

Page 533: ...ing on page 984 CALCulate LIMit k LOWer MODE on page 980 CALCulate LIMit k UPPer MODE on page 983 CALCulate LIMit k CONTrol DOMain on page 978 Y Axis Describes the vertical axis on which the data points of the limit line are defined Includes the following settings Level unit Scaling mode absolute or relative dB values Relative limit values refer to the reference level Limit type upper or lower lim...

Page 534: ...t k UPPer SHIFt on page 983 Save Saves the currently edited limit line under the name defined in the Name field 7 5 4 How to Work with Display and Limit Lines Step by step instructions on configuring display and limit lines are provided here For details on individual functions and settings see chapter 7 5 3 Settings and Functions for Display and Limit Lines on page 527 The remote commands required...

Page 535: ...heck on page 535 How to edit existing limit lines on page 536 How to copy an existing limit line on page 536 How to delete an existing limit line on page 536 How to configure a new limit line on page 536 How to move the limit line vertically or horizontally on page 537 How to find compatible limit lines In the Line Config dialog box select the View filter option Show compatible All stored limit li...

Page 536: ...me configuration as the source line 4 Edit the line configuration as described in How to configure a new limit line on page 536 5 Save the new configuration by selecting the Save button The new limit line is displayed in the overview and can be activated How to delete an existing limit line 1 In the Line Config dialog box select the limit line 2 Select the Delete button 3 Confirm the message The l...

Page 537: ...it line The margin must be within the valid value range and is not displayed in the dia gram or preview area 8 Optionally if the y axis uses relative scaling define an absolute Threshold as an additional criteria for a violation 9 Save the new configuration by selecting the Save button The new limit line is displayed in the overview and can be activated How to move the limit line vertically or hor...

Page 538: ...ration You can restore this defined initial state at any time as a known starting point for measurements This is often recommendable as a first step in troubleshooting when unusual measurement results arise To restore the default instrument configuration for all channels at once Press the PRESET key Alternatively to the factory default settings you can define user specific recall set tings to be r...

Page 539: ...r Setting mode Spectrum sweep mode auto center frequency fmax 2 center frequency step size 0 1 span span maximum possible depends on instrument model RF attenuation 10 dB reference level 0 dBm level range 100 dB log level unit dBm sweep time auto resolution bandwidth auto 3 MHz video bandwidth auto 3 MHz FFT filters off span RBW 100 RBW VBW 1 sweep cont trigger free run trace mode 1 clr write 2 3 ...

Page 540: ...ble only until the instru ment is switched off This data includes Windows 7 operating system files Firmware shutdown files containing information on last instrument state Self alignment data General instrument settings such as the IP address Measurement settings User data created during operation see also table 8 2 Any data created by other applications installed on the R S FSW for example text ed...

Page 541: ...n see The Automatic Login Function on page 29 While the secure user mode is active a message is displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the screen Secure Passwords By default the initial password for both the administrator account Instrument and the SecureUser account is 894129 When the secure user mode is activated the first time after installation you are prompted to change the passwords fo...

Page 542: ...ettings are stored or recalled quickly in just one step Configurable Save Recall a user defined set of instrument or channel settings are stored to a definable storage location Restrictions when recalling measurement settings When recalling a saved configuration file the following restrictions apply The frequency range defined in the configuration file must be supported by the R S FSW on which the...

Page 543: ...ocations cannot be changed During recall save sets of type Instrument replace the settings of the entire instru ment All other save sets start a new measurement channel with the stored settings If a measurement channel with the same name as the channel to be restored is already active the channel name for the new channel is extended by a consecutive number 8 3 1 1 Quick Save Quick Recall Settings ...

Page 544: ...ate and time and the storage type During recall save sets of type Instrument replace the settings of the entire instru ment All other save sets start a new measurement channel with the stored settings Storage Type Save only Defines which type of settings is to be stored in the save set Instrument with all chan nels The instrument settings for all currently active channels are stored Current Chan n...

Page 545: ...tings 8 3 2 Configurable Storage and Recall The more sophisticated storage and recall functions allow you to define which settings are stored and where the settings file is stored to Any settings file can be selected for recall Stored Data Types 545 Storage Location and File Name 546 Save and Recall Dialog Boxes 546 Startup Recall Settings 549 8 3 2 1 Stored Data Types The following types of data ...

Page 546: ...is cleared see chapter 3 1 7 Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode on page 37 Other storage locations cannot be selected in this mode The storage location and file name are selected in a file selection dialog box which is displayed when you perform a storage function By default the name of a settings file consists of a base name followed by an under score and three numbers e g limit_lines_005...

Page 547: ...ge device The Path contains the drive and the complete file path to the currently selected folder The Files list contains all subfolders and files of the currently selected path The default storage location for the SEM settings files is C R_S instr sem_std Note Saving instrument settings in secure user mode In secure user mode all data is stored to volatile memory and is only available during the ...

Page 548: ... 3 1 7 Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode on page 37 For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R S FSW User Manual Comment An optional description for the data file A maximum of 60 characters can be displayed Remote command MMEMory COMMent on page 993 File Type Determines whether the global instrument settings with all channels will b...

Page 549: ...ettings for a specific channel only select Recall in New Channel to acti vate a new channel with the stored settings or Recall in Current Channel to replace the current channel settings Note After you use the Recall function the history of previous actions is deleted i e any actions performed previously cannot be undone or redone using the UNDO REDO keys Note If a measurement channel with the same...

Page 550: ...instrument settings files can be selected for the startup recall function not channel settings files Remote command MMEMory LOAD AUTO on page 1001 Selecting the Storage Location Drive Path Files Select the storage location of the settings file on the instrument or an external drive The Drive indicates the internal C or any connected external drives e g a USB storage device The Path contains the dr...

Page 551: ...are extended by three numbers e g limit_lines_005 For details on the file name and location see chapter 8 3 2 2 Storage Location and File Name on page 546 Note Secure user mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to volatile memory To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see chapter 3 1 7 Prot...

Page 552: ... Select whether the instrument settings for all channels are to be stored or only those for the current channel 6 Select the items to be saved with the settings Either the settings for the currently selected channel only or for all channels can be stored and various other items such as lines or traces etc can be stored as well see chapter 8 3 2 1 Stored Data Types on page 545 7 Select Save A file ...

Page 553: ... tings will be restored 7 To restore the factory preset settings toggle the Startup Recall softkey to Off 8 4 Importing and Exporting Measurement Results for Evaluation The R S FSW provides various evaluation methods for the results of the performed measurements However you may want to evaluate the data with further external applications In this case you can export the measurement data to a standa...

Page 554: ...ently only I Q data can be imported and only by applications that process I Q data See the R S FSW I Q Analyzer User Manual for more information Export Opens a submenu to configure data export Export Trace to ASCII File Export Opens a file selection dialog box and saves the selected trace in ASCII format dat to the specified file and directory The results are output in the same order as they are d...

Page 555: ...ails see the description in the R S FSW I Q Analyzer User Manual Importing and Exporting I Q Data Note Secure user mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external...

Page 556: ...button 4 In the file selection dialog box select the storage location and file name for the export file 5 Select Save to close the dialog box and export the data to the file 8 4 3 How to Export a Peak List You can save the results of a marker peak list to an ASCII file 1 Press the MKR FUNCT key 2 Select the Marker Peak List softkey 3 Configure the peak search and list settings as described in chap...

Page 557: ...n n number of stored trace followed by the measured data in one or several columns depending on the measurement which are also separated by a sem icolon The results are output in the same order as they are displayed on the screen window by window trace by trace and table row by table row Generally the format of this ASCII file can be processed by spreadsheet calculation programs e g MS Excel Diffe...

Page 558: ...LIN Scaling of x axis linear LIN or logarithmic LOG y Axis LOG Scaling of y axis linear LIN or logarithmic LOG x Unit Hz Unit of x values Hz with span 0 s with span 0 dBm dB with statistics measurements y Unit dBm Unit of y values dB V A W depending on the selected unit with y axis LOG or with y axis LIN Data section for individual window Window 1 Frequency Sweep Window number and name Trace 1 Sel...

Page 559: ...of x axis linear LIN or logarithmic LOG Start 10000 Hz Stop 100000 Hz Start stop of the display range Unit Hz for span 0 s for span 0 dBm dB for statistics measurements Ref Level 30 dBm Reference level Level Offset 0 dB Level offset Ref Position 75 Position of reference level referred to diagram limits 0 lower edge y Axis LOG Scaling of y axis linear LIN or logarithmic LOG Level Range 100 dB Displ...

Page 560: ...rement point Frame 1 Next frame Timestamp 17 Mar 11 11 27 05 342 Timestamp of this frame 8 5 Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings In order to document the graphical results and the most important settings for the cur rently performed measurement you can create a hardcopy or screenshot of the current display Screenshots can either be printed or stored to a file Print and...

Page 561: ...d status bars Optionally comments and the date and time are included at the bottom margin of the printout All displayed items belonging to the software user interface e g softkeys or dialog boxes are not printed out Whether the output is sent to the printer or stored in a file or the clipboard depends on the selected device and the device settings If the output is stored to a file a file selection...

Page 562: ...ts the screenshot on the printer selected from the Name list Remote command HCOPy DEVice LANGuage device on page 1008 Print Date and Time Device Setup Activates deactivates the printout of the current date and time at the bottom of the screenshot Remote command HCOPy TDSTamp STATe device on page 1010 Print Logo Device Setup Activates deactivates the printout of the Rohde Schwarz company logo in th...

Page 563: ...e page orientation of the printout portrait or landscape printer only Remote command HCOPy PAGE ORIentation device on page 1010 Device Two different printout devices can be configured e g one for printing and one for stor age to a file When the Print Screen function is executed the selected device and its settings determine the behavior Remote command HCOPy DESTination device on page 1007 Colors O...

Page 564: ...o set up the print function to store a screenshot to a file select the required file format as the output medium To set up the print function to store a screenshot to the clipboard select Clip board as the output medium To set up the print function to print a screenshot on a printer select Printer as the output medium and an installed printer from the Name list 5 For printout select the page orien...

Page 565: ... Temperature check on page 566 During instrument start the installed hardware is checked against the current firmware version to ensure the hardware is supported If not an error message is displayed WRONG_FW and you are asked to update the firmware Until the firmware version is updated self alignment fails The correction data and characteristics required for the alignment are determined by compari...

Page 566: ...rect response If the position of the instrument has been changed and you cannot look straight on the screen If another person operates the instrument 9 2 Basics on Transducer Factors The transducer allows you to manipulate the trace at discrete trace points to correct the signal coming from an input device Transducers are often used to correct the fre quency response for antennas for example The t...

Page 567: ...main tained and can be changed When all transducers have been switched off the R S FSW returns to the unit that was used before a transducer was activated Configuration The R S FSW supports transducer lines with a maximum of 1001 data points Eight of the transducer lines stored in the instrument can be activated simultaneously The number of transducer lines stored in the instrument is only limited...

Page 568: ...lay settings are described in chapter 9 4 Display Settings on page 590 Reference Frequency Settings 568 Transducer Settings 571 Alignment Settings 576 System Configuration Settings 577 Service Functions 583 9 3 1 Reference Frequency Settings The reference frequency settings are defined in the Reference dialog box which is displayed when you press the SETUP key and then select Reference Reference F...

Page 569: ... following reference inputs are available Table 9 1 Available Reference Frequency Input Source Frequency Tuning Range Loop Band width Description Internal 10 MHz 1 100 Hz Internal reference signal or OCXO option R S FSW B4 External Reference 10 MHz 10 MHz 6 ppm 1 100 Hz External reference from REF INPUT 1 20 MHZ connector Fixed external 10 MHZ reference fre quency Good phase noise performance Exte...

Page 570: ... to the very narrow loop bandwidth unwanted noise or spurious components on the external reference input signal are strongly attenuated Fur thermore the loop requires about 30 seconds to reach a locked state During this locking process NO REF is displayed in the status bar 6 ppm The larger deviation allows the instrument to synchronize to less pre cise external reference input signals Remote comma...

Page 571: ...he default values for all input sources using the Preset Channel function 9 3 2 Transducer Settings Up to 8 transducer lines can be activated simultaneously in the R S FSW Many more can be stored on the instrument The transducer settings are defined in the Transducer dialog box which is displayed when you press the SETUP key and then select Transducer Transducers can also be defined when an option...

Page 572: ...er 9 3 2 2 Transducer Factors on page 574 For instructions on configuring and working with transducers see chapter 9 6 6 How to Configure the Transducer on page 604 Name 572 Unit 572 Compatibility 573 Activating Deactivating 573 Comment 573 Included Lines in Overview View Filter 573 Adjusting the Reference Level 573 Create New Line 573 Edit Line 573 Copy Line 573 Delete Line 574 Name The name of t...

Page 573: ...included in the overview The view can be restric ted to compatible lines only or include all lines found Whether a line is compatible or not is indicated in the Compatibility setting Adjusting the Reference Level Activates or deactivates the automatic adjustment of the reference level to the selected transducer factor Auto Activates the automatic adjustment The original dynamic range is restored b...

Page 574: ...transducer lines see chapter 9 6 6 How to Configure the Transducer on page 604 Name 574 Comment 575 Unit 575 X Axis Scaling 575 Data points 575 Insert Value 575 Delete Value 575 Shift x 575 Shift y 575 Save 576 Name Defines the transducer line name All names must be compatible with the Windows 7 conventions for file names The transducer data is stored under this name with a TDF extension in the tr...

Page 575: ...is defined by its position x axis and value y value The data points must comply with the following rules to ensure correct operation The frequencies for the data points must always be defined in ascending order Otherwise the entry will not be accepted and the an error message is displayed The frequencies of the data points may exceed the valid frequency range of the R S FSW since only the set freq...

Page 576: ...o store self alignment results before Secure User Mode is enabled see chap ter 3 1 7 Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode on page 37 If the currently stored self alignment results are not suitable you must perform a self alignment each time you switch on the R S FSW in secure user mode as the results are not stored permanently in this case Starting a Self alignment 576 Aborting the Self alig...

Page 577: ... the next self alignment process is started or the instrument is switched off Remote command CALibration RESult on page 1022 9 3 4 System Configuration Settings The system configuration information and settings are provided in the System Config uration dialog box which is displayed when you press the SETUP key and then select System Configuration Hardware Information 577 Information on Versions an...

Page 578: ... options in secure user mode Be sure to install any new options before Secure User Mode is enabled see chap ter 3 1 7 Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode on page 37 For restricted users in secure user mode this function is not available Expired option licenses If an option is about to expire a message box is displayed to inform you You can then use the Install Option function to enter a new...

Page 579: ...ption by XML Opens a file selection dialog box to install an additional option to the R S FSW using an XML file Enter or browse for the name of an XML file that contains the option key and press Select Only user accounts with administrator rights are able to install options 9 3 4 3 System Messages The system messages generated by the R S FSW are displayed in the System Mes sages tab of the System ...

Page 580: ...Ror LIST on page 1041 9 3 4 4 Firmware Updates During instrument start the installed hardware is checked against the current firmware version to ensure the hardware is supported If not an error message is displayed WRONG_FW and you are asked to update the firmware Until the firmware version is updated self alignment fails To see which components are not supported see the System Messages The firmwa...

Page 581: ... is enabled see chapter 3 1 7 Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode on page 37 For restricted users in secure user mode this function is not available The firmware can be updated in the Firmware Update tab of the System Configura tion dialog box Enter the name or browse for the firmware installation file and press the Install but ton 9 3 4 5 General Configuration Settings General system setti...

Page 582: ...Set COMPatible on page 1041 Out of range value behavior By default if you enter a value that is outside the valid range in an input field for a set ting a warning is displayed and the value is not accepted Alternatively entries below the minimum value can automatically be set to the minimum possible entry and entries above the maximum value set to the maximum possible entry This behavior avoids er...

Page 583: ...installation you are promp ted to change the passwords for all user accounts in order to improve system security To save the new password select Save The password dialog for the next user is dis played until you have been prompted to change the password all user accounts If you cancel the dialog without changing the password the password dialog for the next user is displayed until you have been pr...

Page 584: ...ating R S Support Information 584 Save Device Footprint 585 Creating R S Support Information Creates a zip file with important support information The zip file contains the sys tem configuration information device footprint the current eeprom data and a screenshot of the screen display This data is stored to the C R_S Instr user directory on the instrument The file name consists of the unique devi...

Page 585: ...rument to identify any defec tive modules The selftest settings and results are available in the Selftest tab of the Service dia log box Once the self test is started all modules are checked consecutively and the test result is displayed You can abort a running test In case of failure a short description of the failed test the defective module the associ ated value range and the corresponding test...

Page 586: ...perform service func tions on The calibration signal settings are available in the Calibration Signal tab of the Ser vice dialog box None 586 Calibration Frequency RF 587 Spectrum 587 Frequency 587 Calibration Frequency MW 587 Calibration Analog Baseband 587 Calibration Signal Type 587 None Uses the current RF signal at the input i e no calibration signal default Remote command DIAGnostic SERVice ...

Page 587: ...encies greater than 8 GHz for instrument models R S FSW13 26 43 50 67 only This function is used to calibrate the YIG filter on the microwave converter The microwave calibration signal is pulsed You can define whether the distance between input pulses is small or wide Remote command DIAGnostic SERVice INPut SELect on page 1024 DIAGnostic SERVice INPut MC DISTance on page 1023 Calibration Analog Ba...

Page 588: ...y be used after entering a password These functions are described in the instrument service manual The service functions are available in the Service Function tab of the Service dialog box Service Function 588 Numeric Mode 589 Send 589 Clear History 589 Password 589 Clear Results 589 Save Results 589 Result List 589 Service Function Selects the service function by its numeric code or textual name ...

Page 589: ...nt password Reset Password returns to the lowest least restrictive service level Clear Results Clears the result display for all previously performed service functions Remote command DIAGnostic SERVice SFUNction RESults DELete on page 1043 Save Results Opens a file selection dialog box to save the results of all previously performed service functions to a file Remote command DIAGnostic SERVice SFU...

Page 590: ...S FSW provide the current temperature for the CPUs and the motherboard which are indicated here Ventilation High temperatures in the R S FSW may occur when the fans fail The current speed and temperatures of the built in fans are displayed High temperatures or very slow fan speed may indicate a hardware problem 9 4 Display Settings Some general display settings are available regardless of the curr...

Page 591: ... 592 Setting the Date and Time 592 Date and Time Format 592 Display Power Save Function 592 Deactivating and Activating the Touchscreen The touchscreen function can be deactivated e g when the instrument is being used for demonstration purposes and tapping the screen should not provoke an action To reactivate the touchscreen simply press the SETUP key on the front panel The Display dialog box is o...

Page 592: ...ime display in the status bar Date and Time Format Switches the time and date display on the screen between US and German DE for mat Remote command DISPlay WINDow TIME FORMat on page 1031 Display Power Save Function The touchscreen can be set to a power save mode in which the display is temporarily switched off including the backlight This is useful during remote control for example or when a meas...

Page 593: ...g finding help printing screenshots or storing and loading files are not accessible at all without the toolbar Remote command DISPlay TBAR STATe on page 1030 Status Bar The status bar beneath the diagram indicates the global instrument settings the instru ment status and any irregularities during measurement or display Some of the information displayed in the status bar can be queried from the sta...

Page 594: ... Diagram Footer Annotation The diagram footer beneath the diagram contains information on the x axis of the dia gram display such as the current center frequency and span settings the displayed span per division and the number of sweep points Remote command DISPlay ANNotation FREQuency on page 1029 Date and Time The date and time display can be switched off independently of the status bar You can ...

Page 595: ...ft Front Panels on page 607 Remote command SYSTem DISPlay FPANel STATe on page 1031 Mini Front Panel If you require a front panel display but do not want to lose too much space for results in the display area a mini front panel is available The mini version displays only the main function hardkeys in a separate window in the display area This window can be closed automatically after pressing a key...

Page 596: ...orking from a remote PC and the Front Panel function is not active Remote command SYSTem DISPlay FPANel STATe on page 1031 9 4 3 Display Theme and Colors You can configure the used colors and styles of display elements on the screen These settings are available in the Theme Color tab of the Display dialog box For step by step instructions see chapter 9 6 7 How to Configure the Colors for Dis play ...

Page 597: ...ors and style used to display softkeys and other screen objects The default theme is BlueOcean Remote command DISPlay THEMe SELect on page 1033 Screen colors Two different color sets are provided by the instrument a third user defined set can be configured The default color schemes provide optimum visibility of all screen objects when regard ing the screen from above or below Default setting is De...

Page 598: ...in black Screen Colors Print Selects the current screen colors for the printout The background is always printed in white and the grid in black Screen Colors Hardcopy Selects the current screen colors without any changes for a hard copy User Defined Colors Selects the user defined color setting Remote command HCOPy CMAP item DEFault colors on page 1006 Showing Print Colors on Display Temporarily s...

Page 599: ...ment on page 1034 Predefined Colors Modifying User Defined Color Assignments Displays the available colors from the predefined color set that can be used for the selected object Remote command HCOPy CMAP item PDEFined on page 1007 Preview Modifying User Defined Color Assignments Indicates the currently selected color that will be used for the selected object Defining User specific Colors In additi...

Page 600: ...MAP item PDEFined on page 1033 9 5 External Monitor Settings You can connect an external monitor or projector to the DVI or DISPLAY PORT con nector on the instrument s rear panel see the R S FSW Getting Started manual Which display device is used by the instrument is configured in the Configure Monitor tab of the Display dialog box Screen resolution and format The touchscreen of the R S FSW is cal...

Page 601: ...dard Windows configuration dialog box to configure the display devices to be used 9 6 How to Configure the Basic Instrument Settings The following step by step instructions demonstrate how to configure the basic instru ment settings For details on individual functions and settings see chapter 9 3 Gen eral Instrument Settings on page 568 The remote commands required to perform these tasks are descr...

Page 602: ...strument modules have been checked successfully a message is dis played 9 6 2 How to Align the Instrument Operating temperature Before performing this functional test make sure that the instrument has reached its operating temperature for details refer to the data sheet To perform a self alignment 1 Press the SETUP key 2 Select the Alignment softkey 3 Select the Start Self alignment button 4 To ab...

Page 603: ...he Instrument Firmware 1 Download the update package from the Rohde Schwarz website and store it on a memory stick on the instrument or on a server network drive that can be accessed by the instrument 2 NOTICE Stop measurement The firmware update must not be performed during a running measurement If a measurement is running stop it by pressing the highlighted RUN CONT or RUN SINGLE key 3 Press the...

Page 604: ...figure a new transducer line on page 605 How to move the transducer line vertically or horizontally on page 606 How to find compatible transducer lines In the Transducer dialog box select the View filter option Show compatible All transducer lines stored on the instrument that are compatible to the current measurement settings are displayed in the overview How to activate and deactivate a transduc...

Page 605: ...in the overview and can be activated How to delete an existing transducer line 1 In the Transducer dialog box select the transducer line 2 Select the Delete button 3 Confirm the message The transducer line is deleted After the next sweep the originally measured val ues are displayed How to configure a new transducer line 1 In the Transducer dialog box select the New button The Edit Transducer dial...

Page 606: ...Thus a new transducer line can be easily generated based upon an existing transducer line which has been shifted 1 In the Line Config dialog box select the transducer line 2 Select the Edit button 3 In the Edit transducer Line dialog box select the Shift x or Shift y button and define the shift width 4 Save the shifted data points by selecting the Save button If activated the trace is recalculated...

Page 607: ...ectrum Tint red is represented by 0 and blue by 100 Enter an ARGB value in hexadecimal format 6 Select the next object to which you want to assign a color from the Selected Object list and assign a color as described Repeat these steps until all objects you want to configure have been assigned a color 7 Select OK to close the dialog box and apply the colors to the assigned objects 9 6 8 How to Wor...

Page 608: ...e the Auto close option You can close the window manually by selecting Close Panel or the key combination ALT M be aware of the keyboard language defined in the operating system To display the soft front panel or mini front panel 1 Press the SETUP key and select the Display softkey 2 Select the Displayed Items tab 3 Select Front Panel On or Mini Front Panel On To activate or deactivate the front p...

Page 609: ...a PC via the GPIB interface How to configure the remote control interfaces is described in chapter 10 5 How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control on page 657 Remote Control Basics 609 GPIB Languages 645 The IECWIN Tool 647 Network and Remote Control Settings 648 How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control 657 10 1 Remote Control Basics Basic information on operating an instrument via remote contro...

Page 610: ...located on the front and rear panel of the instrument For a description of the interface refer to 10 1 1 3 USB Interface VISA is a standardized software interface library providing input and output functions to communicate with instruments A VISA installation on the controller is a prerequisite for remote control using the indicated interfaces see also chapter 10 1 3 VISA Libra ries on page 614 Wi...

Page 611: ...ddress port SOCKET where TCPIP designates the network protocol used host address is the IP address or host name of the device LAN device name defines the protocol and the instance number of a sub instru ment inst0 selects the VXI 11 protocol default hislip0 selects the newer HiSLIP protocol INSTR indicates the instrument resource class optional port determines the used port number SOCKET indicates...

Page 612: ...ngle IANA registered port 4880 which simplifies the configuration of fire walls Supports simultaneous access of multiple users by providing versatile locking mechanisms Usable for IPv6 or IPv4 networks Note that HiSLIP data is sent to the device using the fire and forget method with immediate return as opposed to VXI 11 where each operation is blocked until a VXI 11 device handshake returns Thus a...

Page 613: ...n page 664 You can set the GPIB address and the ID response string The GPIB language is set as SCPI by default and cannot be changed for the R S FSW Notes and Conditions In connection with the GPIB interface note the following Up to 15 instruments can be connected The total cable length is restricted to a maximum of 15 m or 2 m times the number of devices whichever is less the cable lenth between ...

Page 614: ...A tutorial on SCPI and IEEE 488 2 from John M Pieper R S order number 0002 3536 00 offers detailed informa tion on concepts and definitions of SCPI Tables provide a fast overview of the bit assignment in the status registers The tables are supplemented by a comprehensive description of the status registers 10 1 3 VISA Libraries VISA is a standardized software interface library providing input and ...

Page 615: ...mmands are subdivided according to two criteria According to the effect they have on the instrument Setting commands cause instrument settings such as a reset of the instru ment or setting the frequency Queries cause data to be provided for remote control e g for identification of the instrument or polling a parameter value Queries are formed by directly appending a question mark to the command he...

Page 616: ...irectly to the header The commands can be either device specific or device independent common com mands Common and device specific commands differ in their syntax 10 1 5 1 Syntax for Common Commands Common device independent commands consist of a header preceded by an aster isk and possibly one or more parameters Examples RST RESET Resets the instrument ESE EVENT STATUS ENABLE Sets the bits of the...

Page 617: ... numeric value SENSe LIST FREQuency numeric_value numeric_value Long and short form The mnemonics feature a long form and a short form The short form is marked by upper case letters the long form corresponds to the complete word Either the short form or the long form can be entered other abbreviations are not permitted Example HCOPy DEVice COLor ON is equivalent to HCOP DEV COL ON Case insensitivi...

Page 618: ...The instrument must recognize the long command to comply with the SCPI standard Some commands are considerably shortened by these optional mnemonics Example Definition HCOPy IMMediate Command HCOP IMM is equivalent to HCOP Optional mnemonics with numeric suffixes Do not omit an optional mnemonic if it includes a numeric suffix that is relevant for the effect of the command Example Definition DISPl...

Page 619: ...ENSE BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution numeric_value The two following commands with identical meaning can be created SENS BAND RES 1 SENS BWID RES 1 Mnemonics in square brackets are optional and may be inserted into the header or omitted Example HCOPy IMMediate HCOP IMM is equivalent to HCOP Parameters in curly brackets are optional and can be inserted once or several times or omitted Example SENSe LIS...

Page 620: ...ties the unit can be entered Allowed unit prefixes are G giga MA mega MOHM MHZ K kilo M milli U micro N nano If the unit is missing the basic unit is used Example SENSe FREQ STOP 1 5GHz SENSe FREQ STOP 1 5E9 Some settings allow relative values to be stated in percent According to SCPI this unit is represented by the PCT string Example HCOP PAGE SCAL 90PCT Special numeric values The texts listed be...

Page 621: ... must be entered follow ing the quotation mark Example SENSe LIST FREQ MAXimum Returns the maximum numeric value as a result Boolean Parameters Boolean parameters represent two states The ON state logically true is represen ted by ON or a numeric value 1 The OFF state logically untrue is represented by OFF or the numeric value 0 The numeric values are provided as the response for a query Example S...

Page 622: ...when the length of the transmission is not known or if speed or other considerations prevent segmentation of the data into blocks of definite length 10 1 5 4 Overview of Syntax Elements The following table provides an overview of the syntax elements The colon separates the mnemonics of a command In a command line the separating semico lon marks the uppermost command level The semicolon separates t...

Page 623: ...OP IMM This command line contains two commands Both commands are part of the HCOP command system i e they have one level in common When abbreviating the command line the second command begins with the level below HCOP The colon after the semicolon is omitted The abbreviated form of the command line reads as follows HCOP ITEM ALL IMM A new command line always begins with the complete path Example H...

Page 624: ...o other tasks while being executed If overlapping commands do have to be executed in a defined order e g in order to avoid wrong measurement results they must be serviced sequentially This is called synchronization between the controller and the instrument Setting commands within one command line even though they may be implemented as sequential commands are not necessarily serviced in the order i...

Page 625: ...ynchronization using OPC OPC and WAI Com mand Action Programming the controller OPC Sets the Operation Complete bit in the ESR after all previous commands have been exe cuted Setting bit 0 in the ESE Setting bit 5 in the SRE Waiting for service request SRQ OPC Stops command processing until 1 is returned This is only the case after the Oper ation Complete bit has been set in the ESR This bit indic...

Page 626: ...sing the sequence OPC ESR A return value LSB of 1 indicates that the overlapped command has finished OPC with short timeout 1 Send the overlapped command without OPC OPC or WAI 2 Poll the operation complete state periodically by means of a timer using the sequence short timeout OPC 3 A return value LSB of 1 indicates that the overlapped command has finished In case of a timeout the operation is on...

Page 627: ...n the error queue Both can be queried via GPIB bus or LAN interface STATus commands see chapter 11 11 Using the Status Register on page 1044 Hierarchy of Status Registers 627 Structure of a SCPI Status Register 629 Contents of the Status Registers 630 Application of the Status Reporting System 641 Reset Values of the Status Reporting System 643 10 1 7 1 Hierarchy of Status Registers As shown in th...

Page 628: ... 7 6 5 4 3 0 1 2 STAT QUES FREQuency not used OVEN COLD LO UNLocked External REFerence STAT QUES LIMit n LIMit 1 FAIL LIMit 2 FAIL LIMit 3 FAIL LIMit 4 FAIL LIMit 5 FAIL LIMit 6 FAIL LIMit 7 FAIL LIMit 8 FAIL DIQ logic AND logic OR of all bits TEMPerature 15 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 0 1 2 not used STAT QUES TEMPerature Frontend temp error INPut_overload Range completed SWEeping MEASuring Waiting for TRIGger ...

Page 629: ...g to SCPI By analogy the ESE can be used as the ENABle part of the ESR 10 1 7 2 Structure of a SCPI Status Register Each standard SCPI register consists of 5 parts Each part has a width of 16 bits and has different functions The individual bits are independent of each other i e each hardware status is assigned a bit number which is valid for all five parts Bit 15 the most significant bit is set to...

Page 630: ...ding it is the memory of the condition part It only indicates events passed on by the transition filters It is permanently updated by the instrument This part can only be read by the user Reading the register clears it This part is often equated with the entire register ENABle The ENABle part determines whether the associated EVENt bit contributes to the sum bit see below Each bit of the EVENt par...

Page 631: ... Register 637 STATus QUEStionable LIMit Register 638 STATus QUEStionable LMARgin Register 639 STATus QUEStionable POWer Register 639 STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature Register 640 STATus QUEStionable TIMe Register 640 Status Byte STB and Service Request Enable Register SRE The STatus Byte STB is already defined in IEEE 488 2 It provides a rough over view of the instrument status by collecting the pi...

Page 632: ...r status summary bit The bit is set if the instrument triggers a service request This is the case if one of the other bits of this registers is set together with its mask bit in the service request enable register SRE 7 STATus OPERation status register summary bit The bit is set if an EVENt bit is set in the OPERation status register and the associated ENABle bit is set to 1 A set bit indicates th...

Page 633: ...ge with a number between 200 and 300 which denotes the error in greater detail is entered into the error queue 5 Command Error This bit is set if a command is received which is undefined or syntactically incorrect An error message with a number between 100 and 200 which denotes the error in greater detail is entered into the error queue 6 User Request This bit is set when the instrument is switche...

Page 634: ...nge in the sweep list has been completed if Stop after Range has been activated 11 14 Not used 15 This bit is always 0 STATus QUEStionable Register The STATus QUEStionable register contains information on instrument states that do not meet the specifications The STAT QUES SYNC register is used by the applications and is thus described in the individual applications User Manuals You can read out th...

Page 635: ... a limit value is violated in any of the active channels in any window The STATus QUEStionable LIMit Register provides more information on the error type 10 LMARgin device specific This bit is set if a margin is violated in any of the active channels in any window The STATus QUEStionable LMARgin Register provides more information on the error type 11 SYNC device specific This bit is set if the R S...

Page 636: ... in the upper 1st alternate channel 3 ALT1 LOWer FAIL This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the lower 1st alternate channel 4 ALT2 UPPer FAIL This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the upper 2nd alternate channel 5 ALT2 LOWer FAIL This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in the lower 2nd alternate channel 6 ALT3 11 LOWer UPPer FAIL This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in one of the ...

Page 637: ... 10 Meaning of the bits used in the STATus QUEStionable EXTended INFO register Bit No Meaning 0 MESSage This bit is set if event or state has occurred that may lead to an error during further operation 1 INFO This bit is set if an informational status message is available for the application 2 WARNing This bit is set if an irregular situation occurs during measurement e g the settings no longer ma...

Page 638: ...t accurate 9 to 14 Not used 15 This bit is always 0 STATus QUEStionable LIMit Register The STATus QUEStionable LIMit register contains information about the results of a limit check when you are working with limit lines A separate LIMit register exists for each active channel and for each window You can read out the register with STATus QUEStionable LIMit n CONDition or STATus QUEStionable LIMit n...

Page 639: ... LMARgin 2 FAIL This bit is set if limit margin 2 is violated 2 LMARgin 3 FAIL This bit is set if limit margin 3 is violated 3 LMARgin 4 FAIL This bit is set if limit margin 4 is violated 4 LMARgin 5 FAIL This bit is set if limit margin 5 is violated 5 LMARgin 6 FAIL This bit is set if limit margin 6 is violated 6 LMARgin 7 FAIL This bit is set if limit margin 7 is violated 7 LMARgin 8 FAIL This b...

Page 640: ... 314 or INPut ATTenuation PROTection RESet on page 864 The R S FSW displays the keyword INPUT OVLD 4 to 14 Unused 15 This bit is always 0 STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature Register The STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature register contains information about possible temperature deviations that may occur during operation of the R S FSW A separate temperature register exists for each active channel You can...

Page 641: ...ices Query of a specific instrument status by means of commands Query of the error queue Service Request Under certain circumstances the instrument can send a service request SRQ to the controller Usually this service request initiates an interrupt at the controller to which the control program can react appropriately As evident from figure 10 1 an SRQ is always initiated if one or several of bits...

Page 642: ...ter which determines the conditions under which an SRQ is generated there is a Parallel Poll Enable register PPE which is ANDed with the STB bit by bit considering bit 6 as well This register is ANDed with the STB bit by bit considering bit 6 as well The results are ORed the result is possibly inverted and then sent as a response to the parallel poll of the controller The result can also be querie...

Page 643: ... call of SYSTem ERRor NEXT provides one entry from the error queue If no error messages are stored there any more the instrument responds with 0 No error The error queue should be queried after every SRQ in the controller program as the entries describe the cause of an error more precisely than the status registers Espe cially in the test phase of a controller program the error queue should be que...

Page 644: ...gned for maximum possible operating convenience In con trast the priority of remote control is the predictability of the instrument status Thus when a command attempts to define incompatible settings the command is ignored and the instrument status remains unchanged i e other settings are not automatically adapted Therefore control programs should always define an initial instrument status e g usi...

Page 645: ...k Remote GPIB tab Language Via the GPIB interface using the SYSTem LANGuage on page 1050 command In order to emulate device models that are not part of the selection list of the GPIB Language setting you can modify the identification string received in response to the ID command Identification String setting Thus any device model whose command set is compatible with one of the supported device mod...

Page 646: ...s are adapted to the selected instrument model When you switch between remote control languages the following settings or changes are made SCPI The instrument performs a PRESET 8566A B 8568A B 8594E FSEA FSEB FSEM FSEK The instrument performs a PRESET The following instrument settings are changed Table 10 18 Instrument settings for emulation of 8566A B 8568A B 8594E FSEA FSEB FSEM FSEK instruments...

Page 647: ... future version without notice IECWIN offers the following features Connection to instrument via several interfaces protocols GPIB VISA named pipe if IECWIN is run on the instrument itself RSIB Interactive command entry Browsing available commands on the instrument Error checking following every command Execution of command scripts Storing binary data to a file Reading binary data from a file Gene...

Page 648: ...alog box The IECWIN offers an online help with extensive information on how to work with the tool 10 4 Network and Remote Control Settings The network and remote control settings are defined in the Network Remote dialog box which is displayed when you press the SETUP key and then select Network Remote Network settings in secure user mode Be sure to store all network settings before Secure User Mod...

Page 649: ...s major effects in a network For details see chapter 10 5 How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control on page 657 Computer Name 649 IP Address 649 Subnet Mask 650 DHCP 650 Network Configuration 650 Computer Name Each instrument is delivered with an assigned computer name but this name can be changed The naming conventions of Windows apply If too many characters and or numbers are entered an error m...

Page 650: ... or two numbers are allowed in a block as an example see the preinstalled address DHCP Switches between DHCP server available On or not available Off If a DHCP server is available in the network the IP address and subnet mask of the instrument are obtained automatically from the DHCP server Network Configuration Opens the standard Windows Network Configuration dialog box for further configura tion...

Page 651: ...splay Update Defines whether the instrument display is updated or switched off when changing from manual operation to remote control Remote command SYSTem DISPlay UPDate on page 1036 GPIB Terminator Changes the GPIB receive terminator According to the standard the terminator in ASCII is LF and or EOI For binary data transfers e g trace data from the control computer to the instrument the binary co...

Page 652: ...R S FSW can emulate the GPIB interface of other signal and spectrum analyzers e g in order to use existing control applications Compatibility with former R S signal and spectrum analyzers As a rule the R S FSW supports most commands from previous R S signal and spectrum analyzers such as the FSQ FSP FSU or FSV However the default values in particular the number of sweep points or particular bandwi...

Page 653: ... Emulating previous R S signal and spectrum analyzers As of firmware version 1 60 this function is also used to emulate previous R S signal and spectrum ana lyzers As a rule the R S FSW supports most commands from previous R S signal and spectrum analyzers such as the FSQ FSP FSU or FSV However the default values in particular the number of sweep points or particular bandwidths may vary Therefore ...

Page 654: ... chapter 11 13 2 Reference GPIB Commands of Emulated HP Models on page 1053 If the repeated sweep is OFF the marker is set without sweeping before Note In single sweep mode switch off this setting before you set the marker via the E1 and MKPK HI commands in order to avoid sweeping again This setting is only available if a HP language is selected see Language on page 653 Remote command SYSTem RSW o...

Page 655: ...ision STRing on page 1052 Resetting the Factory Revision Resets the response to the REV query for the revision number to the factory default HP emulation only see Language on page 653 Remote command SYSTem REVision FACTory on page 1052 10 4 4 LXI Settings On the R S FSW the LXI Class C functionality is already installed and enabled thus the instrument can be accessed via any web browser e g the Mi...

Page 656: ...tem see also Computer Name on page 649 MAC address Media Access Control address MAC address a unique identifier for the network card in the R S FSW IP address IP address of the R S FSW as defined in the operating system see also IP Address on page 649 ICMP Indicates whether the ping responder is active or not VXI 11 Dis covery If enabled connected devices are detected automatically using the VXI 1...

Page 657: ...Network and Remote Control Risk of network failure Before connecting the instrument to the network or configuring the network consult your network administrator Errors may affect the entire network Remote operation Remote operation of the instrument from a connected computer is possible using SCPI commands see chapter 10 1 2 SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instru ments on page 614 Sending ...

Page 658: ...firewall configuration see the R S White Paper Malware Protection available at http www rohde schwarz com appnote 1EF73 and the Win dows 7 help system 10 5 1 1 How to Connect the Instrument to the Network There are two methods to establish a LAN connection to the instrument A non dedicated network Ethernet connection from the instrument to an existing network made with an ordinary RJ 45 network ca...

Page 659: ...on errors can affect the entire network If your network does not support DHCP or if you choose to disable dynamic TCP IP configuration you must assign valid address information before connecting the instrument to the LAN Contact your network administrator to obtain a valid IP address Assigning the IP address on the R S FSW 1 Press the SETUP key 2 Press the Network Remote softkey 3 Select the Netwo...

Page 660: ...e Yes button to restart the instrument Using a DNS server to determine the IP address If a DNS server is configured on the R S FSW the server can determine the current IP address for the connection using the permanent computer name 1 Obtain the name of your DNS domain and the IP addresses of the DNS and WINS servers on your network see chapter 10 5 1 3 How to Change the Instrument Name on page 661...

Page 661: ...ch instrument is delivered with an assigned computer name but this name can be changed To change the computer name 1 Press the SETUP key and then the Network Remote softkey The current Computer Name is displayed in the Network tab 2 Enter the new computer name and close the dialog box The configuration is saved and you are prompted to restart the instrument 3 Confirm the displayed message Yes butt...

Page 662: ...the LXI logo blinks The Device Indicator setting is not password protected The most important control elements in the navigation pane of the browser interface are the following LAN Configuration opens the menu with configuration pages Status displays information about the LXI status of the instrument Help Glossary opens a document with a glossary of terms related to the LXI standard LAN Configurat...

Page 663: ... duplex mode settings In general the Auto Detect mode is sufficient ICMP Ping must be enabled to use the ping utility VXI 11 is the protocol that is used to detect the instrument in the LAN According to the standard LXI devices must use VXI 11 to provide a detection mechanism other additional detection mechanisms are permitted mDNS and DNS SD are two additional protocols Multicast DNS and DNS Serv...

Page 664: ...sword proceed as described in chapter 10 5 3 3 How to Activate or Deactivate the Automatic Login Mechanism on page 666 10 5 3 How to Log on to the Network Windows 7 requires that users identify themselves by entering a user name and pass word in a login window You can set up two types of user accounts either an adminis trator account with unrestricted access to the computer domain or a standard us...

Page 665: ...t Give other users access to this computer and then Add The Add New User dialog box is displayed 4 Enter the name of the new user in the text field and select Next 5 Define the level of access you want to allow the new user Select Standard to create an account with limited rights Select Administrator to create an account with administrator rights Note Full firmware functionality requires administr...

Page 666: ...sword before the firmware is started Reactivating the automatic login mechanism 1 In the Start menu select Run The Run dialog box is displayed 2 Enter the command C R_S INSTR USER AUTOLOGIN REG 3 Press the ENTER key to confirm The automatic login mechanism is reactivated It will be applied the next time the instrument is switched on 10 5 4 How to Share Directories only with Microsoft Networks Shar...

Page 667: ... Remote Desktop provides access to all of the applications files and net work resources of the instrument Thus remote operation of the R S FSW is possible With Windows 7 Remote Desktop Client is part of the operating system For other ver sions of Windows Microsoft offers the Remote Desktop Client as an add on This section provides basic instructions on setting up the Remote Desktop for the R S FSW...

Page 668: ...esktop option 6 Define which users are to be given access to the R S FSW via Remote Desktop Note The user account under which configuration is carried out is automatically enabled for Remote Desktop a Select the Select Users button b Select the users or create new user accounts as described in chapter 10 5 3 1 How to Create Users on page 665 c Select OK to confirm the settings 7 The R S FSW is now...

Page 669: ...with a list of users and the user group they are assigned to 4 Give existing users the right to access the R S FSW via Remote Desktop a Select the user from the list and then select the Properties button b As the level of access you want to allow the user select Other then select Remote Desktop Users from the dropdown list c Select the Finish button The user is added to the Remote Desktop Users Gr...

Page 670: ...b Select OK to confirm the action Note Users with administrator rights retain their access rights via Remote Desktop even when they have been removed from the Remote Desktop Users Group 7 Select OK to close the dialog box 10 5 5 3 How to Configure the Controller Remote Desktop Client With Windows 7 Remote Desktop Client is part of the operating system and can be accessed via Start Programs Accesso...

Page 671: ...ctivated 5 To improve the performance you can deactivate the Desktop background Show window contents while dragging and Menu and window animation options 6 Open the Local Resources tab to enable printers local drives and serial interfa ces 7 If you will need to access drives of the controller from the R S FSW e g in order to store settings or to copy files from the controller to the R S FSW activa...

Page 672: ...eral tab 2 In the Computer field enter the IP address of the R S FSW In the User name field enter instrument to log in as an administrator or Normal User to log in as a standard user In the Password field enter 894129 3 To save the connection configuration for later use a Select the Save As button The Save As dialog box is displayed b Enter the name for the connection information RDP 4 To load an ...

Page 673: ...e 607 8 To deactivate or activate the Softfrontpanel press the F6 key After the connection is established the R S FSW screen is displayed in the Remote Desktop application window The Windows Start menu can be made available by expanding the Remote Desktop window to full size During the connection with the controller the login entry is displayed on the R S FSW screen To terminate Remote Desktop con...

Page 674: ...art a Remote Control Session from a PC When you switch on the instrument it is always in manual operation state local state and can be operated via the front panel To start remote control 1 Send an addressed command GTR Go to Remote from a controller to the instru ment The instrument is switched to remote control remote state Operation via the front panel is disabled Only the Local softkey is disp...

Page 675: ...activate the REN line of the remote control interface If the instrument is operated exclusively in remote control it is recommended that you switch on the power save mode for the display For more details on this mode refer to the Overview 10 5 7 How to Return to Manual Operation Before you switch back to manual operation all remote command processing must be completed Otherwise the instrument will...

Page 676: ...mmon Commands 677 Selecting the Operating Mode and Application 682 Configuring and Performing Measurements 692 Configuring the Result Display 821 Setting Basic Measurement Parameters 830 Analyzing Measurements Basics 907 Managing Settings and Results 990 Configuring the R S FSW 1018 Using the Status Register 1044 Commands for Remote Instrument Operation 1048 Emulating Other Instruments Commands 10...

Page 677: ...unit This is the unit used for numeric values if no other unit is provided with the parame ter Manual operation If the result of a remote command can also be achieved in manual operation a link to the description is inserted 11 2 Common Suffixes In the Spectrum application the following common suffixes are used in remote com mands Suffix Value range Description ch 1 18 TX channel 1 11 ALT channel ...

Page 678: ...ation See Starting a Self alignment on page 576 CLS Clear status Sets the status byte STB the standard event register ESR and the EVENt part of the QUEStionable and the OPERation registers to zero The command does not alter the mask and transition parts of the registers It clears the output buffer Usage Setting only ESE Value Event status enable Sets the event status enable register to the specifi...

Page 679: ...651 IST Individual status query Returns the contents of the IST flag in decimal form The IST flag is the status bit which is sent during a parallel poll Return values ISTflag 0 1 Usage Query only OPC Operation complete Sets bit 0 in the event status register when all preceding commands have been execu ted This bit can be used to initiate a service request The query form writes a 1 into the output ...

Page 680: ... to which remote control is returned after termination of the triggered action Setting parameters Address Range 0 to 30 Usage Setting only PRE Value Parallel poll register enable Sets parallel poll enable register to the indicated value The query returns the contents of the parallel poll enable register in decimal form Parameters Value Range 0 to 255 PSC Action Power on status clear Determines whe...

Page 681: ...e request enable Sets the service request enable register to the indicated value This command deter mines under which conditions a service request is triggered Parameters Contents Contents of the service request enable register in decimal form Bit 6 MSS mask bit is always 0 Range 0 to 255 STB Status byte query Reads the contents of the status byte in decimal form Usage Query only TRG Trigger Trigg...

Page 682: ...mode or the application and to configure a Sequencer in a remote environment The tasks for manual operation are described in chapter 4 Applications and Operating Modes on page 96 Selecting the Mode and Applications 682 Performing a Sequence of Measurements 687 Programming Example Performing a Sequence of Measurements 690 11 4 1 Selecting the Mode and Applications DISPlay ATAB 682 INSTrument CREate...

Page 683: ...s the channel named Spectrum and creates a new measurement channel named Spectrum 2 Usage Event Manual operation See Duplicate Current Channel on page 105 INSTrument CREate NEW ChannelType ChannelName This command adds an additional measurement channel The number of measure ment channels you can configure at the same time depends on available memory See also INSTrument SELect on page 686 INSTrumen...

Page 684: ... IQAnalyzer Manual operation See Replace Current Channel on page 105 INSTrument DELete ChannelName This command deletes a measurement channel If you delete the last measurement channel the default Spectrum channel is activated Parameters ChannelName String containing the name of the channel you want to delete A measurement channel must exist in order to be able delete it Example INST DEL Spectrum4...

Page 685: ...t Analysis R S FSW K60 TA Transient Analysis VSA R S FSW K70 DDEM VSA 3GPP FDD BTS R S FSW K72 BWCD 3G FDD BTS 3GPP FDD UE R S FSW K73 MWCD 3G FDD UE TD SCDMA BTS R S FSW K76 BTDS TD SCDMA BTS TD SCDMA UE R S FSW K77 MTDS TD SCDMA UE cdma2000 BTS R S FSW K82 BC2K CDMA2000 BTS cdma2000 MS R S FSW K83 MC2K CDMA2000 MS 1xEV DO BTS R S FSW K84 BDO 1xEV DO BTS 1xEV DO MS R S FSW K85 MDO 1xEV DO MS WLAN...

Page 686: ...FSW K160R is instal led RST SAN Example INST MODE MSR Switches to MSRA mode Usage SCPI confirmed INSTrument REName ChannelName1 ChannelName2 This command renames a measurement channel Parameters ChannelName1 String containing the name of the channel you want to rename ChannelName2 String containing the new channel name Note that you can not assign an existing channel name to a new channel this wil...

Page 687: ...dulation on page 100 See cdma2000 BTS on page 100 See cdma2000 MS on page 100 See Multi Carrier Group Delay on page 100 See GSM on page 100 See I Q Analyzer on page 101 See LTE on page 101 See Noise Figure on page 101 See Phase Noise on page 101 See Pulse Measurements on page 101 See Realtime Spectrum on page 101 See TD SCDMA BTS on page 102 See TD SCDMA UE on page 102 See Transient Analysis on pa...

Page 688: ...ode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements Usage Event Manual operation See Sequencer State on page 108 INITiate SEQuencer MODE Mode This command selects the way the R S FSW application performs measurements sequentially Before this command can be executed the Sequencer must be activated see SYSTem SEQuencer on page 689 A detailed programm...

Page 689: ...ode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements Manual operation See Sequencer Mode on page 108 SYSTem SEQuencer State This command turns the Sequencer on and off The Sequencer must be active before any other Sequencer commands INIT SEQ are executed otherwise an error will occur A detailed programming example is provided in chapter 11 4 3 Progr...

Page 690: ...strument and first channel RST Activate new IQ channel INSTrument CREate NEW IQ IQ 1 Set sweep count for new IQ channel SENS SWEEP COUNT 6 Change trace modes for IQ channel DISP TRAC1 MODE BLANK DISP TRAC2 MODE MAXH DISP TRAC3 MODE MINH Switch to single sweep mode INIT CONT OFF switch back to first default analyzer channel INST SEL Spectrum WAI Switch into SEM SENSe SWEep MODE ESPectrum Load Sem s...

Page 691: ... MARK Y Activate Multiview DISPlay ATAB ON Performing a sequence of measurements with the Sequencer Activate Sequencer SYSTem SEQuencer ON Start sweep in Sequencer INITiate SEQuencer IMMediate OPC Switch into first IQ channel to get results INST SEL IQ 1 WAI CALCulate MARKer MAXimum CALC MARK Y Change sweep time in IQ SENS SWE TIME 300us Switch to single Sequencer mode INITiate SEQuencer MODE SING...

Page 692: ...suring the Occupied Bandwidth 727 Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask 729 Measuring Spurious Emissions 765 Analyzing Statistics APD CCDF 778 Measuring the Time Domain Power 787 Measuring the Harmonic Distortion 795 Measuring the Third Order Intercept Point 799 Measuring the AM Modulation Depth 801 Remote Commands for EMI Measurements 803 List Evaluations 811 Measuring the Pulse Power 816 11 5 1 P...

Page 693: ... the measurement To do so send a Device Clear command from the control instrument to the R S FSW on a parallel channel to clear all currently active remote channels Depend ing on the used interface and protocol send the following commands Visa viClear GPIB ibclr RSIB RSDLLibclr Now you can send the ABORt command on the remote channel performing the mea surement Example ABOR INIT IMM Aborts the cur...

Page 694: ...it is not recommended that you use continuous sweep mode in remote control as results like trace data or markers are only valid after a single sweep end synchronization For details on synchronization see chapter 10 1 6 Command Sequence and Synchro nization on page 624 If the sweep mode is changed for a measurement channel while the Sequencer is active see INITiate SEQuencer IMMediate on page 688 t...

Page 695: ...urement and waits for the end of the 20 sweeps Manual operation See Frequency Sweep on page 111 See Zero Span on page 112 See Single Sweep RUN SINGLE on page 414 SENSe SWEep COUNt CURRent This query returns the current number of started sweeps or measurements This com mand is only available if a sweep count value is defined and the instrument is in single sweep mode Example SWE COUNt 64 Sets sweep...

Page 696: ...ce and compared with the previous power value using a maximum algorithm Manual operation See Power Mode on page 154 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer sb RESult Measurement This command queries the results of power measurements To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for si...

Page 697: ...ns the power in the current unit linear scaling returns the power in W CN Carrier to noise measurements Returns the C N ratio in dB CN0 Carrier to noise measurements Returns the C N ratio referenced to a 1 Hz bandwidth in dBm Hz CPOWer Channel power measurements Returns the channel power The unit of the return values depends on the scaling of the y axis logarithmic scaling returns the power in the...

Page 698: ...t with a single carrier The R S FSW performs the measurement on the trace selected with SENSe POWer TRACe OBANdwidth OBWidth Occupied bandwidth measurement The R S FSW performs the measurement on the trace that marker 1 is positioned on CN Carrier to noise ratio measurement CN0 Carrier to noise ratio measurement referenced to 1 Hz band width Manual operation See Ch Power ACLR on page 112 See C N C...

Page 699: ... See Adjust Settings on page 192 SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet RLEVel This command determines the ideal reference level for the current measurement This automatic routine makes sure that the that the signal power level does not over load the R S FSW or limit the dynamic range by too small a S N ratio To determine the best reference level the R S FSW aborts current measurements and performs a series ...

Page 700: ...rations for ACLR measure ments CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer PRESet 700 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer STANdard CATalog 701 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer STANdard DELete 701 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer STANdard SAVE 701 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer PRESet Standard This command loads a measurement configuration The measurement configuration for power measurements con...

Page 701: ...is command saves the current ACLR measurement configuration as a new ACLR standard The measurement configuration for power measurements consists of weighting filter channel bandwidth and spacing resolution and video bandwidth detector and sweep time Parameters Standard String containing the file name The file format is xml Manual operation See User Defined Standards on page 150 11 5 3 2 Configurin...

Page 702: ... are available for fast ACLR measurements Parameters Bandwidth Range 100 Hz to 1000 MHz RST 14 kHz Manual operation See Channel Bandwidths on page 156 See Adjacent Channel Bandwidths on page 169 SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth ALTernate ch Bandwidth This command defines the channel bandwidth of the alternate channels If you set the channel bandwidth for the first alternate channel the R S FS...

Page 703: ... a name for an alternate channel For MSR ACLR measurements the channel names cannot be defined manually In this case this command is for query only Parameters Name String containing the name of the channel RST ALT 1 11 Manual operation See Channel Names on page 158 SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME CHANnel ch Name This command defines a name for a transmission channel Parameters Name String containing the...

Page 704: ...and works hierarchically to set a distance from the transmission channel to the 2nd and 3rd alternate channel you have to define a spacing for the 2nd alternate channel first Parameters Spacing Range 100 Hz to 2000 MHz RST 40 kHz ALT1 60 kHz ALT2 80 kHz ALT3 Manual operation See Channel Spacings on page 156 See Adjacent Channel Spacings on page 169 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing CHANnel ch Spacing T...

Page 705: ...LTer STATe CHANnel ch 706 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ACHannel Alpha This command defines the roll off factor for the adjacent channel weighting filter Parameters Alpha Roll off factor Range 0 to 1 RST 0 22 Manual operation See Weighting Filters on page 158 See Weighting Filters on page 170 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ALL Value This command defines the alpha value for the weighting fil...

Page 706: ...ters on page 158 See Weighting Filters on page 170 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe ALL State This command turns the weighting filters for all channels on and off Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe ALTernate ch State This command turns the weighting filter for an alternate channel on and off Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Weighting Filters on p...

Page 707: ...ference channel for relative measurements You need at least one channel for the command to work Parameters RefChannel MINimum Transmission channel with the lowest power MAXimum Transmission channel with the highest power LHIGhest Lowest transmission channel for lower adjacent channels and highest transmission channel for upper adjacent channels Example POW ACH REF TXCH AUTO MAX Selects the channel...

Page 708: ... CALCulate LIMit ACPower ALTernate ch RESult 711 CALCulate LIMit ACPower ALTernate ch RELative STATe 711 CALCulate LIMit ACPower STATe 711 CALCulate LIMit ACPower ACHannel ABSolute LowerLimit UpperLimit This command defines the absolute limit of the adjacent channels If you have defined an absolute limit as well as a relative limit the R S FSW uses the lower value for the limit check Parameters Lo...

Page 709: ...ng on page 170 CALCulate LIMit ACPower ACHannel RESult This command queries the state of the limit check for the adjacent channels in an ACLR measurement To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also INITiate CONTinuous on page 694 Return values Lowe...

Page 710: ...pper alternate channel Range 200 dBm to 200 dBm RST 200 dBm Manual operation See Limit Checking on page 157 See Limit Checking on page 170 CALCulate LIMit ACPower ALTernate ch ABSolute STATe State This command turns the absolute limit check for the alternate channels on and off You have to activate the general ACLR limit check before using this command with CALCulate LIMit ACPower STATe Parameters...

Page 711: ...for single sweeps See also INITiate CONTinuous on page 694 Return values LowerChan UpperChan text value The command returns two results The first is the result for the lower the second for the upper adjacent or alternate channel PASSED Limit check has passed FAIL Limit check has failed Example INIT IMM WAI CALC LIM ACP ACH RES PASSED PASSED Usage Query only CALCulate LIMit ACPower ALTernate ch REL...

Page 712: ...R measurement described elsewhere SENSe POWer NCORrection on page 845 SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet on page 699 SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet RLEVel on page 699 SENSe POWer TRACe on page 699 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer MODE on page 696 Remote commands exclusive to ACLR measurement SENSe POWer HSPeed 712 SENSe POWer HSPeed State This command turns high speed ACLR and channel power measurements ...

Page 713: ...mmands exclusive to configuring MSR ACLR measurements CALCulate LIMit ACPower GAP gap ABSolute 713 CALCulate LIMit ACPower GAP gap ABSolute STATe 714 CALCulate LIMit ACPower GAP gap RELative 714 CALCulate LIMit ACPower GAP gap RELative STATe 715 CALCulate LIMit ACPower GAP gap RESult 715 SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth GAP gap 716 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa GAP gap 716 SENSe POWer ACH...

Page 714: ...CLR limit check before using this command with CALCulate LIMit ACPower STATe Suffix gap 1 2 Gap CACLR channel number Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Limit Checking on page 172 CALCulate LIMit ACPower GAP gap RELative Limit Reserved This command defines the relative limit of the specified gap CACLR channel The ref erence value for the relative limit is the measured channel powe...

Page 715: ...t a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also INITiate CONTinuous on page 694 The results of the power limit checks are also indicated in the STAT QUES ACPL sta tus registry see STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit Register on page 636 Suffix gap 1 2 irrelevant R...

Page 716: ...ines the roll off factor for the specified gap CACLR channel s weighting filter Suffix gap 1 2 Gap CACLR channel number Parameters Alpha Roll off factor Range 0 to 1 RST 0 22 Manual operation See Weighting Filters on page 171 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa SBLock sb CHANnel ch Alpha This command defines the roll off factor for the specified transmission channel s weighting filter Suffix sb 1 2 ...

Page 717: ...167 SENSe POWer ACHannel SBCount Number This command defines the number of sub blocks i e groups of transmission channels in an MSR signal For more information see chapter 5 3 3 4 Measurement on Multi Standard Radio MSR Signals on page 145 Parameters Number Range 1 to 5 RST 1 Manual operation See Number of Sub blocks on page 162 SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock sb BANDwidth BWIDth CHANnel ch Bandwidth ...

Page 718: ...s command defines the center of the specified MSR sub block Note that the posi tion of the sub block also affects the position of the adjacent gap CACLR channels This command is for MSR signals only see CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer PRESet on page 700 Suffix sb 1 2 3 4 5 sub block number Parameters Frequency absolute frequency in Hz Manual operation See Sub block Center Frequency on page 166...

Page 719: ... the position of the adjacent gap channels CACLR This command is for MSR signals only see CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer PRESet on page 700 Suffix sb 1 2 3 4 5 sub block number Parameters Bandwidth Bandwidth in Hz Manual operation See RF Bandwidth on page 166 SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock sb TECHnology CHANnel ch Standard This command defines the technology used for transmission by the specifie...

Page 720: ...f transmission channels the specific sub block contains This command is for MSR signals only see CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer PRESet on page 700 Suffix sb 1 2 3 4 5 sub block number Parameters Number Range 1 to 18 RST 1 Manual operation See Number of Tx Channels Tx Count on page 166 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing GAP gap Spacing This command defines the distance from sub block to the specifie...

Page 721: ...age 692 11 5 3 9 Analyzing Measurement Results The following commands analyze and retrieve measurement results for ACLR meas urements Useful commands for channel power measurements described elsewhere CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer sb RESult on page 696 TRACe n DATA on page 922 Remote commands exclusive to channel power measurements CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer RESult PHZ 721 SENSe POWer A...

Page 722: ...he most important commands to perform channel power measurements in a remote environment Example Configuring and Performing an ACLR Measurement 722 Example Configuring and Performing an MSR ACLR Measurement 724 Example Configuring and Performing an ACLR Measurement In this example we will configure and perform an adjacent channel power measure ment Note that this example is primarily meant to demo...

Page 723: ...he center of the first alternate channel Selecting a Reference Channel POW ACH MODE REL Selects relative display of the channel power POW ACH REF TXCH MAN 1 Defines transmission channel 1 as the reference channel Saving the settings as a user standard CALC MARK FUNC POW STAN SAVE my_aclr_standard Saves the user standard with the name my_aclr_standard Weighting filters can only be defined for user ...

Page 724: ...ment POW ACH PRES ACP WAI Determines the ideal ACLR measurement configuration POW ACH PRES RLEV WAI Determines the ideal reference level for the measurement INIT WAI Initiates a new measurement and waits until the sweep has finished Limit Check CALC LIM ACP ACH RES Queries the results of the limit check for the adjacent channels CALC LIM ACP ALT1 RES Queries the results of the limit check for the ...

Page 725: ...ENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock1 BANDwidth CHANnel2 2 5MHZ SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock1 BANDwidth CHANnel3 2 5MHZ Configuring Sub block B SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock2 TXCHannel COUNt 1 SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock2 FREQuency CENTer 1 255GHZ SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock2 RFBWidth 4MHZ SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock2 CENTer CHANnel1 1 255GHZ SENSe POWer ACHannel SBLock2 TECHnology CHANnel1 LTE_1_40 SENSe POWe...

Page 726: ...measurement CALC MARK FUNC POW RES MCAC Results Transmission channels in sub block A 13 2346727385 13 2346723793 13 2390131759 Transmission channels in sub block B 17 0863336597 Transmission channels in sub block C 13 2390127767 13 2390134744 Totals for each sub block 8 4649064021 17 0863336597 10 2287131689 Adjacent channels 67 9740721019 67 9740728014 0 00434041734 0 00434041734 CACLR channels 0...

Page 727: ... POW ACH PRES RLEV Determines the ideal reference level for the measurement Performing the Measurement INIT CONT OFF Selects single sweep mode INIT WAI Initiates a new measurement and waits until the sweep has finished Now turn off the carrier signal and repeat the measurement INIT WAI Initiates a new measurement and waits until the sweep has finished Retrieving Results CALC MARK FUNC POW RES CN R...

Page 728: ...RKer m FUNCtion POWer SELect on page 698 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer STATe on page 698 Remote commands exclusive to occupied bandwidth measurements SENSe POWer BANDwidth BWIDth 728 SENSe POWer BANDwidth BWIDth Percentage This command selects the percentage of the total power that defines the occupied bandwidth Parameters Percentage Range 10 PCT to 99 9 PCT RST 99 PCT Example POW BWID 95PCT...

Page 729: ...lts CALC MARK FUNC POW RES OBW Returns the occupied bandwidth 11 5 6 Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask All remote control commands specific to spectrum emission mask measurements are described here See also chapter 11 5 2 Configuring Power Measurements on page 695 Managing Measurement Configurations 729 Controlling the Measurement 731 Configuring a Multi SEM Measurement 732 Configuring a Sweep ...

Page 730: ...ns are stored in an xml file The default directory for SEM standards is C r_s instr sem_std Suffix sb 1 2 3 Sub block in a Multi SEM measurement Parameters Standard String containing the file name If you have stored the file in a subdirectory of the directory men tioned above you have to include the relative path to the file Return values Standard The query returns the name of the currently loaded...

Page 731: ...d on page 223 11 5 6 2 Controlling the Measurement The following commands control the measurement itself INITiate ESPectrum 731 SENSe SWEep MODE 731 INITiate ESPectrum This command initiates a Spectrum Emission Mask measurement Usage Event SENSe SWEep MODE Mode This command selects the spurious emission and spectrum emission mask measure ments You can select other measurements with CALCulate n MAR...

Page 732: ... MLCalc on page 745 Remote commands exclusive to multi SEM measurements SENSe ESPectrum sb SBCenter 732 SENSe ESPectrum SBCount 732 SENSe ESPectrum sb SBCenter Frequency This command defines the center frequency of the selected sub block in a Multi SEM measurement Suffix sb 1 2 3 Sub block in a Multi SEM measurement Return values Frequency Frequency within the currently defined global span see SEN...

Page 733: ...Pectrum sb RANGe range LIMit PClass ABSolute STOP 740 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range LIMit PClass RELative STARt 740 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range LIMit PClass RELative STARt ABS 741 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range LIMit PClass RELative STARt FUNCtion 742 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range LIMit PClass RELative STOP 742 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range LIMit PClass RELative STOP ABSolute 743 SENSe ESPec...

Page 734: ... for available resolution bandwidths RST 30 0 kHz Default unit Hz Manual operation See RBW on page 211 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range BANDwidth VIDeo VBW This command defines the video bandwidth for a SEM range In case of high speed measurements the video bandwidth has to be identical for all ranges Suffix sb 1 2 3 Sub block in a Multi SEM measurement range 1 30 Selects the measurement range Param...

Page 735: ...ts the measurement range Usage Event Manual operation See Delete Range on page 215 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range FILTer TYPE FilterType This command selects the filter type for an SEM range In case of high speed measurements the filter has to be identical for all ranges The EMI specific filter types are available if the EMI R S FSW K54 measurement option is installed even if EMI measurement is no...

Page 736: ... set a span that is smaller than the span the SEM sweep list covers the R S FSW will not measure the ranges that are outside the span results may be invalid greater than the span the SEM sweep list covers the R S FSW will adjust the start frequency of the first SEM range and the stop frequency of the last SEM range to the span For more information see chapter 5 6 4 1 Ranges and Range Settings on p...

Page 737: ...d Range Settings on page 199 Suffix sb 1 2 3 Sub block in a Multi SEM measurement range 1 30 Selects the measurement range Parameters Frequency Numeric value RST 2 52 MHz range 1 2 52 MHz range 2 250 0 MHz range 3 Default unit Hz Manual operation See Range Start Range Stop on page 210 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range INPut ATTenuation Attenuation This command defines the input attenuation for a SEM ...

Page 738: ...trum sb RANGe range INPut GAIN Gain This command selects the level of preamplification for a SEM range In case of high speed measurements the level of the preamplifier has to be identical for all ranges Suffix sb 1 2 3 Sub block in a Multi SEM measurement range 1 30 Selects the measurement range Parameters Gain 15 dB 30 dB The availability of preamplification levels depends on the R S FSW model R ...

Page 739: ...30 Selects the SEM range Parameters Mode AFTer Inserts a range after the selected range BEFore Inserts a range before the selected range Manual operation See Insert before after Range on page 214 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range LIMit PClass ABSolute STARt Level This command defines an absolute limit for a SEM range Unlike manual operation you can define an absolute limit anytime and regardless of t...

Page 740: ...imit check mode Suffix sb 1 2 3 Sub block in a Multi SEM measurement range 1 30 Selects the measurement range PClass 1 4 Power class for which the limit is defined Parameters Level Absolute limit at the stop frequency of a SEM range Range 400 to 400 RST 13 Default unit dBm Example SENSe ESPectrum RANGe LIMit ABSolute STOP 15 For a detailed example see chapter 11 5 6 11 Example SEM Measurement on p...

Page 741: ...For more information see Relative limit line functions on page 202 Suffix sb 1 2 3 Sub block in a Multi SEM measurement range 1 30 Selects the SEM range PClass 1 4 Power class for which the limit is defined Parameters Level Absolute limit at the start frequency of a SEM range to be used in addition to the relative limit if the MAX function is enabled see SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range LIMit PClass...

Page 742: ...ESPectrum sb RANGe range LIMit PClass RELative STARt ABS commands to define these values OFF No function is used the relative limit line is defined by a fixed relative start value Use the SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range LIMit PClass RELative STARt com mand to define this value RST OFF Example SENSe ESPectrum RANGe LIMit RELative STARt FUNCtion MAX For a detailed example see chapter 11 5 6 11 Exampl...

Page 743: ...he relative limit for a SEM range For more information see Relative limit line functions on page 202 Suffix sb 1 2 3 Sub block in a Multi SEM measurement range 1 30 Selects the SEM range PClass 1 4 Power class for which the limit is defined Parameters Level Absolute limit at the stop frequency of a SEM range to be used in addition to the relative limit if the MAX function is enabled see SENSe ESPe...

Page 744: ...ange LIMit PClass RELative STOP and SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range LIMit PClass RELative STOP ABSolute commands to define these values OFF No function is used the relative limit line is defined by a fixed relative stop value Use the SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range LIMit PClass RELative STOP com mand to define this value RST OFF Example SENSe ESPectrum RANGe LIMit RELative STOP FUNCtion MAX For a de...

Page 745: ... range POINts MIN VALue SweepPoint Defines the minimum number of sweep points for the range Suffix sb 1 2 3 Sub block in a Multi SEM measurement range 1 30 Selects the measurement range Parameters SweepPoints Minimum number of sweep points per range Range 1 to 32001 RST 1 Example SENSe1 ESPectrum RANGe3 POINts MIN VALue 400 Manual operation See Minimum Sweep Points on page 214 SENSe ESPectrum sb R...

Page 746: ...l ranges Suffix sb 1 2 3 Sub block in a Multi SEM measurement range 1 30 Selects the measurement range Parameters RefLevel Reference level Refer to the data sheet for the reference level range RST 0 dBm Manual operation See Ref Level on page 212 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range SWEep TIME SweepTime This command defines the sweep time for a SEM range In case of high speed measurements the sweep time ...

Page 747: ...NGe range TRANsducer Transducer This command selects a transducer factor for a SEM range Note that the transducer must cover at least the span of the range the x axis has to be linear the unit has to be dB Suffix sb 1 2 3 Sub block in a Multi SEM measurement range 1 30 Selects the measurement range Parameters Transducer String containing the transducer file name including the path information Manu...

Page 748: ... filter The RRC filter is available if the power reference is the channel power Suffix sb 1 2 3 Sub block in a Multi SEM measurement Parameters Alpha Range 0 to 1 RST 0 22 Manual operation See Alpha on page 218 SENSe ESPectrum sb FILTer RRC STATe State This command turns the RRC filter in the reference range on and off The RRC filter is available if the power reference is the channel power Suffix ...

Page 749: ...mands define the power classes for SEM measurements CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum sb LIMits 749 CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum sb MODE 750 CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum sb VALue 751 CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum sb PCLass COUNt 751 CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum sb PCLass class EXCLusive 752 CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum sb PCLass class LIMit STATe 752 CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum sb PCLass class MAXimum 753 CALCulate LIMit E...

Page 750: ...ax3 The value range for power class 4 is defined as Max3 to 200 Only available for CALC LIM ESP PCL COUNT 4 Range 199 to 199 Max3 must be higher than Max2 Return values RangeLimits As a result of the query the range limits including the beginning of the first power class 200 and the end of the last power class 200 are indicated Example CALC LIM ESP LIM 50 50 70 Defines the following power classes ...

Page 751: ...e CALC LIM ESP MODE MAN and the CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum sb PCLass class EXCLusive commands however the power class to be used is not defined directly but via the expected power As opposed to CALC LIM ESP MODE AUTO the power class is not re assigned to the input signal power dynamically but only once when the command is executed Suffix sb 1 2 3 Sub block in a Multi SEM measurement Parameters Powe...

Page 752: ...Pectrum sb MODE is set to manual Note that You can only use power classes for which limits are defined Suffix sb 1 2 3 Sub block in a Multi SEM measurement class 1 4 power class Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC LIM ESP PCL1 ON Activates the first defined power class Manual operation See Used Power Classes on page 218 CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum sb PCLass class LIMit STATe State This comm...

Page 753: ... defines the upper limit of a particular power class Note The last power class always has an upper limit of 200 dBm The upper limit of a power class must always be the same as the lower limit of the subsequent power class The power class must already exist see CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum sb PCLass COUNt on page 751 Suffix sb 1 2 3 Sub block in a Multi SEM measurement class 1 4 power class Parameters...

Page 754: ...ents The following commands configure MSR SEM measurements For details see chap ter 5 6 4 4 Multi Standard Radio MSR SEM Measurements on page 205 For manual operation see chapter 5 6 5 5 MSR Settings on page 219 SENSe ESPectrum sb MSR APPLy 754 SENSe ESPectrum sb MSR BAND 755 SENSe ESPectrum sb MSR BCATegory 755 SENSe ESPectrum sb MSR CLAS 756 SENSe ESPectrum sb MSR GSM CARR 757 SENSe ESPectrum sb...

Page 755: ...nge of the bands used by the base station Suffix sb 1 2 3 Sub block in a Multi SEM measurement Parameters Range LOW 3 GHz HIGH 3 GHz RST LOW Example Select the band category 1 ESP2 MSR BCAT BC1 Set the base station class to medium range ESP2 MSR CLAS MED Set the maximum output power to 10 dBm ESP2 MSR MPOW 10 Set the frequency range of the base station to 3 GHz ESP2 MSR BAND HIGH Set the base stat...

Page 756: ...MED Set the maximum output power to 10 dBm ESP2 MSR MPOW 10 Set the frequency range of the base station to 3 GHz ESP2 MSR BAND HIGH Set the base station RF bandwidth to 20 MHz ESP2 MSR RFBW 20MHZ Calculate limits for MSR SEM ESP2 MSR APPL Manual operation See Band Category on page 220 SENSe ESPectrum sb MSR CLAS Class Defines the class of the base station according to its sending range Suffix sb 1...

Page 757: ... available see SENSe ESPectrum sb MSR GSM CARR on page 757 This command is only available for band category 2 see SENSe ESPectrum sb MSR BCATegory on page 755 Suffix sb 1 2 3 Sub block in a Multi SEM measurement Parameters Power numeric value Range 0 dBm to 100 dBm RST 39 0 dBm Example Select the band category 2 ESP2 MSR BCAT BC2 Set the base station class to medium range ESP2 MSR CLAS MED Set the...

Page 758: ...ESP2 MSR CLAS MED Set the maximum output power to 10 dBm ESP2 MSR MPOW 10 Set the base station RF bandwidth to 20 MHz ESP2 MSR RFBW 20MHZ GSM Edge present ESP2 MSR GSM CPR Power of the GSM carrier is 20dBm ESP2 MSR GSM CARR 20 Manual operation See Carrier Adjacent to RF Bandwidth Edge on page 221 SENSe ESPectrum sb MSR LTE CPResent State This command defines whether an LTE FDD 1 4 MHz or 3 MHz car...

Page 759: ...th a medium range base station class see SENSe ESPectrum sb MSR CLAS on page 756 Suffix sb 1 2 3 Sub block in a Multi SEM measurement Parameters Power Range 0 dBm to 100 dBm Increment 1 dB Example Select the band category 1 ESP2 MSR BCAT BC1 Set the base station class to medium range ESP2 MSR CLAS MED Set the maximum output power to 10 dBm ESP2 MSR MPOW 10 Set the frequency range of the base stati...

Page 760: ...ist evaluation Useful commands for SEM measurements described elsewhere MMEMory STORe LIST on page 1013 Remote commands exclusive to SEM measurements CALCulate n ESPectrum PSEarch PEAKsearch AUTO 760 CALCulate n ESPectrum PSEarch PEAKsearch IMMediate 760 CALCulate n ESPectrum PSEarch PEAKsearch MARGin 761 CALCulate n ESPectrum PSEarch PEAKsearch PSHow 761 CALCulate n ESPectrum PSEarch PEAKsearch A...

Page 761: ...meters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC ESP PSE PSH ON Marks all peaks with blue squares Manual operation See Show Peaks on page 225 See Show Peaks on page 247 11 5 6 9 Performing an SEM Measurement The following commands are required to perform an SEM measurement SENS SWE MODE ESP see SENSe SWEep MODE on page 731 INITiate IMMediate on page 694 see chapter 11 5 1 Performing Measure ments on page ...

Page 762: ...ion may be running If required a sweep stop can be ensured by INIT IMM WAI Managing Measurement Configurations ESP PRES WCDMA 3GPP UL 3GPP_UL xml Loads the 3GPP configuration stored in the file 3GPP_UL xml Defining the Reference Range ESP RRAN Queries the current reference range ESP RTYP CPOW Selects the channel power as the power reference ESP BWID 4 MHZ Defines a channel bandwidth of 4 MHz for t...

Page 763: ...0 MHz for range 2 ESP HSP OFF Switches off Fast SEM mode so the ranges can be configured individually ESP RANG2 BAND RES 1000000 Defines a resolution bandwidth of 1 MHz for range 2 ESP RANG2 FILT TYPE RRC Selects an RRC filter for range 2 ESP RANG2 BAND VID 5000000 Defines a video bandwidth of 5 MHz for range 2 ESP RANG2 SWE TIME 1 Defines a sweep time of 1 second for range 2 ESP RANG2 RLEV 0 Defi...

Page 764: ...1 REL STOP ABS 13 ESP RANG LIM2 STAT OR Checks the absolute and relative limits for all ranges in power class 2 and fails if either limit is violated Since power class 2 is set to be used for the entire measurement values for Limit Check 1 are irrelevant ESP RANG2 LIM2 ABS STAR 10 ESP RANG2 LIM2 ABS STOP 10 Defines an absolute limit of 10 dBm for the entire range 2 for power class 2 ESP RANG2 LIM2...

Page 765: ... that with the R S FSW the spurious measurement must be initialized before you can start configuring the sweep list or list evaluation INITiate SPURious 765 INITiate SPURious This command initiates a Spurious Emission measurement Usage Event 11 5 7 2 Configuring a Sweep List The following commands configure the sweep list for spurious emission measure ments The sweep list cannot be configured usin...

Page 766: ... RANGe range SWEep TIME 772 SENSe LIST RANGe range SWEep TIME AUTO 773 SENSe LIST RANGe range TRANsducer 773 SENSe LIST RANGe range BANDwidth RESolution RBW This command defines the resolution bandwidth for a spurious emission measurement range Suffix range 1 30 Selects the measurement range Parameters RBW Resolution bandwidth Refer to the data sheet for available resolution bandwidths Default uni...

Page 767: ...OUNt This command queries the number of ranges in the sweep list Return values Ranges Number of ranges in the sweep list Usage Query only SENSe LIST RANGe range DELete This command removes a range from the sweep list Note that you cannot delete the reference range a minimum of three ranges is mandatory Suffix range 1 30 Selects the measurement range Usage Event SENSe LIST RANGe range DETector Dete...

Page 768: ... R S FSW K54 measurement option is installed even if EMI measurement is not active For details see chap ter 5 13 3 1 Resolution Bandwidth and Filter Types on page 290 Suffix range 1 30 Selects the measurement range Parameters FilterType NORMal Gaussian filters CFILter channel filters RRC RRC filters CISPr PULSe CISPR 6 dB requires EMI R S FSW K54 option Return value for query is always PULS MIL MI...

Page 769: ...e 1 2 515 MHz range 2 2 515 MHz range 3 Default unit Hz Manual operation See Range Start Range Stop on page 243 SENSe LIST RANGe range FREQuency STOP Frequency This command defines the stop frequency of a spurious emission measurement range Make sure to set an appropriate span If you set a span that is smaller than the span the sweep list covers the R S FSW will not measure the ranges that are out...

Page 770: ...of the input attenuation for a spurious emis sion measurement range on and off Suffix range 1 30 Selects the measurement range Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Manual operation See RF Att Mode on page 245 SENSe LIST RANGe range INPut GAIN STATe State This command turns the preamplifier for a spurious emission measurement range on and off The preamplification is defined by SENSe LIST RANGe range I...

Page 771: ...urious emission measurement range Suffix range 1 30 Selects the measurement range Parameters Level Absolute limit at the start frequency of a SEM range Range 400 to 400 RST 13 Default unit dBm Manual operation See Abs Limit Start Stop on page 246 SENSe LIST RANGe LIMit STATe This command turns the limit check for all spurious emission measurement ranges on and off Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF M...

Page 772: ... chapter 6 5 1 8 How Much Data is Measured Sweep Points and Sweep Count on page 407 RST 1001 Manual operation See Sweep Points on page 245 SENSe LIST RANGe range RLEVel RefLevel This command defines the reference level for a spurious emission measurement range Suffix range 1 30 Selects the measurement range Parameters RefLevel Reference level Refer to the data sheet for the reference level range R...

Page 773: ...tion See Sweep Time Mode on page 244 SENSe LIST RANGe range TRANsducer Transducer This command selects a transducer factor for a spurious emission measurement range Note that the transducer must cover at least the span of the range the x axis has to be linear the unit has to be dB Suffix range 1 30 Selects the measurement range Parameters Transducer String containing the transducer file name inclu...

Page 774: ...s command defines the threshold of the list evaluation Parameters Margin Range 200 to 200 RST 200 Default unit dB Example CALC PSE MARG 100 Sets the threshold to 100 dB CALCulate n PSEarch PEAKsearch PSHow This command turns the peak labels in the diagram on and off Peak labels are blue squares Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC PSE PSH ON Marks all peaks with blue squares CALCulate n PS...

Page 775: ...ng Measure ments on page 692 11 5 7 5 Retrieving and Saving Settings and Results The following commands analyze and retrieve measurement results for Spurious measurements Useful commands for spurious emission measurements described elsewhere CALCulate LIMit k FAIL on page 987 TRACe n DATA on page 922 TRACe n DATA MEMory on page 924 TRACe n DATA X on page 924 11 5 7 6 Programming Example Spurious E...

Page 776: ...esets the instrument SWE MODE LIST Activates spurious emissions measurement INIT CONT OFF Selects single sweep mode Spurious measurement has to be in single sweep mode to be configured and no sweep operation may be running If required a sweep stop can be ensured by INIT IMM WAI Configuring a Sweep List LIST RANG COUNt Returns the number of measurement ranges in the sweep list LIST RANG4 DEL Config...

Page 777: ...weep points for range 1 LIST RANG1 RLEV 20 Defines a reference level of 20 dBm for range 1 LIST RANG1 SWE TIME 5 Defines a manual sweep time of 5 second for range 1 Create a transducer that can be used It has to cover the corresponding frequency range SENSe1 CORRection TRANsducer SELect Test SENSe1 CORRection TRANsducer UNIT DB SENSe1 CORRection TRANsducer COMMent Test Transducer Frequency Span 0 ...

Page 778: ...ements 778 Configuring Statistical Measurements 779 Using Gate Ranges for Statistical Measurements 780 Scaling the Diagram 782 Performing a Statistical Measurement 784 Retrieving Results 784 Programming Example Measuring Statistics 786 11 5 8 1 Activating Statistical Measurements The following commands activate statistical measurements CALCulate n STATistics APD STATe 778 CALCulate n STATistics CC...

Page 779: ...ets a marker to a particular probability value You can query the corre sponding level with CALCulate n MARKer m X Using the command turns delta markers into normal markers This command is available for CCDF measurements Parameters Probability Range 0 to 100 Example CALC1 MARK Y PERC 95PCT Positions marker 1 to a probability of 95 Manual operation See Percent Marker CCDF only on page 256 CALCulate ...

Page 780: ...of a particular trace Parameters Comment String containing the comment Example SWE EGAT TRAC1 COMM MyComment Defines a comment for the gate in trace 1 Manual operation See Comment on page 258 SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe PERiod Length This command defines the length of the gate for all traces The gate length applies to all traces Parameters Length Range 100 ns to 1000 s RST 2 ms Example SWE EGAT TRAC1 ...

Page 781: ...time is 2 ms for gate range 5 the start time is 4 ms Example SWE EGAT TRAC1 STAR1 3ms Sets the Starting point for range 1 on trace 1 at 3 ms Manual operation See Range x Start Stop on page 258 SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe k STATe range State This command includes or excludes a gate range for a particular trace Suffix range 1 3 gate range Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example SWE EGAT TRAC1 STAT1 ON A...

Page 782: ... 5 8 4 Scaling the Diagram The following commands set up the diagram for statistical measurements CALCulate n STATistics PRESet 782 CALCulate n STATistics SCALe AUTO ONCE 783 CALCulate n STATistics SCALe X RANGe 783 CALCulate n STATistics SCALe X RLEVel 783 CALCulate n STATistics SCALe Y LOWer 784 CALCulate n STATistics SCALe Y UNIT 784 CALCulate n STATistics SCALe Y UPPer 784 CALCulate n STATisti...

Page 783: ...cal measurements Usage Event Manual operation See Adjust Settings on page 257 CALCulate n STATistics SCALe X RANGe Range This command defines the display range of the x axis for statistical measurements The effects are identical to DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe Parameters Range Range 1 dB to 200 dB RST 100 dB Example CALC STAT SCAL X RANG 20dB Manual operation See Range on page 260 CALCulate n ST...

Page 784: ...Y Unit on page 260 CALCulate n STATistics SCALe Y UPPer Magnitude This command defines the upper vertical limit of the diagram Parameters Magnitude The number is a statistical value and therefore dimensionless Range 1E 5 to 1 0 RST 1 0 Example CALC STAT SCAL Y UPP 0 01 Manual operation See Y Max Y Min on page 260 11 5 8 5 Performing a Statistical Measurement The following commands are required to ...

Page 785: ... only Manual operation See CCDF on page 114 CALCulate STATistics RESult t ResultType This command queries the results of a CCDF or ADP measurement for a specific trace Parameters ResultType MEAN Average RMS power in dBm measured during the measure ment time PEAK Peak power in dBm measured during the measurement time CFACtor Determined crest factor ratio of peak power to average power in dB ALL Res...

Page 786: ...ment TRIG SOUR EXT Defines the use of an external trigger TRIG HOLD 25us Defines a trigger offset of 25 μs CALC STAT APD ON Activates APD measurement CALC STAT NSAM 1000 Sets the number of samples to be included in the statistical evaluation to 1000 Defining Gate ranges SWE EGAT TRAC1 COMM GSM useful part Defines a comment for the gate SWE EGAT TRAC1 PER 4 61536ms Sets the gate period to 4 61536ms...

Page 787: ...10 probability for the CCDF CALC MARK2 X Returns the level for a probability of 95 Scaling the diagram CALC STAT SCAL X RLEV 70dBm Sets the reference level to 70 dBm x axis CALC STAT SCAL X RANG 20dB Defines a power level range of 20 dB for the x axis CALC STAT SCAL Y LOW 0 0001 Sets the minimum of the y axis to 0 01 probability CALC STAT SCAL Y UPP 1 0 Sets the maximum of the y axis to 100 probab...

Page 788: ...PEak STATe 790 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary RMS STATe 790 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary SDEViation STATe 790 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary AOFF This command turns all time domain power evaluation modes off Usage Event CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary AVERage State This command switches on or off averaging for the active power measurement in zero span in the window spe...

Page 789: ...he peak hold function is reset by switching it off and on again Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary STATe State This command turns time domain power measurements on and off This measurement in only available in zero span When you turn the measurement on the R S FSW activates a marker and positions it on the peak power level in the marker search range Parameters St...

Page 790: ...e marker 1 is positioned on Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Results on page 267 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary SDEViation STATe State This command turns the evaluation to determine the standard deviation of the time domain power on and off The R S FSW performs the measurement on the trace marker 1 is positioned on Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF 11 5 9 2 Performing a Ti...

Page 791: ...m FUNCtion SUMMary MEAN PHOLd RESult This command queries the maximum mean time domain power The query is only pos sible if the peak hold function has been activated previously using CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary PHOLd To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for ...

Page 792: ...PHOLd To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also INITiate CONTinuous on page 694 Parameters PeakPower Peak power of the signal during the measurement time Usage Query only CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary PPEak RESult This command queries the...

Page 793: ...ry only CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary RMS RESult This command queries the RMS of the time domain power To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also INITiate CONTinuous on page 694 Return values RMSPower RMS power of the signal during the mea...

Page 794: ...SUMMary SDEViation RESult This command queries the standard deviation of the time domain power To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also INITiate CONTinuous on page 694 Return values StandardDeviation Standard deviation of the signal during the m...

Page 795: ...AI Initiates the measurement and waits until the measurement is finished Retrieving the Results CALC MARK FUNC SUMM MEAN RES CALC MARK FUNC SUMM PPE RES CALC MARK FUNC SUMM RMS RES Queries the mean peak and RMS time domain power 11 5 10 Measuring the Harmonic Distortion All remote control commands specific to harmonic distortion measurements are descri bed here Activating the Measurement 795 Confi...

Page 796: ...ivates the harmonic distortion measurement Manual operation See Harmonic Distortion on page 114 11 5 10 2 Configuring the Measurement The following commands control the harmonic distortion measurement Useful commands for harmonic distortion measurements described elsewhere CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion CENTer on page 830 SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO on page 842 Remote commands exclusive to harmonic disto...

Page 797: ...st Settings on page 275 11 5 10 3 Performing the Measurement The following commands are required to perform a harmonic distortion measurement INITiate IMMediate on page 694 see chapter 11 5 1 Performing Measure ments on page 692 11 5 10 4 Retrieving Results The following commands retrieve the results of the harmonic distortion measurement CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion HARMonics DISTortion 797 CALC...

Page 798: ...iable The other values are power levels relative to the first harmonic The unit for these is dB Usage Query only Manual operation See Harmonic Distortion on page 114 11 5 10 5 Example Measuring the Harmonic Distortion Configuring the Measurement RST Resets the instrument INIT CONT OFF Turns on single sweep mode CALC MARK FUNC HARM ON Turns on the harmonic distortion measurement CALC MARK FUNC HARM...

Page 799: ...799 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion TOI SEARchsignal ONCE 800 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion TOI RESult 800 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion TOI STATe State This command initiates a measurement to determine the third intercept point A two tone signal with equal carrier levels is expected at the RF input of the instru ment Marker 1 and marker 2 both normal markers are set to the maximum of the two signals De...

Page 800: ...surement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also INITiate CONTinuous on page 694 Parameters TOI Third order intercept point Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK FUNC TOI ON Switches the intercept measurement INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end CALC MARK FUNC TOI RES Outputs...

Page 801: ... DELTamarker m X RELative on page 942 CALCulate n MARKer m X on page 932 Remote commands exclusive to AM modulation depth measurements CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion MDEPth STATe 801 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion MDEPth SEARchsignal ONCE 801 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion MDEPth RESult 802 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion MDEPth STATe State This command turns the AM Modulation Depth measurement on and ...

Page 802: ...odulationDepth Modulation depth in Usage Query only Manual operation See AM Mod Depth on page 114 11 5 12 2 Example Measuring the AM Modulation Depth This example demonstrates how to determine the AM modulation depth in a remote environment Note that without a real input signal this measurement will not return use ful results Configuring the measurement RST Reset the instrument FREQ CENT 100MHz Se...

Page 803: ... ronment This measurement requires the R S FSW K54 option The following tasks specific to the EMI application are described here Activating EMI Measurement 803 Configuring EMI Markers 803 Configuring the EMI Final Test 805 Configuring EMI Limit Lines 806 Controlling LISN 806 Retrieving EMI Results 807 Evaluating the Results 809 Programming Example EMI Measurement 809 11 5 13 1 Activating EMI Measu...

Page 804: ...FMEasurement DETector 804 CALCulate MARKer m FUNCtion FMEasurement DETector 804 CALCulate DELTamarker m FUNCtion FMEasurement DETector Detector This command selects the detector for a specific deltamarker during the final evalua tion If the deltamarker is not yet active the command also turns the deltamarker on Parameters Detector OFF no final measurement is performed AVER average detector CAV CIS...

Page 805: ...ion on page 836 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe X SPACing on page 831 Remote commands exclusive to configuring EMI final tests CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion FMEasurement PSEarch PEAKsearch AUTO 805 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion FMEasurement DWELl 805 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion FMEasurement PSEarch PEAKsearch AUTO State This command turns an automatic peak search on and off If enabled the search is performed automat...

Page 806: ... to control a LISN are described here INPut LISN PHASe 806 INPut LISN FILTer HPASs STATe 806 INPut LISN TYPE 807 INPut LISN PHASe Phase This command selects the phase of the LISN you want to measure Parameters Phase L1 L2 L3 N RST L1 Example INP LISN PHAS N Selects the N phase Manual operation See Phase on page 305 INPut LISN FILTer HPASs STATe State This command turns the 150 kHz highpass filter ...

Page 807: ...943 CALCulate n DELTamarker m Y on page 943 Remote commands exclusive to retrieving EMI measurement results CALCulate DELTamarker m FUNCtion FMEasurement RESult 807 CALCulate MARKer m FUNCtion FMEasurement RESult 808 CALCulate DELTamarker m FUNCtion FMEasurement LIMit k CONDition 808 CALCulate MARKer m FUNCtion FMEasurement LIMit k CONDition 808 CALCulate DELTamarker m FUNCtion FMEasurement LIMit ...

Page 808: ...tion 0 The deltamarker has passed the limit check 1 The deltamarker is inside the margins of a limit line 2 The deltamarker has failed the limit check Example CALC DELT2 FUNC FME LIM2 COND Queries the condition of deltamarker 2 in relation to limit line 2 Usage Query only CALCulate MARKer m FUNCtion FMEasurement LIMit k CONDition Condition This command queries the condition of a marker position in...

Page 809: ... If the marker has been assigned to a different trace than the limit line or if no limit ine is defined for the marker position the command returns 200 Return values Amplitude Vertical distance to the limit line in dB Example CALC MARK3 FUNC FME LIM2 DELT Queries the distance of marker 3 to the second limit line Usage Query only 11 5 13 7 Evaluating the Results The commands required to control the...

Page 810: ...6 normal EMI markers CALC MARK1 ON CALC MARK2 ON CALC MARK3 ON CALC MARK4 ON CALC MARK5 ON CALC MARK6 ON Set markers 1 to 3 on trace 1 Set markers 4 to 6 on trace 2 CALC MARK1 TRAC 1 CALC MARK2 TRAC 1 CALC MARK3 TRAC 1 CALC MARK4 TRAC 2 CALC MARK5 TRAC 2 CALC MARK6 TRAC 2 Use CISPR average detector for all markers during final test CALC MARK1 FUNC FME DET CAV CALC MARK2 FUNC FME DET CAV CALC MARK3...

Page 811: ... for trace 1 CALC LIM1 FAIL Query the result of the limit check and the distance from the limit line for each marker CALC MARK1 FUNC FME LIM1 COND CALC MARK1 FUNC FME LIM1 DELT CALC MARK2 FUNC FME LIM1 COND CALC MARK2 FUNC FME LIM1 DELT CALC MARK3 FUNC FME LIM1 COND CALC MARK3 FUNC FME LIM1 DELT CALC MARK4 FUNC FME LIM1 COND CALC MARK4 FUNC FME LIM1 DELT CALC MARK5 FUNC FME LIM1 COND CALC MARK5 FU...

Page 812: ...nc tionality or statistics If you use a command that controls those functions the R S FSW aborts the list evaluation The R S FSW also aborts the list evaluation if you end the remote session The commands can be used in two different ways Instrument setup measurement and querying of the results in a single command line This method causes the least delay between the measurement and the result output...

Page 813: ...Type RBW VBW MeasTime TriggerLevel This command configures and initiates the List Evaluation measurement The list can contain up to 200 entries frequencies You can define a different instru ment setup for each frequency that is in the list If you synchronize the measurement with OPC the R S FSW produces a service request when all frequencies have been measured and the number of individual meas ure...

Page 814: ...the number of evaluation modes you have turned on with SENSe LIST POWer SET The result is a list of floating point values separated by commas The unit depends on CALCulate n UNIT POWer SENSe LIST POWer SET PeakPower RMSPower AVGPower TriggerSource TriggerSlope TriggerOffset GateLength This command defines global List Evaluation parameters These parameters are valid for every frequency you want to ...

Page 815: ...ENSe LIST POWer STATe State This command turns the List Evaluation off Parameters State OFF RST OFF 11 5 14 2 Example Performing List Evaluation The following example shows a list evaluation with the following configuration No Freq MHz Ref Level dBm RF Attenu ation dB El Attenu ation dB Filter RBW VBW Meas Time Trigger Level 1 935 2 0 10 Normal 1 MHz 3 MHz 440 µs 0 2 935 4 0 10 10 Channel 30 kHz 1...

Page 816: ...rol commands specific to measuring the mean or peak pulse power e g bursts in various telecommunications standards are described here This mea surement is available via remote control only The Pulse Power measurement is a gated measurement that determines the power over a particular number of pulses The measurement is controlled by an external trig ger or the video signal A separate trigger event ...

Page 817: ...ng performed However more time is needed for synchroniza tion via service request 11 5 15 1 Performing Pulse Power Measurements The following commands control pulse power measurements CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion MSUMmary 817 SENSe MPOWer FTYPe 818 SENSe MPOWer RESult LIST 818 SENSe MPOWer SEQuence 819 SENSe MPOWer RESult MIN 820 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion MSUMmary TimeOffset MeasTime PulsePer...

Page 818: ... for pulse power measurements The EMI specific filter types are available if the EMI R S FSW K54 measurement option is installed even if EMI measurement is not active For details see chap ter 5 13 3 1 Resolution Bandwidth and Filter Types on page 290 Parameters FilterType CFILter NORMal P5 RRC CISPr PULSe CISPR 6 dB requires EMI R S FSW K54 option Return value for query is always PULS MIL MIL Std ...

Page 819: ... have been measured and the number of individual meas urements has been performed Note that using the command as a query initiates the measurement and returns the results if all frequencies have been measured For more information on querying the results see SENSe LIST POWer RESult Parameters Frequency Defines the pulse frequency Range 0 to Fmax Default unit Hz RBW Defines the resolution bandwidth ...

Page 820: ...unit is dBm Usage Query only 11 5 15 2 Example Performing a Pulse Power Measurement The following example shows a pulse power measurement Measurement with synchronization via service request ESE 1 SRE 32 Configures the status reporting system to produce a service request MPOW FTYP NORM Selects a Gaussian filter for the measurement MPOW 935 2MHZ 1MHZ 434us VID 50 5us MEAN 20 OPC Configures and init...

Page 821: ...isplay 827 11 6 1 General Window Commands The following commands are required to configure general window layout independent of the application Note that the suffix n always refers to the window in the currently selected measure ment channel see INSTrument SELect on page 686 DISPlay FORMat 821 DISPlay WINDow n SIZE 821 DISPlay FORMat Format This command determines which tab is displayed Parameters...

Page 822: ...Note that the suffix n always refers to the window in the currently selected measure ment channel see INSTrument SELect on page 686 LAYout ADD WINDow 822 LAYout CATalog WINDow 823 LAYout IDENtify WINDow 824 LAYout REMove WINDow 824 LAYout REPLace WINDow 824 LAYout SPLitter 825 LAYout WINDow n ADD 826 LAYout WINDow n IDENtify 826 LAYout WINDow n REMove 827 LAYout WINDow n REPLace 827 LAYout ADD WIN...

Page 823: ... on page 441 See Marker Table on page 441 See Marker Peak List on page 441 See Result Summary on page 442 See Spectrogram on page 442 Table 11 2 WindowType parameter values for the Spectrum application Parameter value Window type DIAGram Diagram MTABle Marker table PEAKlist Marker peak list RSUMmary Result summary SGRam Spectrogram LAYout CATalog WINDow This command queries the name and index of a...

Page 824: ...ame of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index Usage Event LAYout REPLace WINDow WindowName WindowType This command replaces the window type for example from Diagram to Result Sum mary of an already existing window while keeping its position index and window name To add a new window use the LAYout ADD WINDow command Parameters WindowName String containing the name of th...

Page 825: ...the splitters Parameters Index1 The index of one window the splitter controls Index2 The index of a window on the other side of the splitter Position New vertical or horizontal position of the splitter as a fraction of the screen area without channel and status bar and softkey menu The point of origin x 0 y 0 is in the lower left corner of the screen The end point x 100 y 100 is in the upper right...

Page 826: ... WINDow n REPLace command This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result Parameters Direction LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow WindowType Type of measurement window you want to add See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 822 for a list of availa ble window types Return values NewWindowName When adding a new window the command returns its name by default th...

Page 827: ...Dow com mand To add a new window use the LAYout WINDow n ADD command Parameters WindowType Type of measurement window you want to replace another one with See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 822 for a list of availa ble window types 11 6 3 Examples Configuring the Result Display The following example demonstrates how to configure result displays in a remote envi ronment 11 6 3 1 Example 1 Adding and Arr...

Page 828: ...the size of individual windows Move the splitter between the Frequency Sweep window and the Marker Table window to enlarge the spectrum display to 60 of the entire width LAY SPL 1 3 60 Move the splitter between the Spectrogram window and the Marker Peak List window to enlarge the Spectrogram display to 60 of the entire width LAY SPL 2 4 60 Querying all displayed windows Query the name and number o...

Page 829: ...Y ADD 1 RIGH MTAB LAY WIND2 ADD RIGH PEAK LAY CAT Result 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 Remove Spectrogram LAY WIND2 REM Remove Marker Table window LAY REM 3 Replace Marker Peak List window by Marker Table LAY REPL 4 MTAB Querying all displayed windows Query the name and number of all displayed windows from top left to bottom right LAY CAT Result 1 1 4 4 Changing the size of individual windows Move the splitter ...

Page 830: ... Signal Tracking 834 11 7 1 1 Defining the Frequency Range CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion CENTer 830 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion CSTep 831 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe X SPACing 831 SENSe FREQuency CENTer 831 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP 832 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO 832 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK 832 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor 833 SENSe FREQuency OFFSet 833 SENSe FREQuency SPA...

Page 831: ...eration See Frequency Axis Scaling on page 303 SENSe FREQuency CENTer Frequency This command defines the center frequency Parameters Frequency The allowed range and fmax is specified in the data sheet UP Increases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command DOWN Decreases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP comma...

Page 832: ...90 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO State This command couples or decouples the center frequency step size to the span Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example FREQ CENT STEP AUTO ON Activates the coupling of the step size to the span SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK CouplingType This command couples and decouples the center frequency step size to the span or the resolution bandwidth Parameters C...

Page 833: ...type frequency will be corrected for this shift numerically by the application See also Frequency Offset on page 390 Parameters Offset Range 100 GHz to 100 GHz RST 0 Hz Example FREQ OFFS 1GHZ Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Frequency Offset on page 390 SENSe FREQuency SPAN Span This command defines the frequency span If you set a span of 0 Hz in the Spectrum application the R S FSW start...

Page 834: ...urements in the frequency domain Parameters Frequency min span to fmax RST fmax Example FREQ STOP 2000 MHz Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Frequency Sweep on page 111 See Start Stop on page 389 11 7 1 2 Configuring Signal Tracking When signal tracking is activated the maximum signal is determined after each fre quency sweep and the center frequency is set to the frequency of this signal ...

Page 835: ...n RST span 10 on activating the function Default unit Hz Manual operation See Tracking Bandwidth on page 391 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion STRack THReshold Level This command defines the threshold level for the signal tracking process Note that you have to turn on signal tracking before you can use the command Parameters Level The unit depends on CALCulate n UNIT POWer Range 130 dBm to 30 dBm RST 120 ...

Page 836: ...ATio 839 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo TYPE 839 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution Bandwidth This command defines the resolution bandwidth and decouples the resolution band width from the span In the Realtime application the resolution bandwidth is always coupled to the span For statistics measurements this command defines the demodulation bandwidth For measurements on I Q data in the frequency doma...

Page 837: ...the manual operation span RBW Parameters Ratio Range 0 0001 to 1 RST 0 01 Example BAND RAT 0 1 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Span RBW on page 411 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution TYPE FilterType This command selects the resolution filter type When you change the filter type the command selects the next larger filter bandwidth if the same bandwidth is unavailable for that filter The EM...

Page 838: ...r Type on page 302 See Res BW CISPR on page 304 See Res BW MIL on page 304 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo Bandwidth This command defines the video bandwidth The command decouples the video bandwidth from the resolution bandwidths Parameters Bandwidth refer to data sheet RST AUTO is set to ON Example BAND VID 10 kHz Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See VBW on page 410 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDe...

Page 839: ... video filter position is possible only if the resolution bandwidth is 100 kHz Parameters Mode LINear The video filter is applied in front of the logarithmic amplifier In linear mode measurements with a logarithmic level scale result in flatter falling edges compared to logarithmic mode The reason is the conversion of linear power values into logarithmic level values if you halve the linear power ...

Page 840: ... average count has been reached Parameters SweepCount When you set a sweep count of 0 or 1 the R S FSW performs one single sweep in single sweep mode In continuous sweep mode if the sweep count is set to 0 a moving average over 10 sweeps is performed Range 0 to 200000 RST 0 Example SWE COUN 64 Sets the number of sweeps to 64 INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a sweep and w...

Page 841: ...ctivated to obtain the best control range for the A D converter Note FFT mode and external mixers R S FSW B21 The partial span optimization modes Dynamic and Auto include automatic suppres sion of unwanted mixing products Thus when using external mixers R S FSW B21 use the Speed mode to obtain similar results in FFT mode as in frequency sweep mode Zero span mode For zero span measurements the opti...

Page 842: ...ime from the span and resolution and video bandwidths Parameters Time refer to data sheet RST depends on current settings determined automati cally Example SWE TIME 10s Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Sweep Time on page 155 See Sweep Time on page 411 See Sweep Time on page 427 SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO State This command couples and decouples the sweep time to the span and the resolution and...

Page 843: ...FFT FilterMode Defines the filter mode to be used for FFT filters by defining the partial span size The partial span is the span which is covered by one FFT analysis This command is only available when using the sweep type FFT Note this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only For new remote con trol programs use the SENSe SWEep OPTimize command Parameters FilterMode WIDE AUTO NARRow A...

Page 844: ...Se ADJust LEVel on page 863 Remote commands exclusive to amplitude configuration CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion REFerence 844 CALCulate n UNIT POWer 844 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel 845 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet 845 SENSe POWer NCORrection 845 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion REFerence This command matches the reference level to the power level of a marker If you use the co...

Page 845: ...d Manual operation See Reference Level on page 396 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet Offset This command defines a reference level offset Parameters Offset Range 200 dB to 200 dB RST 0dB Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV OFFS 10dB Manual operation See Shifting the Display Offset on page 260 See Shifting the Display Offset on page 397 SENSe POWer NCORrection State This command turns noise cancell...

Page 846: ...s not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually the command also adjusts the reference level Parameters Attenuation Range see data sheet Increment 5 dB RST 10 dB AUTO is set to ON Example INP ATT 30dB Defines a 30 dB attenuation and decouples the attenuation from the reference level Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Attenuation Mode Value on page 398 INPut ATTenuation AUTO ...

Page 847: ... Attenuation Option B25 on page 398 INPut EATT AUTO State This command turns automatic selection of the electronic attenuation on and off If on electronic attenuation reduces the mechanical attenuation whenever possible Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example INP EATT AUTO OFF Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation Option B25 on page 398 INPut EATT STATe State This command turns the e...

Page 848: ...preamplification level if the preamplifier is activated INP GAIN STAT ON see INPut GAIN STATe on page 848 The command requires option R S FSW B24 Parameters Gain 15 dB 30 dB The availability of preamplification levels depends on the R S FSW model R S FSW8 13 15dB and 30 dB R S FSW26 or higher 30 dB All other values are rounded to the nearest of these two RST OFF Example INP GAIN VAL 30 Switches on...

Page 849: ...operation See Auto Scale Once on page 401 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe MODE Mode This command selects the type of scaling of the y axis When the display update during remote control is off this command has no immediate effect Parameters Mode ABSolute absolute scaling of the y axis RELative relative scaling of the y axis RST ABSolute Example DISP TRAC Y MODE REL Manual operation See Scaling on pa...

Page 850: ...cified unit PERCent Linear scaling in RST LOGarithmic Example DISP TRAC Y SPAC LIN Selects linear scaling in Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Scaling on page 401 11 7 4 Configuring Triggered and Gated Measurements The commands required to configure a triggered or gated measurement in a remote environment are described here The tasks for manual operation are described in chapter 6 6 Trigge...

Page 851: ...outTime Dropout time of the trigger Range 0 s to 10 0 s RST 0 s Manual operation See Drop Out Time on page 431 TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME Offset Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the sweep data cap turing A negative offset is possible for time domain measurements For the trigger sources External or IF Power a common input signal is used for both trigger and gate...

Page 852: ...hich is only available for IF Power trig ger sources Parameters Hysteresis Range 3 dB to 50 dB RST 3 dB Example TRIG SOUR IFP Sets the IF power trigger source TRIG IFP HYST 10DB Sets the hysteresis limit value Manual operation See Hysteresis on page 431 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal port TriggerLevel This command defines the level the external signal must exceed to cause a trigger event Note tha...

Page 853: ...his command defines the magnitude the I Q data must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed Parameters TriggerLevel Range 130 dBm to 30 dBm RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV IQP 30DBM Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 430 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel RFPower TriggerLevel This command defines the power level the ...

Page 854: ...n to it Parameters Type POSitive NEGative POSitive Triggers when the signal rises to the trigger level rising edge NEGative Triggers when the signal drops to the trigger level falling edge RST POSitive Example TRIG SLOP NEG Manual operation See Slope on page 432 TRIGger SEQuence SOURce Source This command selects the trigger source For details on trigger sources see Trigger Source on page 427 Usin...

Page 855: ... and only in the Spectrum application PSEN External power sensor RST IMMediate Example TRIG SOUR EXT Selects the external trigger input as source of the trigger signal Manual operation See Using the power sensor as an external trigger on page 327 See Trigger Source on page 427 See Free Run on page 428 See External Trigger 1 2 3 on page 428 See Video on page 428 See IF Power on page 429 See Baseban...

Page 856: ...d During a sweep the gate can be opened and closed sev eral times The synchronization mechanisms with OPC OPC and WAI remain completely unaffected The measurement ends when a particular number of measurement points has been recorded see SENSe SWEep POINts on page 841 Performing gated measurements turns the squelch off Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example SWE EGAT ON Switches on the external gat...

Page 857: ... the polarity of an external gate signal The setting applies both to the edge of an edge triggered signal and the level of a level triggered signal Parameters Polarity POSitive NEGative RST POSitive Example SWE EGAT POL POS Manual operation See Slope on page 432 SENSe SWEep EGATe SOURce Source This command selects the signal source for gated measurements If an IF power signal is used the gate is o...

Page 858: ...urements EDGE The trigger event for the gate to open is the detection of the sig nal edge After the gate signal has been detected the gate remains open until the gate delay is over RST EDGE Example SWE EGAT TYPE EDGE Manual operation See Gate Mode on page 433 11 7 4 3 Configuring the Trigger Output The following commands are required to send the trigger signal to one of the variable TRIGGER INPUT ...

Page 859: ...lected a user defined output with OUTPut TRIGger port OTYPe Suffix port Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Parameters Level HIGH TTL signal LOW 0 V RST LOW Manual operation See Trigger 2 3 on page 383 See Level on page 384 OUTPut TRIGger port OTYPe OutputType This command selects the type of signal generated at the trigger output Suffi...

Page 860: ...to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Usage Event Manual operation See Send Trigger on page 384 OUTPut TRIGger port PULSe LENGth Length This command defines the length of the pulse generated at the trigger output Suffix port Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Parameters Length Pulse length in seconds ...

Page 861: ...automatically only once for the current measurement This includes Center frequency Reference level Example ADJ ALL Usage Event Manual operation See Adjusting all Determinable Settings Automatically Auto All on page 437 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation Duration In order to determine the ideal reference level the R S FSW performs a measurement on the current input data This command defines the length...

Page 862: ...ier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines a lower threshold the signal must fall below compared to the last measurement before the reference level is adapted auto matically Parameters Threshold Range 0 dB to 200 dB RST 1 dB Default unit dB Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST LOW 2 For an input signal...

Page 863: ...surement for automatic adjustment is performed imme diately without waiting for a trigger RST 1 SENSe ADJust FREQuency This command sets the center frequency to the highest signal level in the current fre quency range Example ADJ FREQ Usage Event Manual operation See Adjusting the Center Frequency Automatically Auto Freq on page 438 SENSe ADJust LEVel This command initiates a single internal measu...

Page 864: ...he protection mechanism intervened The error status bit bit 3 in the STAT QUES POW status register and the INPUT OVLD message in the status bar are cleared See STATus QUEStionable POWer EVENt on page 1046 and STA Tus QUEStionable POWer Register on page 639 The command works only if the overload condition has been eliminated first For details on the protection mechanism see chapter 6 2 1 1 RF Input...

Page 865: ...See Input Coupling on page 319 INPut FILTer HPASs STATe State Activates an additional internal high pass filter for RF input signals from 1 GHz to 3 GHz This filter is used to remove the harmonics of the R S FSW in order to mea sure the harmonics for a DUT for example This function requires option R S FSW B13 Note for RF input signals outside the specified range the high pass filter has no effect ...

Page 866: ...s the nominal input impedance of the RF input 75 Ω should be selected if the 50 Ω input impedance is transformed to a higher impe dance using a matching pad of the RAZ type 25 Ω in series to the input impedance of the instrument The power loss correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 75Ω 50Ω Parameters Impedance 50 75 RST 50 Ω Example INP IMP 75 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Imp...

Page 867: ...nnector This 9 pole SUB D male connector is located on the rear panel of the R S FSW See the R S FSW Getting Started manual for details Parameters State ON 1 User port is switched to INPut OFF 0 User port is switched to OUTPut RST 1 INPut UPORt VALue This command queries the control lines of the user ports Example INP UPOR Usage Query only 11 7 6 2 Using External Mixers The commands required to wo...

Page 868: ...ailable if the R S FSW B21 option is installed and an external mixer is connected Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example MIX ON Manual operation See External Mixer State on page 367 SENSe MIXer BIAS HIGH BiasSetting This command defines the bias current for the high second range This command is only available if the external mixer is active see SENSe MIXer STATe on page 868 Parameters BiasSetting...

Page 869: ...form frequency sweeps not in vector signal analysis or the I Q Analyzer for instance Parameters State OFF ON AUTO ALL OFF No automatic signal detection is active ON Automatic signal detection Signal ID is active AUTO Automatic signal detection Auto ID is active ALL Both automatic signal detection functions Signal ID Auto ID are active RST OFF Manual operation See Signal ID on page 371 See Auto ID ...

Page 870: ...MIXer RFOVerrange STATe 874 SENSe MIXer FREQuency HANDover Frequency This command defines the frequency at which the mixer switches from one range to the next if two different ranges are selected The handover frequency for each band can be selected freely within the overlapping frequency range This command is only available if the external mixer is active see SENSe MIXer STATe on page 868 Paramete...

Page 871: ...nd ranges Example MIX HARM BAND PRES Presets the selected waveguide band Usage Event Manual operation See Preset Band on page 368 SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND VALue Band This command selects the external mixer band The query returns the currently selected band This command is only available if the external mixer is active see SENSe MIXer STATe on page 868 Parameters Band KA Q U V E W F D G Y J USER S...

Page 872: ...operation See Range 1 2 on page 369 SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH VALue HarmOrder This command specifies the harmonic order to be used for the high second range Parameters HarmOrder numeric value Range 2 to 61 USER band for other bands see band definition Example MIX HARM HIGH 2 Manual operation See Harmonic Order on page 369 SENSe MIXer HARMonic TYPE OddEven This command specifies whether the harmoni...

Page 873: ...ge 0 to 100 RST 24 0 dB Default unit dB Example MIX LOSS HIGH 20dB Manual operation See Conversion loss on page 369 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe HIGH FileName This command defines the file name of the conversion loss table to be used for the high second range Parameters FileName string file name Example MIX LOSS TABL HIGH MyCVLTable Manual operation See Conversion loss on page 369 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe...

Page 874: ...IXer RFOVerrange STATe State If enabled the band limits are extended beyond RF Start and RF Stop due to the capabilities of the used harmonics Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See RF Overrange on page 368 Conversion Loss Table Settings The following settings are required to configure and manage conversion loss tables SENSe CORRection CVL BAND 875 SENSe CORRection CVL BIAS 875 SENSe...

Page 875: ... for the pre defined bands see table 11 5 RST F 90 GHz 140 GHz Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS_TAB_4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL BAND KA Sets the band to KA 26 5 GHz 40 GHz Manual operation See Band on page 375 SENSe CORRection CVL BIAS BiasSetting This command defines the bias setting to be used with the conversion loss table Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table...

Page 876: ...erformed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 878 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters Text Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS_TAB_4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL COMM Conversion loss table for FS_Z60 Manual operation See Comment on page 375 SENSe CORRection CVL DATA Freq Level This command defines the ...

Page 877: ...the conversion loss table CORR CVL HARM 3 Manual operation See Harmonic Order on page 375 SENSe CORRection CVL MIXer Type This command defines the mixer name in the conversion loss table This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELe...

Page 878: ... on page 372 See Edit Table on page 373 See File Name on page 374 SENSe CORRection CVL SNUMber SerialNo This command defines the serial number of the mixer for which the conversion loss table is to be used This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe ...

Page 879: ...2 GHz Use a 3 port mixer type SENS MIX PORT 3 Split the frequency range into two ranges range 1 covers 47 48 GHz GHz to 80 GHz harmonic 6 average conv loss of 20 dB range 2 covers 80 GHz to 138 02 GHz harmonic 8 average conv loss of 30 dB SENS MIX HARM TYPE EVEN SENS MIX HARM HIGH STAT ON SENS MIX FREQ HAND 80GHz SENS MIX HARM LOW 6 SENS MIX LOSS LOW 20dB SENS MIX HARM HIGH 8 SENS MIX LOSS HIGH 30...

Page 880: ...HZ 20DB 75GHZ 30DB Configuring the mixer and band settings Use user defined band and assign new cvl table SENS MIX HARM BAND USER Define band by two ranges range 1 covers 47 48 GHz to 80 GHz harmonic 6 cvl table UserTable range 2 covers 80 GHz to 138 02 GHz harmonic 8 average conv loss of 30 dB SENS MIX HARM TYPE EVEN SENS MIX HARM HIGH STAT ON SENS MIX FREQ HAND 80GHz SENS MIX HARM LOW 6 SENS MIX...

Page 881: ...lects the connector 1 Baseband Input I 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Return values PartNumber Part number in a string Usage Query only SENSe PROBe p ID SRNumber Queries the serial number of the probe Suffix p 1 2 3 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input I 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Co...

Page 882: ...3 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input I 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Return values Name Name string Usage Query only SENSe PROBe p SETup STATe Queries if the probe at the specified connector is active detected or not active not detected To switch the probe on i e activate input from the connector use INP SEL AIQ see INPu...

Page 883: ...ed To switch between different configurations define multiple measurement channels For more information on external generator control see chapter 6 2 4 2 Basics on External Generator Control on page 331 Measurement Configuration 883 Interface Configuration 886 Source Calibration 889 Programming Example for External Generator Control 891 Measurement Configuration The following commands are required...

Page 884: ...FSW the RF frequency range covers the currently defined span of the R S FSW unless limited by the range of the signal generator OFF 0 The generator uses a single fixed frequency defined by SOURce EXTernal FREQuency RST 1 Example SOUR EXT FREQ COUP ON Manual operation See Source Frequency Coupling on page 346 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency FACTor DENominator Value This command defines the denominator of...

Page 885: ...Numerator RF Freq Source Parameters Value numeric value RST 1 Example SOUR EXT FREQ NUM 4 SOUR EXT FREQ DEN 3 Sets a multiplication factor of 4 3 i e the transmit frequency of the generator is 4 3 times the analyzer frequency Manual operation See Automatic Source Frequency Numerator Denominator Offset on page 346 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency OFFSet Offset This command defines the frequency offset of ...

Page 886: ...age 345 SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate OFFSet Offset This command defines a level offset for the external generator level Thus for exam ple attenuators or amplifiers at the output of the external generator can be taken into account for the setting Parameters Offset Range 200 dB to 200 dB RST 0dB Example SOUR POW OFFS 10dB Sets the level offset of the external generator to 20 dBm Usage SCPI confirmed...

Page 887: ... is displayed in the status bar RST INT Example SOUR EXT ROSC EXT Switches to external reference oscillator Manual operation See Reference on page 344 SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB RDEVice GENerator ADDRess Number Changes the IEC IEEE bus address of the external generator Parameters Number Range 0 to 30 RST 28 Example SYST COMM GPIB RDEV GEN ADDR 15 Manual operation See GPIB Address TCP IP Address on pa...

Page 888: ...zation for all generators of other manufacturers and some Rohde Schwarz devices TTL GPIB connection with TTL synchronization if available for most Rohde Schwarz devices RST GPIB Example SYST COMM RDEV GEN LINK TTL Selects GPIB TTL interface for generator operation Manual operation See TTL Handshake on page 343 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator TYPE Type This command selects the type of external...

Page 889: ...fines the power value assigned to the reference position in the grid For external generator calibration measurements requires External Generator Control option R S FSW B10 this command defines the power offset value assigned to the reference position Parameters Value RST 0 dBm coupled to reference level Example DISP TRAC Y RVAL 20dBm Sets the power value assigned to the reference position to 20 dB...

Page 890: ...page 347 See Calibrate Reflection Open on page 348 SENSe CORRection METHod This command selects the type of measurement to be performed with the external gen erator This command is only available if external generator control is active see SOURce EXTernal STATe on page 886 Parameters REFLection Selects reflection measurements TRANsmission Selects transmission measurements RST TRANsmission Example ...

Page 891: ...RANsducer GENerator Name This command uses the normalized measurement data to generate a transducer factor with up to 1001 points The trace data is converted to a transducer with unit dB and stored in a file with the specified name and the suffix trd under c r_s instr trd The frequency points are allocated in equidistant steps between start and stop frequency The generated transducer factor can be...

Page 892: ...ment speed SYST COMM RDEV GEN LINK TTL Activate the use of the external reference frequency at 10 MHz on the generator SOUR EXT ROSC EXT Configuring the calibration measurement Activate external generator control SOUR EXT STAT ON Set the generator output level to 10 dBm SOUR EXT POW 10DBM Set the frequency coupling to automatic SOUR EXT FREQ COUP STAT ON Configuring the generator frequency range D...

Page 893: ...libration results Should be 0 for all sweep points directly after calibration SENS CORR STAT ON TRAC DATA TRACE1 Changing the display of the calibration results Shift the reference line so the 5 dB level is displayed in the center DISP TRAC Y SCAL RVAL 5DB DISP TRAC Y SCAL RPOS 50PCT 11 7 6 5 Working with Power Sensors The following commands describe how to work with power sensors Configuring Powe...

Page 894: ...EVice PMETer p DEFine Placeholder Type Interface SerialNo This command assigns the power sensor with the specified serial number to the selected power sensor index configuration The query returns the power sensor type and serial number of the sensor assigned to the specified index Suffix p 1 4 Power sensor index Setting parameters Placeholder Currently not evaluated SerialNo Serial number of a con...

Page 895: ...CALCulate n PMETer p RELative MAGNitude AUTO ONCE 896 CALCulate n PMETer p RELative STATe 896 FETCh PMETer p 897 READ PMETer p 897 SENSe PMETer p DCYCle STATe 897 SENSe PMETer p DCYCle VALue 897 SENSe PMETer p FREQuency 898 SENSe PMETer p FREQuency LINK 898 SENSe PMETer p MTIMe 899 SENSe PMETer p MTIMe AVERage COUNt 899 SENSe PMETer p MTIMe AVERage STATe 899 SENSe PMETer p ROFFset STATe 900 SENSe ...

Page 896: ...e for relative measurements to 30 dBm for power sensor 2 Manual operation See Reference Value on page 327 CALCulate n PMETer p RELative MAGNitude AUTO ONCE This command sets the current measurement result as the reference level for relative measurements Suffix p 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters ONCE Example CALC PMET2 REL AUTO ONCE Takes the current measurement value as reference value for rel at...

Page 897: ...either dBm absolute measurements or dB relative measurements Usage Query only READ PMETer p This command initiates a power sensor measurement and queries the results Suffix p 1 4 Power sensor index Usage Query only SENSe PMETer p DCYCle STATe State This command turns the duty cycle correction on and off Suffix p 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example PMET2 DCYC STAT ON Manu...

Page 898: ...frequency of the power sensor Suffix p 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters Frequency The available value range is specified in the data sheet of the power sensor in use RST 50 MHz Example PMET2 FREQ 1GHZ Sets the frequency of the power sensor to 1 GHz Manual operation See Frequency Manual on page 326 SENSe PMETer p FREQuency LINK Coupling This command selects the frequency coupling for power sensor ...

Page 899: ...ge COUNt NumberReadings This command sets the number of power readings included in the averaging process of power sensor measurements Extended averaging yields more stable results for power sensor measurements espe cially for measurements on signals with a low power because it minimizes the effects of noise Suffix p 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters NumberReadings An average count of 0 or 1 perfor...

Page 900: ...ffix p 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters State ON 1 Includes the reference level offset in the results OFF 0 Ignores the reference level offset RST 1 Example PMET2 ROFF OFF Takes no offset into account for the measured power Manual operation See Use Ref Lev Offset on page 327 SENSe PMETer p STATe State This command turns a power sensor on and off Suffix p 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters State ON...

Page 901: ...sly Manual operation See Continuous Value Update on page 325 UNIT n PMETer p POWer Unit This command selects the unit for absolute power sensor measurements Suffix p 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters Unit DBM WATT W RST DBM Example UNIT PMET POW DBM Manual operation See Unit Scale on page 326 UNIT n PMETer p POWer RATio Unit This command selects the unit for relative power sensor measurements Suff...

Page 902: ...TRIG DTIMe 0 001 SENSe PMETer p TRIGger HOLDoff Holdoff This command defines the trigger holdoff for external power triggers Suffix p 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters Holdoff Time period that has to pass between the trigger event and the start of the measurement in case another trigger event occurs Range 0 s to 1 s Increment 100 ns RST 0 s Example PMET2 TRIG HOLD 0 1 Sets the holdoff time of the ...

Page 903: ... p 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters Level 20 to 20 dBm Range 20 dBm to 20 dBm RST 10 dBm Example PMET2 TRIG LEV 10 dBm Sets the level of the trigger Manual operation See External Trigger Level on page 328 SENSe PMETer p TRIGger SLOPe Edge This command selects the trigger condition for external power triggers Suffix p 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters Edge POSitive The measurement starts in case t...

Page 904: ...chapter 11 7 4 3 Configuring the Trig ger Output on page 858 DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce 904 OUTPut IF SOURce 904 OUTPut IF IFFRequency 905 OUTPut IF SBANd 905 OUTPut UPORt STATe 906 OUTPut UPORt VALue 906 DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce State This command turns the 28 V supply of the BNC connector labeled NOISE SOURCE CONTROL on the front panel on and off For details see chapter 6 2 1 4 Input from Nois...

Page 905: ...e output RST IF Example OUTP IF VID Selects the video signal for the IF VIDEO DEMOD output con nector Manual operation See IF VIDEO DEMOD Output on page 382 OUTPut IF IFFRequency Frequency This command defines the frequency for the IF output The IF frequency of the signal is converted accordingly This command is available in the time domain and if the IF VIDEO DEMOD output is configured for IF For...

Page 906: ...cated on the rear panel of the R S FSW Parameters State ON User port is switched to OUTPut OFF User port is switched to INPut RST OFF OUTPut UPORt VALue Value This command sets the control lines of the user ports The assignment of the pin numbers to the bits is as follows Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Pin N A N A 5 3 4 7 6 2 Bits 7 and 6 are not assigned to pins and must always be 0 The user port is written...

Page 907: ...ISPlay WINDow n ZOOM AREA x1 y1 x2 y2 This command defines the zoom area To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 Parameters x1 y1 x2 y2 Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define the zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system T...

Page 908: ...ines the zoom area for a multiple zoom To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 Suffix zoom 1 4 Selects the zoom window Parameters x1 y1 x2 y2 Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define the zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate sy...

Page 909: ...page 1011 Configuring Standard Traces 909 Configuring Spectrograms 914 Using Trace Mathematics 919 Retrieving Trace Results 921 Formats for Returned Values ASCII Format and Binary Format 925 Programming Example Configuring a Spectrogram 925 11 8 2 1 Configuring Standard Traces Useful commands for trace configuration described elsewhere DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SPACing on page 850 DISPlay WINDow n ...

Page 910: ... ory only if the new value is greater than the previous one MINHold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R S FSW saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one VIEW The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and dis played BLANk Hides the selected trace RST Trace 1 WRITe Trace 2 6 BLANk Example INIT CO...

Page 911: ...operation See Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Softkeys on page 468 SENSe AVERage COUNt AverageCount This command defines the number of sweeps that the application uses to average traces In case of continuous sweeps the application calculates the moving average over the average count In case of single sweep measurements the application stops the measurement and calculates the average after the aver...

Page 912: ...ER TYPE LIN Switches to linear average calculation Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Average Mode on page 467 SENSe WINDow n DETector trace FUNCtion Detector Defines the trace detector to be used for trace analysis For details see chapter 7 3 1 1 Mapping Samples to Sweep Points with the Trace Detector on page 452 For EMI measurements the trace detector is used for the initial peak search o...

Page 913: ...n page 466 SENSe WINDow n DETector t FUNCtion AUTO State This command couples and decouples the detector to the trace mode Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example DET AUTO OFF The selection of the detector is not coupled to the trace mode Manual operation See Detector on page 466 TRACe n COPY TraceNumber TraceNumber This command copies data from one trace to another Parameters TraceNumber TraceN...

Page 914: ...ement channel For commands to set markers in spectrograms see chapter 11 8 3 6 Marker Search Spectrograms on page 944 Configuring a Spectrogram Measurement 914 Configuring the Color Map 917 Configuring a Spectrogram Measurement CALCulate SGRam SPECtrogram CLEar IMMediate 914 CALCulate SGRam SPECtrogram CONT 914 CALCulate SGRam SPECtrogram FRAMe COUNt 915 CALCulate SGRam SPECtrogram FRAMe SELect 91...

Page 915: ...1 to history depth Increment 1 RST 1 Example INIT CONT OFF Selects single sweep mode CALC SGR FRAM COUN 200 Sets the number of frames to 200 Manual operation See Frame Count on page 416 CALCulate SGRam SPECtrogram FRAMe SELect Frame Time This command selects a specific frame for further analysis The command is available if no measurement is running or after a single sweep has ended Parameters Fram...

Page 916: ...n as delta values which simplifies evaluating relative results however you can also calculate the absolute date and time as displayed on the screen The frame results themselves are returned with TRAC DATA SGR See TRACe n DATA on page 922 Query parameters Frames CURRent Returns the starting time of the current frame ALL Returns the starting time for all frames The results are sorted in descending o...

Page 917: ...the time stamp Manual operation See Timestamp on page 474 CALCulate SGRam SPECtrogram STATe State This command turns the spectrogram on and off Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC SGR ON Activates the Spectrogram result display Manual operation See State on page 473 Configuring the Color Map DISPlay WINDow n SGRam SPECtrogram COLor DEFault 917 DISPlay WINDow n SGRam SPECtrogram COLor LOWe...

Page 918: ...s command defines the shape and focus of the color curve for the spectrogram result display Parameters Shape Shape of the color curve Range 1 to 1 RST 0 Manual operation See Shape on page 476 DISPlay WINDow n SGRam SPECtrogram COLor UPPer Percentage This command defines the end point of the color map Parameters Percentage Statistical frequency percentage Range 0 to 66 RST 0 Default unit Example DI...

Page 919: ...hite Manual operation See Hot Cold Radar Grayscale on page 476 11 8 2 3 Using Trace Mathematics The following commands control trace mathematics CALCulate n MATH EXPression DEFine 919 CALCulate n MATH MODE 920 CALCulate n MATH POSition 920 CALCulate n MATH STATe 920 CALCulate n MATH EXPression DEFine Expression This command selects the mathematical expression for trace mathematics Before you can u...

Page 920: ...n POWer Linear power calculation RST LOGarithmic Example CALC MATH MODE LIN Selects linear calculation Manual operation See Trace Math Mode on page 470 CALCulate n MATH POSition Position This command defines the position of the trace resulting from the mathematical opera tion Parameters Position Vertical position of the trace in of the height of the diagram area 100 PCT corresponds to the upper di...

Page 921: ...r Returned Values ASCII Format and Binary Format on page 925 Commands required to export traces and other result data are described in chap ter 11 9 5 Storing Measurement Results on page 1011 FORMat DATA 921 TRACe n DATA 922 TRACe n DATA MEMory 924 TRACe n DATA X 924 FORMat DATA Format This command selects the data format that is used for transmission of trace data from the R S FSW to the controll...

Page 922: ... format setting REAL is used for the binary transmission of trace data For I Q data 8 bytes per sample are returned for this format set ting RST ASCII Example FORM REAL 32 Usage SCPI confirmed TRACe n DATA Trace Data ResultType This command queries current trace data and measurement results If you use it as a setting command it transfers trace data from an external source to the R S FSW The data f...

Page 923: ...lay For details see table 11 8 Return values TraceData For more information see tables below Example TRAC TRACE1 A Transfers trace data A to trace 1 Example TRAC TRACE3 Queries the data of trace 3 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Spectrum Emission Mask on page 113 See Spurious Emissions on page 113 See List Evaluation Result Summary State on page 225 See List Evaluation State on page 247 ...

Page 924: ...ies the previously captured trace data for the specified trace from the memory As an offset and number of sweep points to be retrieved can be specified the trace data can be retrieved in smaller portions making the command faster than the TRAC DATA command This is useful if only specific parts of the trace data are of interest If no parameters are specified with the command the entire trace data i...

Page 925: ...rmatted in 32 Bit IEEE 754 Floating Point Format The schema of the result string is as follows 41024 value1 value2 value n with 4 number of digits 4 in the example of the following number of data bytes 1024 number of following data bytes 1024 in the example Value 4 byte floating point value Reading out data in binary format is quicker than in ASCII format Thus binary format is recommended for larg...

Page 926: ...P WIND SGR COL GRAY Defines a gray scaled coloring low values light gray high values dark gray DISP WIND SGR COL LOW 30 DISP WIND SGR COL UPP 70 DISP WIND SGR COL SHAP 0 8 Defines a color map for a range that comprises 40 of the measurement range excluding 30 at each end The colors are not scaled linearly the light gray colors are stretched to distinguish low values better Performing the Measureme...

Page 927: ... 0 We will move deltamarker 3 to the next peak level for the same frequency CALC DELT3 SGR Y MAX NEXT Retrieving Results CALC MARK1 X CALC MARK1 Y CALC MARK1 SGR FRAM Queries the frequency x level y and frame values of marker 1 CALC MARK2 X CALC MARK2 Y CALC MARK2 SGR FRAM Queries the frequency x level y and frame values of marker 2 CALC DELT1 X CALC DELT1 Y CALC DELT1 SGR FRAM Queries the frequen...

Page 928: ... Fixed Reference Marker Settings 951 Marker Peak Lists 953 Noise Measurement Marker 956 Phase Noise Measurement Marker 956 Band Power Marker 958 n dB Down Marker 960 Signal Count Marker 963 Marker Demodulation 965 Programming Examples for Using Markers and Marker Functions 967 11 8 3 1 Setting Up Individual Markers The following commands define the position of markers in the diagram CALCulate n DE...

Page 929: ...DELT2 LINK ON Manual operation See Linking to Another Marker on page 300 CALCulate n DELTamarker m1 LINK TO MARKer m2 State This command links delta marker m1 to any active normal marker m2 If you change the horizontal position of marker m2 delta marker m1 changes its horizontal position to the same value Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT4 LINK TO MARK2 ON Links the delta marker 4 ...

Page 930: ...ference Example CALC DELT3 MREF 2 Specifies that the values of delta marker 3 are relative to marker 2 Manual operation See Reference Marker on page 300 CALCulate n DELTamarker m STATe State This command turns delta markers on and off If necessary the command activates the delta marker first No suffix at DELTamarker turns on delta marker 1 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT2 ON Turn...

Page 931: ...DELTamarker MODE on page 929 A query returns the absolute position of the delta marker Range The value range and unit depend on the measure ment and scale of the x axis Example CALC DELT X Outputs the absolute x value of delta marker 1 Manual operation See Marker 1 2 3 4 on page 282 See Marker 1 2 3 on page 287 See Marker Position X value on page 299 CALCulate n MARKer m AOFF This command turns al...

Page 932: ...ing trace must have a trace mode other than Blank If necessary the command activates the marker first Parameters Trace 1 to 6 Trace number the marker is assigned to Example CALC MARK3 TRAC 2 Assigns marker 3 to trace 2 Manual operation See Assigning the Marker to a Trace on page 300 CALCulate n MARKer m X Position This command moves a marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis If necessary th...

Page 933: ...ns the marker table on OFF Turns the marker table off AUTO Turns the marker table on if 3 or more markers are active RST AUTO Example DISP MTAB ON Activates the marker table Manual operation See Marker Table Display on page 497 CALCulate MARKer X SSIZe StepSize This command selects the marker step size mode The step size defines the distance the marker moves when you move it with the rotary knob I...

Page 934: ...off Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example CALC MARK LOEX ON Manual operation See Exclude LO on page 500 CALCulate n MARKer PEXCursion Excursion This command defines the peak excursion The peak excursion sets the requirements for a peak to be detected during a peak search The unit depends on the measurement Application Result display Unit Spectrum dB Parameters Excursion The excursion is the di...

Page 935: ... be analyzed Parameters SearchLimit The value range depends on the frequency range or sweep time The unit is Hz for frequency domain measurements and s for time domain measurements RST left diagram border Example CALC MARK X SLIM ON Switches the search limit function on CALC MARK X SLIM LEFT 10MHz Sets the left limit of the search range to 10 MHz Manual operation See Search Limits Left Right on pa...

Page 936: ...tion on CALC MARK X SLIM RIGH 20MHz Sets the right limit of the search range to 20 MHz Manual operation See Using Zoom Limits on page 501 CALCulate THReshold Level This command defines a threshold level for the marker peak search Parameters Level Numeric value The value range and unit are variable RST 120 dBm Example CALC THR 82DBM Sets the threshold value to 82 dBm Manual operation See Search Thr...

Page 937: ...m RIGHt 939 CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum AUTO State This command turns an automatic marker peak search for a trace maximum on and off The R S FSW performs the peak search after each sweep Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK MAX AUTO ON Activates the automatic peak search function for marker 1 at the end of each particular sweep Manual operation See Auto Max Min Peak Search on page 50...

Page 938: ...6 CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum RIGHt This command moves a marker to the next lower peak The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion In the spectrogram the vertical marker position remains the same Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 499 See Search Mode for Next Peak in X Direction on page 502 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum A...

Page 939: ... m MINimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the minimum level In the spectrogram the command moves a marker horizontally to the minimum level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Marker Search Type on page 503 See Search Minimum on page 506 CALCulate n...

Page 940: ...amarker m MAXimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next higher value In the spectrogram the vertical marker position remains the same Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 499 See Search Next Peak on page 506 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the highest level In the spectrogram the command moves a marker horizontally to...

Page 941: ...earch Mode for Next Peak on page 499 See Search Next Minimum on page 506 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the minimum level In the spectrogram the command moves a delta marker horizontally to the minimum level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marke...

Page 942: ...PNOise RESult on page 957 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion BPOWer RESult on page 960 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion BPOWer RESult on page 958 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion NDBDown RESult on page 962 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion NDBDown FREQuency on page 961 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion NDBDown QFACtor on page 962 CALCulate n MARKer m COUNt FREQuency on page 964 Remote commands exclusive to retrievi...

Page 943: ...OLT AMPere dB lin log statistics function APD or CCDF on dimensionless output Return values Position Position of the delta marker in relation to the reference marker or the fixed reference Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end CALC DELT2 ON Switches on delta marker 2 CALC DELT2 Y Outputs measurement value of delta marker 2 Usage Query onl...

Page 944: ...mands define the horizontal position of the markers CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum LEFT on page 937 CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum NEXT on page 937 CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum PEAK on page 938 CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum RIGHt on page 938 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum LEFT on page 938 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum NEXT on page 939 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum PEAK on page 939 CALCulate n MARKer m MINi...

Page 945: ...er on the 20th frame before the present CALC MARK2 SGR FRAM 2s Sets second marker on the frame 2 seconds ago Manual operation See Frame Spectrogram only on page 495 CALCulate n MARKer SGRam SPECtrogram SARea SearchArea This command defines the marker search area for all markers Parameters SearchArea VISible Performs a search within the visible frames Note that the command does not work if the spec...

Page 946: ...t does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak in Y Direction on page 502 CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam SPECtrogram Y MAXimum NEXT This command moves a marker vertically to the next lower peak level for the current frequency The search includes all frames It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event Manual ope...

Page 947: ...earch Mode for Next Peak in Y Direction on page 502 CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam SPECtrogram Y MINimum NEXT This command moves a marker vertically to the next higher minimum level for the cur rent frequency The search includes all frames It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak in Y Direction on page 502 CALCulate n MARKer m ...

Page 948: ...9 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam SPECtrogram Y MAXimum BELow 949 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam SPECtrogram Y MAXimum NEXT 950 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam SPECtrogram Y MAXimum PEAK 950 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam SPECtrogram Y MINimum ABOVe 950 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam SPECtrogram Y MINimum BELow 950 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam SPECtrogram Y MINimum NEXT 951 CALCulate n DELTa...

Page 949: ...ge 503 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam SPECtrogram XY MINimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the minimum level of the spectrogram over all frequencies Usage Event Manual operation See Marker Search Type on page 503 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam SPECtrogram Y MAXimum ABOVe This command moves a marker vertically to the next higher level for the current fre quency The search includes onl...

Page 950: ...marker hasn t been active yet the command looks for the peak level in the whole spectrogram Usage Event Manual operation See Marker Search Type on page 503 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam SPECtrogram Y MINimum ABOVe This command moves a delta marker vertically to the next minimum level for the cur rent frequency The search includes only frames above the current marker position It does not change t...

Page 951: ...See Marker Search Type on page 503 11 8 3 7 Fixed Reference Marker Settings The following commands configure a fixed reference marker CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed RPOint MAXimum PEAK 951 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed RPOint X 951 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed RPOint Y 952 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed RPOint Y OFFSet 952 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCti...

Page 952: ...eference The unit and value range is variable RST Fixed Reference OFF Example CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO Y 10dBm Sets the reference point level for delta markers to 10 dBm Manual operation See Defining a Fixed Reference on page 497 See Defining a Reference Point on page 511 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed RPOint Y OFFSet Offset This command defines a level offset for the fixed delta marker re...

Page 953: ...ion LABel STATe 953 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion FPEaks COUNt 953 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks IMMediate 954 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks LIST SIZE 954 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks SORT 954 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks STAT 955 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion FPEeaks X 955 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion FPEeaks Y 955 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks ANNotation LABel STATe Sta...

Page 954: ...LCulate n MARKer PEXCursion Range 1 to 200 Example CALC MARK PEXC 5 Defines a peak excursion of 5 dB i e peaks must be at least 5 dB apart to be detected as a peak CALC MARK FUNC FPE 10 Initiates a search for 10 peaks on the current trace CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks LIST SIZE MaxNoPeaks This command defines the maximum number of peaks that the R S FSW looks for during a peak search Parame...

Page 955: ...search Manual operation See Peak List State on page 518 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion FPEeaks X This command queries the position of the peaks on the x axis The order depends on the sort order that has been set with CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks SORT Return values PeakPosition Position of the peaks on the x axis The unit depends on the measurement Usage Query only CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion FPEe...

Page 956: ...he unit is the one currently active Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK2 ON Switches on marker 2 CALC MARK FUNC NOIS ON Switches on noise measurement INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end CALC MARK2 NOIS RES Outputs the noise result of marker 2 Usage Query only Manual operation See Noise Measurement State on page 510 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion NOISe STATe State...

Page 957: ...xample CALC DELT FUNC PNO AUTO ON Activates an automatic peak search for the reference marker in a phase noise measurement Manual operation See Defining a Reference Point on page 511 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion PNOise RESult This command queries the result of a phase noise measurement If necessary the command activates the measurement first Return values PhaseNoise Example CALC DELT2 FUNC P...

Page 958: ...ng commands control the marker for band power measurements Using Markers CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion BPOWer MODE 958 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion BPOWer RESult 958 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion BPOWer SPAN 959 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion BPOWer STATe 959 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion BPOWer MODE Mode This command selects the way the results for a band power marker are displayed Parameters Mod...

Page 959: ...ault unit Hz Example CALC MARK FUNC BPOW SPAN 2MHz Measures the band power over 2 MHz around the marker Manual operation See Span on page 515 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion BPOWer STATe State This command turns markers for band power measurements on and off Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK4 FUNC BPOW STAT ON Activates or turns marker 4 into a band power marker Manual operation See ...

Page 960: ...Culate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion BPOWer SPAN Span This command defines the bandwidth around the delta marker position Parameters Span Frequency The maximum span depends on the marker position and R S FSW model RST 5 of current span Default unit Hz CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion BPOWer STATe State This command turns delta markers for band power measurements on and off If neccessary the command a...

Page 961: ...command queries the position of the n dB down markers on the x axis when measuring in the frequency domain To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also INITiate CONTinuous on page 694 Return values Frequency frequency 1 absolute frequency of the n d...

Page 962: ... case of frequency domain measurements the command returns the bandwidth between the two n dB down markers in Hz In case of time domain measurements the command returns the pulse width between the two n dB down markers in seconds Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK FUNC NDBD ON Switches on the n dB down function INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end CALC MARK FUNC...

Page 963: ...ion INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end CALC MARK FUNC NDBD TIME Outputs the time values of the temporary markers Usage Query only Manual operation See n dB down Delta Value on page 513 11 8 3 13 Signal Count Marker The following commands control the frequency counter CALCulate n MARKer m COUNt 963 CALCulate n MARKer m COUNt FREQuency 964 CALCulate n MARKer m COUNt RESolution 964 CALCula...

Page 964: ... See also INITiate CONTinuous on page 694 Before you can use the command you have to turn on the frequency counter Return values Frequency Frequency at the marker position Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK ON Switches on marker 2 CALC MARK COUN ON Activates the frequency counter for marker 1 INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end CALC MARK COUN FREQ Outputs the m...

Page 965: ...main on and off In the time domain continuous demodulation is always on Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC2 MARK3 FUNC DEM CONT ON Switches on the continuous demodulation Manual operation See Continuous Demodulation on page 516 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DEModulation HOLDoff Duration This command defines for how long the the signal at the marker position is demodula ted In the time do...

Page 966: ... selective demodulation All signals below the threshold are not demodulated Parameters Threshold Percentage of the display height Range 0 to 100 RST 50 Example DEM SQU LEV 80 Sets the squelch level to 80 of the displayed signal Manual operation See Squelch level on page 517 SENSe DEMod SQUelch STATe State This command turns selective demodulation at the marker position on and off For selective dem...

Page 967: ...a Highly Accurate Frequency Measurement Using the Signal Count Marker 975 Example Basic Markers This example demonstrates how to configure and define markers for a basic spectrum measurement in a remote environment It assumes that the basic frequency sweep described in chapter 11 15 1 Programming Example Performing a Basic Frequency Sweep on page 1088 has been performed and thus does not begin by ...

Page 968: ...ence as relative values CALC DELT6 ON CALC DELT6 MAX NEXT Activates delta marker 6 and sets it to the next lower maximum of trace 1 Thus it shows the difference between the two highest peaks in trace 1 Retrieving marker values CALC MARK1 Y CALC MARK2 Y CALC MARK3 Y CALC MARK4 Y CALC DELT5 Y CALC DELT6 Y Retrieves the marker levels of each active normal and delta marker CALC DELT5 X REL CALC DELT6 ...

Page 969: ... the highest level in the visible spectrogram CALC2 MARK SPEC SAR VIS CALC2 MARK4 SPEC XY MAX Move marker 4 to the next higher level in the frames above its current position CALC2 MARK4 SPEC Y MAX ABOV Basic Frequency Sweep Measurement for Marker Function Examples Since markers can only be placed on an existing trace the following example provides a simple frequency sweep measurement to be used as...

Page 970: ...of trace 1 CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO MAX Query the new position of the reference marker CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO X CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO Y Example Obtaining a Marker Peak List This example demonstrates how to obtain a marker peak list in a basic spectrum mea surement in a remote environment It assumes that the basic frequency sweep descri bed in Basic Frequency Sweep Measurement for Marker Function Ex...

Page 971: ...se measurement at marker 1 INIT WAI Performs a measurement and waits for it to end CALC MARK1 FUNC NOIS RES Queries the measured noise level per Hz bandwidth Example Measuring Phase Noise This example demonstrates how to measure phase noise using markers in a basic spectrum measurement in a remote environment It assumes that the basic frequency sweep described in Basic Frequency Sweep Measurement ...

Page 972: ...in Basic Frequency Sweep Measurement for Marker Function Examples on page 969 has been performed and thus does not begin by presetting the instrument Configuring the band power marker CALC MARK1 ON Activates marker1 and sets it to the maximum power level CALC MARK1 FUNC BPOW STAT ON Activates the band power measurement for the band around marker 1 CALC MARK1 FUNC BPOW SPAN 30MHz Sets the bandwidth...

Page 973: ...ON Activates marker1 and sets it to the maximum power level CALC MARK1 FUNC NDBD 3DB Sets the level offset to 3 dB CALC MARK1 FUNC NDBD STAT ON Activates the n dB down measurement Retrieving Results CALC MARK FUNC NDBD RES Returns the bandwidth at the specified power offset CALC MARK FUNC NDBD FREQ Returns the frequencies of the temporary markers at the power offsets CALC MARK FUNC NDBD QFAC Retur...

Page 974: ...re only provided as audio output Example Demodulating and Providing Audio Output Continuously This example demonstrates how to demodulate markers and provide audio output in a basic spectrum measurement in a remote environment It assumes that the basic fre quency sweep described in chapter 11 15 1 Programming Example Performing a Basic Frequency Sweep on page 1088 has been performed and thus does ...

Page 975: ...counter to 1kHz Performing the measurement INIT WAI Performs a measurement and waits for it to end Retrieving Results CALC MARK1 COUN FREQ Returns the signal counter value as the precise marker frequency 11 8 4 Configuring Display and Limit Lines The commands required to configure display and limit lines in a remote environment are described here The tasks for manual operation are described in cha...

Page 976: ...play line on and off Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DLIN2 STAT ON Turns on display line 2 CALCulate n FLINe k Frequency This command defines the position of a frequency line Parameters Frequency Note that you can not set a frequency line to a position that is outside the current span Range 0 Hz to Fmax RST STATe to OFF Example CALC FLIN2 120MHz Sets frequency line 2 to a frequency of...

Page 977: ...separate commands Thus you must decide in advance which you want to configure The x val ues for both upper and lower limit lines are defined as a common control line This con trol line is the reference for the y values for both upper and lower limit lines Configuring Limit Lines 977 Managing Limit Lines 985 Checking the Results of a Limit Check 986 Programming Example Using Limit Lines 987 Configu...

Page 978: ...ption of the limit line The comment may have up to 40 characters Manual operation See Comment on page 532 CALCulate LIMit k CONTrol DATA LimitLinePoints This command defines the horizontal definition points of a limit line Parameters LimitLinePoints Variable number of x axis values Note that the number of horizontal values has to be the same as the number of vertical values set with CALCulate LIMi...

Page 979: ...e defi nition points Parameters Offset Numeric value The unit depends on the scale of the x axis RST 0 Manual operation See X Offset on page 530 CALCulate LIMit k CONTrol SHIFt Distance This command moves a complete limit line horizontally Compared to defining an offset this command actually changes the limit line definition points by the value you define Parameters Distance Numeric value The unit...

Page 980: ...CALCulate LIMit k LOWer MARGin Margin This command defines an area around a lower limit line where limit check violations are still tolerated Parameters Margin numeric value RST 0 Default unit dB Manual operation See Margin on page 533 CALCulate LIMit k LOWer MODE Mode This command selects the vertical limit line scaling Parameters Mode ABSolute Limit line is defined by absolute physical values Th...

Page 981: ... page 534 CALCulate LIMit k LOWer SPACing InterpolType This command selects linear or logarithmic interpolation for the calculation of a lower limit line from one horizontal point to the next Parameters InterpolType LINear LOGarithmic RST LIN Manual operation See X Axis on page 533 See Y Axis on page 533 CALCulate LIMit k LOWer STATe State This command turns a lower limit line on and off Before yo...

Page 982: ...s the unit of a limit line Parameters Unit DBM DBPW WATT DBUV DBMV VOLT DBUA AMPere DB DBUV_M DBUA_M unitless If you select dB as the limit line unit the command automatically turns the limit line into a relative limit line RST DBM Manual operation See Y Axis on page 533 CALCulate LIMit k UPPer DATA LimitLinePoints This command defines the vertical definition points of an upper limit line Paramete...

Page 983: ...he unit is variable RELative Limit line is defined by relative values related to the reference level dB RST ABSolute Manual operation See X Axis on page 533 CALCulate LIMit k UPPer OFFSet Offset This command defines an offset for a complete upper limit line Compared to shifting the limit line an offset does not actually change the limit line defi nition points Parameters Offset Numeric value RST 0...

Page 984: ...3 See Y Axis on page 533 CALCulate LIMit k UPPer STATe State This command turns an upper limit line on and off Before you can use the command you have to select a limit line with CALCulate LIMit k NAME on page 982 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Visibility on page 530 CALCulate LIMit k UPPer THReshold Limit This command defines an absolute limit for limit ...

Page 985: ...tive limit lines Return values LimitLines String containing the names of all active limit lines in alphabeti cal order Example CALC LIM ACT Queries the names of all active limit lines Usage Query only Manual operation See Visibility on page 530 CALCulate LIMit k COPY Line This command copies a limit line Parameters Line 1 to 8 number of the new limit line name String containing the name of the lim...

Page 986: ... CHECk State This command turns the limit check for a specific trace on and off To query the limit check result use CALCulate LIMit k FAIL Note that this command replaces the two commands from previous signal and spec trum analyzers which are still supported however CALCulate LIMit k TRACe on page 1085 CALCulate LIMit k STATe on page 986 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC LIM3 TRAC2 CHEC...

Page 987: ...NIT WAI Starts a new sweep and waits for its end CALC LIM3 FAIL Queries the result of the check for limit line 3 Usage Query only SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Spectrum Emission Mask on page 113 See Limit Check n on page 213 See Limit Check on page 246 Programming Example Using Limit Lines The following examples demonstrate how to work with limit lines in a remote environ ment Example Config...

Page 988: ...line 3 FM3 CALC LIM3 LOW MODE REL Selects a relative vertical scale for limit line 3 CALC LIM3 UNIT DB CALC LIM3 CONT 1 MHz 50MHz 100 MHz 150MHz 200MHz Defines 5 horizontal definition points for limit line 3 CALC LIM3 LOW 90 60 40 60 90 Defines 5 definition points relative to the reference level for limit line 3 CALC LIM3 LOW SHIF 2 Shifts the limit line 3 by 2dB CALC LIM3 LOW OFFS 3 Defines an ad...

Page 989: ...evel to 0 dBm TRIG SOUR IFP TRIG LEV IFP 10dBm Defines triggering when the second intermediate frequency rises to a level of 10 dBm Configuring the Trace DISP TRAC2 ON DISP TRAC2 MODE AVER DISP TRAC3 ON DISP TRAC3 MODE MAXH Configures 3 traces 1 default clear write 2 average 3 max hold Configuring the limit check MMEM LOAD TYPE REPL MMEM LOAD STAT 1 LimitLines_FM1_FM3 Loads the limit lines stored ...

Page 990: ...fer to chapter 8 3 2 2 Storage Location and File Name on page 546 The file names FileName parameter are given as string parameters enclosed in quotation marks They also comply with Windows conventions Windows file names do not distinguish between uppercase and lowercase notation Wildcards The two characters and can be used as wildcards i e they are variables for a selection of several files The qu...

Page 991: ...94 MMEMory MSIS 995 MMEMory NAME 995 MMEMory NETWork DISConnect 995 MMEMory NETWork MAP 995 MMEMory NETWork UNUSeddrives 996 MMEMory NETWork USEDdrives 996 MMEMory RDIRectory 996 FORMat DEXPort DSEParator Separator This command selects the decimal separator for data exported in ASCII format Parameters Separator COMMa Uses a comma as decimal separator e g 4 05 POINt Uses a point as decimal separato...

Page 992: ...ry only SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Selecting the Storage Location Drive Path Files on page 222 MMEMory CATalog LONG Path This command returns the contents of a particular directory with additional information about the files Query parameters Path String containing the path and directory If you leave out the path the command returns the contents of the directory selected with MMEMory CDIRe...

Page 993: ...ry Manual operation See Comment on page 548 MMEMory COPY SourceFile DestinationFile This command copies one or more files to another directory Parameters SourceFile String containing the path and file name of the source file DestinationFile String containing the path and name of the target file The path may be relative or absolute Usage SCPI confirmed MMEMory DATA FileName Block This command write...

Page 994: ...aracters to the file Usage SCPI confirmed MMEMory DELete FileName This command deletes a file Parameters FileName String containing the path and file name of the file to delete The path may be relative or absolute Usage Event SCPI confirmed MMEMory MDIRectory Directory This command creates a new directory Parameters Directory String containing the path and new directory name The path may be relati...

Page 995: ... sets the file name for screenshots taken with HCOPy IMMediate device on page 1009 Note that you have to route the printer output to a file Parameters FileName String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM NAME C R_S instr user PRINT1 BMP Selects the file name Usage Event SCPI confirmed MMEMory NETWork DISConnect Drive This command disconnects a network drive Parameters Drive...

Page 996: ...connect at logon Usage Event MMEMory NETWork UNUSeddrives This command returns a list of unused network drives Return values DriveName List of network drives in alphabetically descending order e g W V U Usage Query only MMEMory NETWork USEDdrives State This command returns a list of all network drives in use Parameters State You do not have to use the parameter If you do not include the parameter ...

Page 997: ...MEMory SELect ITEM HWSettings 998 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM LINes ALL 998 MMEMory SELect ITEM LINes ALL 998 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM NONE 999 MMEMory SELect ITEM NONE 999 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM SGRam 999 MMEMory SELect ITEM SGRam 999 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM TRACe ACTive 999 MMEMory SELect ITEM TRACe ACTive 999 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM TRANsducer ALL 999 MMEMory SELect ITEM TRANsdu...

Page 998: ...kers limit lines Note that a configuration may include no more than 8 limit lines This number includes active limit lines as well as inactive limit lines that were used last Therefore the combination of inactivate limit lines depends on the sequence of use with MMEMory LOAD STATe color settings configuration for the hardcopy output Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example MMEM SEL HWS ON Manual o...

Page 999: ...M SGRam State This command includes or excludes spectrogram data when storing or loading a con figuration file Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example MMEM SEL SGR ON Adds the spectrogram data to the list of data subsets MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM TRACe ACTive State MMEMory SELect ITEM TRACe ACTive State This command includes or excludes trace data when storing or loading a configuration file Par...

Page 1000: ...MEMory STORe STATe 1003 MMEMory STORe STATe NEXT 1003 MMEMory STORe TYPE 1004 SYSTem PRESet 1004 SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute 1005 MMEMory CLEar ALL This command deletes all instrument configuration files in the current directory You can select the directory with MMEMory CDIRectory Example MMEM CLE ALL Usage Event MMEMory CLEar STATe 1 FileName This command deletes a instrument configuration file...

Page 1001: ...e that files with other formats cannot be loaded with this command The contents that are reloaded from the file are defined by the last selection made either in the Save Recall dialogs manual operation or through the MMEMory SELect ITEM commands remote operation the settings are identical in both cases By default the selection is limited to the user settings User Settings selection in the dialogs ...

Page 1002: ...Restart the instrument using the ON OFF key on the front panel MMEM LOAD STAT 1 C R_S Instr user TEST01 Selected items are set to default Reloads only the user set tings Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Recall on page 545 See Recall in New Channel Recall in Current Channel on page 549 MMEMory LOAD TYPE Mode This command defines whether the channel specific settings that will be loaded wit...

Page 1003: ...ings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see chapter 3 1 7 Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode on page 37 For details se...

Page 1004: ...on of the R S FSW User Manual Example MMEM STOR STAT 1 Save Saves the current device settings in the file Save dfl MMEM STOR STAT NEXT Saves the current device settings in the file Save_001 dfl MMEM STOR STAT NEXT Saves the current device settings in the file Save_002 dfl Usage Event Manual operation See Save File on page 549 MMEMory STORe TYPE Mode This command defines whether the data from the e...

Page 1005: ...ory NAME on page 995 Remote commands exclusive to configure screenshots DISPlay LOGO 1005 HCOPy ABORt 1006 HCOPy CMAP item DEFault colors 1006 HCOPy CMAP item HSL 1006 HCOPy CMAP item PDEFined 1007 HCOPy DESTination device 1007 HCOPy DEVice COLor 1008 HCOPy DEVice LANGuage device 1008 HCOPy IMMediate device 1009 HCOPy IMMediate device NEXT 1009 HCOPy ITEM ALL 1009 HCOPy ITEM WINDow TEXT 1010 HCOPy...

Page 1006: ... Suffix Assignment on page 1034 colors 1 4 1 Current colors with a white background and a black grid 2 Optimized colors 3 Customized colors 4 Current screen colors setting for hardcopies Example HCOP CMAP DEF2 Selects the optimized color set for the color settings of a printout or a hardcopy Usage Event Manual operation See Print colors on page 598 HCOPy CMAP item HSL Color This command selects th...

Page 1007: ...color for various screen elements in print jobs Suffix item Selects the item for which the color scheme is to be defined For more information see chapter 11 10 4 3 CMAP Suffix Assignment on page 1034 Parameters Color BLACk BLUE BROWn GREen CYAN RED MAGenta YELLow WHITe DGRAy LGRAy LBLUe LGREen LCYan LRED LMAGenta Example HCOP CMAP2 PDEF GRE Manual operation See Predefined Colors on page 599 HCOPy ...

Page 1008: ...te PRINter SELect device SYST COMM CLIP Sends the hardcopy to the clipboard The format should be WEMF RST SYST COMM CLIP Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Device on page 563 HCOPy DEVice COLor State This command turns color printing on and off Parameters State ON Color printing OFF Black and white printing RST OFF Example HCOP DEV COL ON Usage SCPI confirmed HCOPy DEVice LANGuage device Fo...

Page 1009: ...s command initiates a print job If you are printing to a file the file name depends on MMEMory NAME Suffix device 1 2 Printing device Usage Event SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Printing or Storing a Screenshot Print Screen on page 561 HCOPy IMMediate device NEXT This command initiates a print job If you are printing to a file the file name depends on MMEMory NAME This command adds a consecuti...

Page 1010: ...y available if the output device is a printer Suffix device 1 2 Printing device Parameters Orientation LANDscape PORTrait RST PORTrait Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Orientation on page 563 HCOPy TDSTamp STATe device State This command includes or excludes the time and date in the printout Suffix device 1 2 Printing device Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Print Date ...

Page 1011: ...several times until no more printers could be found In that case the return value is an empty string Further queries after the empty string result in an error Usage Query only Manual operation See Printer Name on page 563 SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter SELect device PrinterName This command selects the printer that processes jobs sent by the R S FSW Use HCOPy DESTination device to select another outpu...

Page 1012: ...ge 557 for details Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Include Instrument Measurement Settings on page 471 FORMat DEXPort TRACes Selection This command selects the data to be included in a data export file see MMEMory STORe n TRACe on page 1015 For details on exporting data see chapter 7 3 2 3 Trace Data Export Configuration on page 470 Parameters Selection ...

Page 1013: ...st Stores the current list evaluation results in the test dat file Manual operation See Saving the Result Summary Evaluation List to a File on page 225 See Saving the Evaluation List on page 248 MMEMory STORe PEAK FileName This command exports the marker peak list to a file The file format is dat Secure User Mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vo...

Page 1014: ... Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode on page 37 For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R S FSW User Manual Parameters FileName String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR SGR Spectrogram Copies the spectrogram data to a file Manual operation See Export Trace to ASCII File on page 472 MMEMory STORe SPURio...

Page 1015: ... an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see chapter 3 1 7 Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode on page 37 For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R S FSW User Manual Parameters Trace Number of the trace to be stored This parameter is ignored if the option Export all Traces and all Table Results is activat...

Page 1016: ... Results Test001 txt T Copies the specified file to network drive T MMEM DEL C R_S INST USER Results Test001 txt Deletes the specified file from the instrument hard disk or MMEM MOVE C R_S INST USER Results Test001 xml D TestResults txt Moves the file Test001 txt to drive T renames it to Testresults txt and removes it from the instrument hard disk MMEM RDIR C R_S INST USER Results Deletes the dire...

Page 1017: ...ecifies that settings will be loaded to a new channel besides the existing Spectrum channel MMEM SEL CHAN HWS ON Selects only hardware settings to be loaded MMEM LOAD STAT 1 C R_S Instr user Spectrum Loads the channel specific settings from the file C R_S Instr user Spectrum dfl to a new channel The new channel is named Spectrum2 to avoid a naming conflict with the existing Spectrum channel INST R...

Page 1018: ... HCOP Initiates the printout 11 10 Configuring the R S FSW The remote commands required to set up the R S FSW are described here Configuring the Reference Frequency 1018 Calibration and Temperature Checks 1022 Working with Transducers 1025 Customizing the Screen Layout 1028 Configuring the Network and Remote Control 1035 Checking the System Configuration 1038 Using Service Functions 1043 11 10 1 C...

Page 1019: ...ion See Loop Bandwidth on page 570 SENSe ROSCillator O100 State If enabled a 100 MHz reference signal is provided to the REF OUTPUT 100 MHZ con nector Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example ROSC O100 ON Manual operation See Reference Frequency Output on page 570 SENSe ROSCillator O640 State If enabled a 640 MHz reference signal is provided to the REF OUTPUT 640 MHZ con nector Parameters State ON ...

Page 1020: ...urce INTernal the internal reference is used 10 MHz EXTernal the external reference from REF INPUT 1 20 MHZ connector is used with a variable frequency if none is available an error flag is displayed in the status bar E10 the external reference from REF INPUT 1 20 MHZ connector is used with a fixed 10 MHZ frequency if none is available an error flag is displayed in the status bar E100 the external...

Page 1021: ...able external reference frequency It determines how far the frequency may deviate from the defined level in parts per million 10 6 Parameters Range The possible values depend on the reference source see table 9 1 SMALl With this smaller deviation 0 5 ppm a very narrow fixed loop bandwidth of 0 1 Hz is realized With this setting the instrument can synchronize to an external reference signal with a ...

Page 1022: ...ent does not accept any remote control commands In order to recognize when the acquisition of correction data is completed the MAV bit in the status byte can be used If the associated bit is set in the Service Request Enable SRE register the instrument generates a service request after the acquisition of correction data has been completed Return values CalibrationState 0 The command returns a 0 if...

Page 1023: ...AGnostic SERVice INPut PULSed CFRequency Frequency This command defines the frequency of the calibration signal Before you can use the command you have to feed in a calibration signal with DIAGnostic SERVice INPut SELect Parameters Frequency Possible frequencies of the calibration signal are fix If you define a frequency that is not available the R S FSW uses the next available frequency Example a...

Page 1024: ...es the use of an internal calibration signal as input for the R S FSW Parameters Signal CALibration Uses the calibration signal as RF input MCALibration Uses the calibration signal for the microwave range as RF input RF Uses the signal from the RF input AIQ Uses the Analog Baseband calibration signal as input to the optional Analog Baseband interface This signal is only available if the R S FSW B7...

Page 1025: ...rning is displayed in the status bar indicating the resulting deviation in the measured power lev els A status bit in the STATUs QUEStionable TEMPerature register indicates a possible deviation Return values Temperature Temperature in degrees Celsius Example SOUR TEMP FRON Queries the temperature of the frontend sensor Usage Query only 11 10 3 Working with Transducers The following commands config...

Page 1026: ...eters Comment RST empty comment Manual operation See Comment on page 575 SENSe CORRection TRANsducer DATA Frequency Level This command defines the shape of the transducer factor Parameters Frequency Level The unit for Frequency is Hz Frequencies have to be sorted in ascending order The unit for Level depends on SENSe CORRection TRANsducer UNIT Manual operation See Data points on page 575 SENSe COR...

Page 1027: ... on page 573 See Create New Line on page 573 See Name on page 574 SENSe CORRection TRANsducer STATe State This command turns the selected transducer factor on or off Before you can use the command you have to select a transducer Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Activating Deactivating on page 573 SENSe CORRection TRANsducer UNIT Unit This command selects the unit of the transdu...

Page 1028: ...tomize general display and screen ele ments Useful commands for general display settings described elsewhere DISPlay MTABle on page 933 DISPlay FORMat on page 821 Remote commands exclusive to general display settings DISPlay ANNotation CBAR 1028 DISPlay ANNotation FREQuency 1029 DISPlay PSAVe HOLDoff 1029 DISPlay PSAVe STATe 1029 DISPlay SBAR STATe 1030 DISPlay SKEYs STATe 1030 DISPlay TBAR STATe ...

Page 1029: ... page 594 DISPlay PSAVe HOLDoff Minutes This command defines the time until the R S FSW turns the display power save mode on Parameters Minutes Minutes until power save mode starts Note that the number you enter may have no dimension Range 1 to 100 RST 15 Example DISP PSAV HOLD 30 Manual operation See Display Power Save Function on page 592 DISPlay PSAVe STATe State This command turns the power sa...

Page 1030: ...DISPlay TBAR STATe State This command turns the toolbar on or off Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example DISP TOOL ON Manual operation See Toolbar on page 593 DISPlay TOUChscreen STATe State This command controls the touch screen functionality Parameters State ON 1 Touch screen is active for entire screen OFF 0 Touch screen is inactivate for entire screen FRAMe Touch screen is inactivate for the ...

Page 1031: ...ON Switches the screen display of date and time on DISP TIME FORM US Switches the date and time format to US Manual operation See Date and Time Format on page 592 SYSTem DISPlay FPANel STATe State This command includes or excludes the front panel keys when working with the remote desktop Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Manual operation See Front Panel on page 594 See Mini Front Panel on page 595...

Page 1032: ...em for which the color scheme is to be defined For more information see chapter 11 10 4 3 CMAP Suffix Assignment on page 1034 colors 1 4 1 Current colors with a white background and a black grid 2 Optimized colors 3 Customized colors 4 Current screen colors setting for hardcopies Example DISP CMAP DEF2 Selects default setting 2 for setting the colors Usage Event SCPI confirmed Manual operation See...

Page 1033: ...ssignment on page 1034 Parameters Color BLACk BLUE BROWn GREen CYAN RED MAGenta YELLow WHITe DGRAy LGRAy LBLUe LGREen LCYan LRED LMAGenta Example DISP CMAP2 PDEF GRE Manual operation See Restoring the User Settings to Default Colors on page 600 DISPlay THEMe CATalog This command queries all available display themes Parameters Themes String containing all available display themes Example DISP THEMe...

Page 1034: ...Status Error CMAP6 Text Special 1 CMAP7 Text Special 2 CMAP8 Trace 1 CMAP9 Trace 2 CMAP10 Trace 3 CMAP11 Marker Info Text CMAP12 Limit Lines CMAP13 Limit and Margin Check Pass CMAP14 Limit and Margin Check Fail CMAP15 Softkey Text CMAP16 Softkey Background CMAP17 Selected Field Text CMAP18 Selected Field Background CMAP19 Softkey 3D Bright Part CMAP20 Softkey 3D Dark Part CMAP21 Softkey State On C...

Page 1035: ...Network and Remote Control The following commands are required to configure a network or remote control for the R S FSW Useful commands for configuring remote control described elsewhere SYSTem LANGuage on page 1050 Remote commands exclusive to configuring a network and remote control SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF ADDRess 1035 SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF RTERminator 1036 SYSTem DISPlay UPDate 1036...

Page 1036: ...o EOI Output of binary data from the instrument to the control computer does not require such a terminator change Parameters Terminator LFEOI EOI RST no influence on this parameter factory default LFEOI Example SYST COMM GPIB RTER EOI Manual operation See GPIB Terminator on page 651 SYSTem DISPlay UPDate State This command turns the display during remote operation on and off If on the R S FSW upda...

Page 1037: ...ddress IPAddress AutoMDIX Usage Query only Manual operation See Current LXI Configuration on page 656 SYSTem LXI LANReset This command resets the LAN configuration as required by the LXI standard The com mand also resets the LXI password and instrument description Usage Event Manual operation See LAN Reset on page 657 SYSTem LXI MDEScription Description This command defines the LXI instrument desc...

Page 1038: ...o 1039 DIAGnostic SERVice HWINfo 1039 DIAGnostic SERVice VERSinfo 1039 SYSTem ERRor CLEar ALL 1040 SYSTem ERRor EXTended 1040 SYSTem ERRor LIST 1041 SYSTem ERRor NEXT 1041 SYSTem FORMat IDENt 1041 SYSTem PRESet COMPatible 1041 SYSTem SECurity STATe 1042 DIAGnostic INFO CCOunter Relay This command queries how many switching cycles the individual relays have per formed since they were installed Quer...

Page 1039: ...ontaining the following information for every hardware component component name of the hardware component serial serial number of the component order order number of the component model model of the component code code of the component revision revision of the component Example DIAG SERV HWIN Queries the hardware information FRONTEND 100001 003 1300 3009 03 01 00 00 MOTHERBOARD 123456 002 1300 308...

Page 1040: ...his command queries the strings displayed for manual operation For remote programs do not define processing steps depending on these results Instead query the results of the STATus QUEStionable EXTended INFO status register which indicates whether messages of a certain type have occurred see STATus QUEStion able EXTended INFO Register on page 637 Query parameters MessageType ALL INFO WARNing ERRor...

Page 1041: ...ssages defined by SCPI If the error queue is empty the error number 0 No error is returned For details on error queues see chapter 10 1 7 Status Reporting System on page 627 Usage Query only SYSTem FORMat IDENt IDNFormat This command selects the response format to the IDN query Parameters IDNFormat LEGacy Format is compatible to R S FSP FSU FSQ FSG family NEW FSL R S FSW format Format is also comp...

Page 1042: ...current session such as predefined instrument settings trans ducer files or self alignment data Note Initially after installation of the R S FSW K33 option secure user mode must be enabled manually once before remote control is possible This is necessary to prompt for a change of passwords For details on the secure user mode see chapter 3 1 7 Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode on page 37 P...

Page 1043: ...mbers separated by a point function group number board number function number parameter 1 see the Service Manual parameter 2 see the Service Manual Usage Event Manual operation See Service Function on page 588 See Send on page 589 DIAGnostic SERVice SFUNction LASTresult This command queries the results of the most recent service function you have used Usage Query only DIAGnostic SERVice SFUNction ...

Page 1044: ... C R_S Instr user R S Device ID _ CurrentDate _ Current Time String containing the drive path and file name of the created support file where the file name consists of the following ele ments R S Device ID The unique R S device ID indicated in the Versions Options information See chapter 9 3 4 2 Information on Versions and Options on page 578 CurrentDate The date on which the file is created YYYYM...

Page 1045: ...and resets the edge detectors and ENABle parts of all registers to a defined value All PTRansition parts are set to FFFFh i e all transitions from 0 to 1 are detected All NTRansition parts are set to 0 i e a transition from 1 to 0 in a CONDition bit is not detected The ENABle part of the STATus OPERation and STATus QUEStionable registers are set to 0 i e all events in these registers are not passe...

Page 1046: ...e command works for the currently active channel Usage Query only 11 11 3 Reading Out the EVENt Part For more information on the event part see chapter 10 1 7 2 Structure of a SCPI Sta tus Register on page 629 STATus OPERation EVENt STATus QUEStionable EVENt STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit EVENt ChannelName STATus QUEStionable EXTended EVENt ChannelName STATus QUEStionable EXTended INFO EVENt Channel...

Page 1047: ...iated event bit transitions to true a positive transition will occur in the summary bit reported to the next higher level Parameters SumBit Range 0 to 65535 ChannelName String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel 11 11 5 Controlling the Negative Transition Part For more information on the positive transition ...

Page 1048: ...Bit ChannelName STATus QUEStionable FREQuency PTRansition SumBit ChannelName STATus QUEStionable LIMit n PTRansition SumBit ChannelName STATus QUEStionable LMARgin n PTRansition SumBit ChannelName STATus QUEStionable POWer PTRansition SumBit ChannelName STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature PTRansition SumBit ChannelName STATus QUEStionable TIME PTRansition SumBit ChannelName These commands control the ...

Page 1049: ...wn the instrument Usage Event 11 13 Emulating Other Instruments Commands The R S FSW analyzer family supports a subset of the GPIB commands of several HP and PSA instruments For details see chapter 10 2 GPIB Languages on page 645 Setting up Instrument Emulation 1049 Reference GPIB Commands of Emulated HP Models 1053 Reference Command Set of Emulated PSA Models 1081 11 13 1 Setting up Instrument Em...

Page 1050: ...on page 654 SYSTem IFGain MODE Mode Configures the internal IF gain settings in HP emulation mode due to the application needs This setting is only taken into account for resolution bandwidth 300 kHz and is only available if a HP language is selected using SYSTem LANGuage Parameters Mode NORM PULS NORM Optimized for high dynamic range overload limit is close to ref erence level PULS Optimized for ...

Page 1051: ...etting defines which option is returned when the OPT query is executed depending on the used preamplifier It is only available for FSU FSQ emulation and only if a preamplifier is used by the R S FSW B24 B25 option Parameters Option B23 B24 RST B23 Manual operation See FSU FSQ Preamplifier on page 655 SYSTem PSA WIDeband State This command defines which option is returned when the OPT query is exec...

Page 1052: ...the Factory Revision on page 655 SYSTem REVision STRing Name Sets the response to the REV query to the defined string HP emulation only see SYSTem LANGuage on page 1050 Parameters Name Example Define the system language SYST LANG 8563E Query the revision REV Response 920528 Set the response to NewRevision SYST REV STR NewRevision Query the response SYST REV STR Response NewRevision Manual operatio...

Page 1053: ...ell In many cases the selection of commands supported by the R S FSW is sufficient to run an existing GPIB program without adaptation After the introduction this section includes the following topics Command Set of Models 8560E 8561E 8562E 8563E 8564E 8565E 8566A B 8568A B 8591E 8594E 71100C 71200C and 71209A 1053 Special Features of the Syntax Parsing Algorithms for 8566A and 8568A Models 1077 Sp...

Page 1054: ...68B HP 8594E available ADJALL ADJALL Adjust all HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available ADJCRT 2 ADJCRT Adjust CRT HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available ADJIF 2 ADJIF Auto adjust IF HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available AMB AMB ON OFF AMB 1 0 AMB Trace A B Trace A HP 856xE HP 8594E available AMBPL AMBPL ON OFF AMBPL 1 0 AMBPL HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available AMPC...

Page 1055: ...B Trace A B Trace A HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available AT AT numeric_value DB DM AT DN AT UP AT AUTO AT Attenuation HP 8566A HP 8568A HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available AUNITS AUNITS DBM DBMV DBUV AUNITS Amplitude Units HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available AUTOCPL AUTOCPL Coupling default HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available AXB AXB Exchange trace A and B HP...

Page 1056: ...E HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available C1 C1 A B off HP 8566A HP 8568A available C2 C2 A B A HP 8566A HP 8568A available CA CA Couple Attenuation HP 8566A HP 8568A available CAL 1 CAL ALL CAL ON CAL OFF Start analyzer self align ment HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available CF CF numeric_value HZ KHZ MHZ GHZ CF UP CF DN CF Center Frequency HP 8566A HP 8568A HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E...

Page 1057: ...8568B HP 8594E available CR CR Couple RBW HP 8566A HP 8568A available CS CS Couple Step Size HP 8566A HP 8568A available CT CT Couple SWT HP 8566A HP 8568A available CTA Convert to absolute units HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available CV CV Couple VBW HP 8566A HP 8568A available D1 2 D1 Display Size normal HP 8566A HP 8568A available DA 2 DA Display address available DEMOD 1 DEMOD ON OFF AM FM AF De...

Page 1058: ...lue DB DM DL DN DL UP DL ON DL OFF DL Display Line HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available DLE DLE ON OFF Display Line enable HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available DONE DONE DONE Done query HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available DW 2 DW Write to display and increment address available E1 E1 Peak Search HP 8566A HP 8568A available E2 E2 Marker to Center Freq HP 8566A HP 8568A a...

Page 1059: ...vaila ble ERR ERR Error queue query HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E not yet availa ble EX EX Exchange trace A and B HP 8566A HP 8568A available FA FA numeric_value HZ KHZ MHZ GHZ FA UP FA DN FA Start Frequency HP 8566A HP 8568A HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available FB FB numeric_value HZ KHZ MHZ GHZ FB UP FB DN FB Stop Frequency HP 8566A HP 8568A HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E ava...

Page 1060: ...OFF GATE 1 0 HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available GATECTL 1 GATECTL EDGE LEVEL GATECTL HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available GD 1 GD numeric_value US MS SC GD DN GD UP GD HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available GL 1 GL numeric_value US MS SC GL DN GL UP GL HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available GP 1 GP POS NEG GP HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available GRAT 2 GR...

Page 1061: ...umeric_value HZ KHZ MHZ GHZ KS DN KS UP KS Marker Frequency Coun ter Resolution HP 8566A HP 8568A available KS KS Manual Peaking HP 8566A HP 8568A available KS KS Lock register HP 8566A HP 8568A available KS KS Unlock register HP 8566A HP 8568A available KS91 KS91 Read Amplitude Error HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSA KSA Amplitude Units in dBm HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSB KSB Amplitude Units in ...

Page 1062: ...PIB address HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSQ 2 KSQ Band lock off HP 8566A HP 8568A available KST KST Fast Preset HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSV KSV numeric_value HZ KHZ MHZ GHZ KSV Frequency Offset HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSW KSW Error Correction Routine HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSX KSX Correction Values On HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSY KSY Correction Values Off HP 8566A HP 8568A availabl...

Page 1063: ...8A available KSp KSp Character display on HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSr KSr Create service request HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSt 2 KSt Band lock on HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSv 2 KSv Signal ident on HP 8566A HP 8568A available L0 L0 Display line off HP 8566A HP 8568A available LB LB numeric_value char data Label HP 8566A HP 8568A available LF LF Low frequency band pre set HP 8566A HP 8568A ...

Page 1064: ...eric_value DB DM LG Amplitude Scale Log HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available LL 2 LL Plot command HP 8566A HP 8568A available LN LN Amplitude Scale Lin HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available M1 M1 Marker Off HP 8566A HP 8568A available M2 M2 M2 numeric_value HZ KHZ MHZ GHZ M2 DN M2 UP M2 Marker Normal HP 8566A HP 8568A available M3 M3 M3 numeric_value HZ KHZ MHZ GHZ M3 DN M3 UP M3 ...

Page 1065: ...568B HP 8594E available MKA MKA numeric_value MKA Marker Amplitude HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available MKACT MKACT 1 MKACT Select the active marker HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E not available MKBW 1 MKBW numeric_value MKBW ON MKBW OFF N dB Down HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available MKD MKD MKD numeric_value HZ KHZ MHZ GHZ MKD DN MKD UP MKD ON MKD OFF MKD Delta Marker HP 856...

Page 1066: ...N MKFCR UP MKFCR Frequency Counter Res olution HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available MKMIN MKMIN Marker Min HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available MKN MKN MKN numeric_value HZ KHZ MHZ GHZ MKN DN MKN UP MKN ON MKN OFF MKN Normal Marker HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available MKNOISE MKNOISE ON OFF MKNOISE 1 0 MKNOISE Noise Measurement HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E availab...

Page 1067: ...856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available MKRL MKRL Ref Level Marker Level HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available MKSP MKSP Deltamarker to span HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available MKSS MKSS CF Stepsize Marker Freq HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available MKT MKT numeric_value S MS US SC MKT MKF fstart MKT SWT Span HP 856xE HP 8594E available MKTRACE MKTRACE TRA TRB TRC Marke...

Page 1068: ...T1 MT1 Marker Track On HP 8566A HP 8568A available MXMH MXMH TRA TRB Maximum Hold HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available NORMALIZE NORMALIZE Normalize trace HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E not available available NRL 1 NRL numeric_value DB DM NRL Normalized Reference Level HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available NRPOS NRPOS numeric_value NRL Normalize position HP 856xE HP 8566B HP...

Page 1069: ...ilable PH_MKA Queries amplitude at the spot frequency HP 856xE available PH_DRIFT 0 for stable signals 1 for drifty HP 856xE available PH_RLVL Reference level for the log plot HP 856xE available PH_SMTHV Trace smoothing HP 856xE available PH_VBR Filtering HP 856xE available PH_RMSPT Amount of data points to skip when doing the inte gration HP 856xE available PH_RMSFL Lower integration fre quency i...

Page 1070: ...ANNT GRT TRB TRA ALLDSP GRT Plot command HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available PP PP Preselector Peaking HP 8566A HP 8568A available PRINT 1 PRINT PRINT 1 0 Hardcopy HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available PSDAC 2 PSDAC numeric_value PSDAC UP DN Preselector DAC value HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available PSTATE 2 PSTATE ON OFF 1 0 Protect State HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8...

Page 1071: ... HP 8568B HP 8594E available RC1 6 RC1 6 Recall Last State HP 8566A HP 8568A available RCLS RCLS numeric_value Recall State Register HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available RCLT RCLT TRA TRB num ber Recall Trace HP856xE HP8594E available RESET RESET Instrument preset HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available REV REV REV Firmware revision HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available RL R...

Page 1072: ...Bit mask HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available S1 S1 Continuous Sweep HP 8566A HP 8568A available S2 S2 Single Sweep HP 8566A HP 8568A available SADD add a limit line segment HP 856xE available SAVES SAVES numeric_value Save State Register HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available SAVET SAVET TRA TRB num ber Save Trace HP856xE HP8594E available SDEL delete limit line segment HP 856xE a...

Page 1073: ...HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E not available SRCPOFS 1 SRCPOFS numeric_value DB DM SRCPOFS DN SRCPOFS UP SRCPOFS Source Power Offset HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E not available SRCPWR 1 SRCPWR numeric_value DB DM SRCPWR DN SRCPWR UP SRCPWR ON SRCPWR OFF SRCPWR Source Power HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E not available SS SS numeric_value HZ KHZ MHZ GHZ SS DN SS UP SS AUTO SS CF Step Size HP ...

Page 1074: ...e SUM sum of trace amplitudes HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available SV1 6 SV1 6 Save State HP 8566A HP 8568A available SWPCPL 2 SWPCPL SA SR SWPCPL Sweep Couple HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available SWPOUT 2 SWPOUT FAV FAVA RAMP SWPOUT Sweep Output HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available T0 T0 Threshold off HP 8566A HP 8568A available T1 T1 Free Run Trigger HP 8566A HP 8568A available...

Page 1075: ...r B HP 8566A HP 8568A available TDF TDF P TDF M TDF B TDF A TDF I Trace Data Format HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available TH TH numeric_value DB DM TH DN TH UP TH ON TH OFF TH AUTO TH Threshold HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available THE THE ON OFF Threshold Line enable HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available TIMEDSP 1 TIMEDSP ON OFF TIMEDSP 1 0 TIMEDSP Time Display HP 856xE HP...

Page 1076: ...568B HP 8594E available UR 2 UR Plot Command HP 8566A HP 8568A available VARDEF VARDEF Variable definition arrays are not supported HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available VAVG VAVG VAVG TRA TRB TRC Video Averaging HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available VB VB numeric_value HZ KHZ MHZ GHZ VB DN VB UP VB AUTO VB Video Bandwidth HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available VBR 1 VBR numeric_valu...

Page 1077: ...iderably between models A and models B The command structure for models A is as follows command command code SPC data step SPC delimiter command code delimiter data Value SPC units code SPC delimiter SPC data step UP DN where command code see Table Supported Commands Value integer or floating point numerical value units code DM DM DB HZ KZ MZ GZ MV UV SC MS US delimiter CR LF ETX SPC 3210 ETX 310 ...

Page 1078: ...R Deletes the error bit in the status register but always returns a 0 in response FA Default value range step size FB Default value range step size ID Query of instrument ID The instrument ID defined in SETUP Network Remote GPIB Identification String is returned M2 Default value range step size M3 Default value range step size MKACT Only marker 1 is supported as the active marker MKBW Default valu...

Page 1079: ...llowing table shows the default settings obtained after a change of the GPIB lan guage and for the commands IP KST and RESET Model of Trace Points Start Freq Stop Freq Ref Level Input Coupling 8566A B 1001 2 GHz 22 GHz 0 dBm AC 8568A B 1001 0 Hz 1 5 GHz 0 dBm AC 8560E 601 0 Hz 2 9 GHz 0 dBm AC 8561E 601 0 Hz 6 5 GHz 0 dBm AC 8562E 601 0 Hz 13 2 GHz 0 dBm AC 8563E 601 0 Hz 26 5 GHz 0 dBm AC 8564E 6...

Page 1080: ...t the number of test points trace points corre sponds to that of the 85xx families 1001 for 8566A B and 8568A B 601 for 8560E to 8565E 401 for 8594E 11 13 2 6 Trace Data Output Formats All formats are supported for trace data output display units command O1 display units in two byte binary data command O2 or TDF B and MDS W display units in one byte binary data command O4 or TDF B and MDS B and ph...

Page 1081: ...not possible Therefore this bit is set as soon as one of the bits 1 to 5 is set It won t be reset by performing a serial poll 11 13 3 Reference Command Set of Emulated PSA Models The R S FSW analyzer family supports a subset of the GPIB commands of PSA89600 instruments Despite the differences in system architecture and device features the supported com mands have been implemented in a way to ensur...

Page 1082: ...DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet numeric FORMat BORDer NORMal SWAPped FORMat DATA ASCii REAL UINT MATLAB numeric INITiate CONTinuous OFF ON INITiate IMMediate INSTrument CATalog INSTrument NSELect numeric MMEMory CATalog dir_name MMEMory COPY file_name1 file_name2 MMEMory DATA file_name definite_length_block MMEMory DELete file_name MMEMory LOAD STATe 1 file_name MMEMory LOAD TRACe 1 fil...

Page 1083: ...umeric SENSe WAVeform IFPath NARRow WIDE SENSe WAVeform NCPTrace ON OFF SENSe WAVeform PDIT ON OFF SENSe WAVeform SRATe numeric SENSe WAVeform SWEep TIME numeric SENSe WAVeform TRIGger EOFFset SENSe WAVeform TRIGger INTerpolation ON OFF SENSe WAVeform TRIGger SOURce EXTernal 1 2 IF IMMediate STATus QUEStionable CONDition STATus QUEStionable ENABle number STATus QUEStionable NTRansition number STAT...

Page 1084: ...nteger STATus OPERation PTRansition integer STATus OPERation EVENt SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF ADDRess integer SYSTem DATE year month day SYSTem ERRor NEXT SYSTem KLOCK SYSTem MESSage string SYSTem PRESet SYSTem TIME hour minute second SYSTem VERSion TRACe COPY src_trace dest_trace TRACe DATA TRACE1 TRACE2 TRACE3 TRACE4 TRACE5 TRACE6 definite_length_block comma_separated_ASCII_data TRACe MODE WRI...

Page 1085: ...nce BBPower HOLDoff 1087 TRIGger SEQuence RFPower HOLDoff 1087 CALCulate LIMit k TRACe TraceNumber This command links a limit line to one or more traces Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Limit lines no lon ger need to be assigned to a trace explicitely The trace to be checked can be defined directly as a suffix in the new command to activate the limit check see CA...

Page 1086: ...elects a marker table PEAKlist Selects a peak list RSUMmary Selects a result summary SGRam Selects a spectrogram SOURce EXTernal FREQuency SWEep STATe State Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only It is not required in new remote control programs This command activates or deactivates the frequency sweep for the selected genera tor Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example...

Page 1087: ...LDoff on page 851 command for new remote control programs Parameters Period Range 150 ns to 1000 s RST 150 ns Example TRIG SOUR BBP Sets the baseband power trigger source TRIG BBP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns TRIGger SEQuence RFPower HOLDoff Time This command defines the holding time before the next trigger event Note that this command is available for any trigger source not just RF...

Page 1088: ...ALC MARK FUNC STR TRAC 1 After each sweep the maximum on trace 1 is searched within a range of 20 MHz around the center frequency It must have a minimum power of 90dBm Configuring the Bandwidth BAND AUTO OFF BAND 1MHz BAND TYPE RRC Defines the RBW as 1 MHz using an RRC filter BAND VID AUTO OFF BAND VID 500kHz Decouples the VBW from the RBW and decreases it to smooth the trace Configuring the Sweep...

Page 1089: ...T Shifts the display of the reference level down it is no longer the top line in the diagram The reference level is displayed as a red line Triggering TRIG SOUR IFP TRIG LEV IFP 10dBm TRIG SLOP POS TRIG DTIM 50ms TRIG IFP HYST 5dB TRIG HOLD 10ms Defines triggering when the second intermediate frequency rises to a level of 10 dBm with a dropout time of 50 ms a hysteresis of 5 dB and a delay of 10 m...

Page 1090: ... at the top of the diagram Performing the Measurement INIT WAI Initiates a new measurement and waits until the last sweep has finished Retrieving Results TRAC DATA TRACE1 TRAC DATA TRACE2 TRAC DATA TRACE3 TRAC DATA TRACE4 Returns one power and one frequency value per sweep point for each trace 11 15 2 Service Request The service request routine requires an extended initialization of the instrument...

Page 1091: ...CCESS THEN CALL Srq If SRQ is recognized subroutine for evaluation END SUB REM Private mbSession As MessageBasedSession Sub Main Console WriteLine Example of initialization _ of the SRQ in the case of errors Dim SRQWaitTimeout 4000 Timeout As Integer for WaitOnEvent Opening session Try FSW is alias instead of use resource string For example on TCP use TCPIP0 192 168 1 2 inst0 INSTR mbSession CType...

Page 1092: ...SRQ is recognized subroutine for evaluation Srq End If Catch exp As Exception Console WriteLine exp Message End Try Catch exp As InvalidCastException Console WriteLine Resource selected must be a message based session Catch exp As Exception Console WriteLine exp Message End Try Close session mbSession Dispose Wait for end Console WriteLine Press any key to end Console ReadKey End Sub 11 15 2 2 Wai...

Page 1093: ...equest Then If SRQ is recognized subroutine for evaluation Srq End If Non blocking user inputs possible This method is recommended if the waiting time until the event to be signaled by an SRQ is long longer than the selected timeout and user inputs should be possible dur ing the waiting time or if the event is not certain to occur This method is therefore the preferable choice for waiting for the ...

Page 1094: ...mouse triggered events to be executed by the associated elements For example it allows the operation of buttons and input fields while the user waits for an instrument setting to be completed The following programming example describes the Hold function which returns control to the operating system for the period of the waiting time selectable in millisec onds Rem Rem The waiting function below ex...

Page 1095: ... IF STB AND 32 0 THEN CALL Esrread END IF noDevice END SUB End of SRQ routine REM REM Subroutine for evaluation Service Request Routine Public Sub Srq Try Dim mySTB As Short mbSession ReadStatusByte Serial poll read status byte Console WriteLine Reading Service Request Routine mySTB ToString If mySTB 0 Then This instrument has bits set in the STB If mySTB And 16 0 Then Call Outputqueue If mySTB An...

Page 1096: ...eue result Catch exp As Exception Console WriteLine exp Message End Try End Sub 11 15 2 6 Reading Error Messages REM Subroutine for reading the error queue Public SUB ErrorQueueHandler ERROR SPACE 100 Make space for error variable CALL InstrWrite analyzer SYSTEM ERROR CALL InstrRead analyzer ERROR Debug Print Error Description ERROR END SUB REM REM Subroutine for reading the error queue Sub ErrorQ...

Page 1097: ...Operation Status Oper END SUB REM REM Subroutine for evaluating Questionable Status Register Public Sub Questionablestatus Dim myQSR As String Nothing Try myQSR mbSession Query STATus QUEStionable EVENt Read QSR Console WriteLine Questionable Status myQSR Catch exp As Exception Console WriteLine exp Message End Try End Sub REM Subroutine for evaluating Operation Status Register Public Sub Operatio...

Page 1098: ...128 0 THEN Debug Print Power on END SUB REM REM Subroutine for evaluating the Event Status Register Public Sub Esrread Try Dim myESR As Short mbSession Query ESR Read ESR If myESR And 1 0 Then Console WriteLine Operation complete If myESR And 2 0 Then Console WriteLine Request Control If myESR And 4 0 Then Console WriteLine Query Error If myESR And 8 0 Then Console WriteLine Device dependent error...

Page 1099: ...tain a solvent may damage the front panel labeling plastic parts or the display Never use cleaning agents such as solvents thinners acetone etc acids bases or other substances The outside of the instrument can be cleaned sufficiently using a soft lint free dust cloth The storage temperature range for the R S FSW is specified in thr data sheet The instrument must be protected against dust if it is ...

Page 1100: ...surement e g due to missing data or wrong settings so that the measurement cannot be completed correctly orange Warning An irregular situation occurred during measurement e g the settings no lon ger match the displayed results or the connection to an external device was interrupted temporarily gray Information Information on the status of individual processing steps gray Message An event or state ...

Page 1101: ...quency option R S FSW B4 has not yet reached its operating temperature The message usually disappears a few minutes after power has been switched on OVLD Overload of the input signal path after the input mixer only when RF INPUT path is NOT used e g for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R S FSW B17 or the Analog Baseband Interface R S FSW B71 Reduce the input level PLL UNLOCK For Digital B...

Page 1102: ...Frontend LO is Unlocked This message is displayed when the phase regulation of the local oscillator fails in the RF front end 1060 Trigger Block Gate Delay Error gate length Gate Delay This message is displayed when the gate signal length is not sufficient for the pull in delay with a predefined gate delay 1064 Tracking LO is Unlocked This message is displayed when the phase regulation of the loca...

Page 1103: ...nnels Depending on the used interface and protocol send the following commands Visa viClear GPIB ibclr RSIB RSDLLibclr The remote channel currently processing the uncompleted command is then ready to receive further commands again 2 On the remote channel performing the measurement send the SCPI command ABORt to abort the current measurement and reset the trigger system Ignored commands When a remo...

Page 1104: ...gher sweep time instead of trace averaging to obtain better average power results in less time Furthermore enforce the use of the sweep type FFT as opposed to Auto in Sweep mode the averaging effect of the RMS detector may be less efficient When performing multiple measurements use multiple measurement channels to switch between measurements rather than changing the settings within one channel rep...

Page 1105: ...or messages are described in chapter 13 Optimizing and Troubleshooting on page 1100 In addition our customer support centers are there to assist you in solving any prob lems that you may encounter with your R S FSW We will find solutions more quickly and efficiently if you provide us with the information listed below System Configuration The System Configuration dialog box in the Setup menu provid...

Page 1106: ...p Attach the support file to an e mail in which you describe the problem and send it to the customer support address for your region as listed at the beginning of the R S FSW Getting Started manual Packing and transporting the instrument If the instrument needs to be transported or shipped e g due to damage during deliv ery observe the notes described in chapter 3 1 1 1 Unpacking and Checking the ...

Page 1107: ...th BWIDth RESolution FFT 843 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution RATio 837 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution TYPE 837 SENSe CORRection COLLect ACQuire 889 SENSe CORRection CVL BAND 875 SENSe CORRection CVL BIAS 875 SENSe CORRection CVL CATAlog 875 SENSe CORRection CVL CLEAr 876 SENSe CORRection CVL COMMent 876 SENSe CORRection CVL DATA 876 SENSe CORRection CVL HARMonic 877 SENSe CORRection CVL MIXer...

Page 1108: ...ectrum sb RANGe range INPut ATTenuation AUTO 738 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range INPut GAIN 738 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range INPut GAIN STATe 738 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range INSert 739 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range LIMit PClass ABSolute STARt 739 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range LIMit PClass ABSolute STOP 740 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe range LIMit PClass RELative STARt 740 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANG...

Page 1109: ...ange INPut ATTenuation AUTO 770 SENSe LIST RANGe range INPut GAIN STATe 770 SENSe LIST RANGe range INPut GAIN VALue 770 SENSe LIST RANGe range LIMit STARt 771 SENSe LIST RANGe range LIMit STOP 771 SENSe LIST RANGe range POINts VALue 772 SENSe LIST RANGe range RLEVel 772 SENSe LIST RANGe range SWEep TIME 772 SENSe LIST RANGe range SWEep TIME AUTO 773 SENSe LIST RANGe range TRANsducer 773 SENSe LIST...

Page 1110: ...r ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth ALTernate ch 702 SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth GAP gap 716 SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth CHANnel ch 702 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ACHannel 705 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ALTernate ch 705 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa CHANnel ch 706 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa GAP gap 716 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa SBLock sb CHANnel ch 716 ...

Page 1111: ...OWer TRACe 699 SENSe PROBe p ID PARTnumber 881 SENSe PROBe p ID SRNumber 881 SENSe PROBe p SETup MODE 881 SENSe PROBe p SETup NAME 882 SENSe PROBe p SETup STATe 882 SENSe PROBe p SETup TYPE 883 SENSe ROSCillator LBWidth 1019 SENSe ROSCillator O100 1019 SENSe ROSCillator O640 1019 SENSe ROSCillator OSYNc 1020 SENSe ROSCillator SOURce 1020 SENSe ROSCillator SOURce EAUTo 1021 SENSe ROSCillator TRANge...

Page 1112: ...ACPower ALTernate ch ABSolute STATe 710 CALCulate LIMit ACPower ALTernate ch RESult 711 CALCulate LIMit ACPower ALTernate ch RELative 710 CALCulate LIMit ACPower ALTernate ch RELative STATe 711 CALCulate LIMit ACPower GAP gap ABSolute 713 CALCulate LIMit ACPower GAP gap ABSolute STATe 714 CALCulate LIMit ACPower GAP gap RESult 715 CALCulate LIMit ACPower GAP gap RELative STATe 715 CALCulate LIMit ...

Page 1113: ...e LIMit k UPPer OFFSet 983 CALCulate LIMit k UPPer SHIFt 983 CALCulate LIMit k UPPer SPACing 984 CALCulate LIMit k UPPer STATe 984 CALCulate LIMit k UPPer THReshold 984 CALCulate LIMit k UPPer DATA 982 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion FMEasurement DWELl 805 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion FMEasurement PSEarch PEAKsearch AUTO 805 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion FMEasurement STATe 803 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion FPEaks ...

Page 1114: ...FFSet 952 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed STATe 952 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion PNOise AUTO 957 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion PNOise RESult 957 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion PNOise STATe 957 CALCulate n DELTamarker m LINK 929 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum LEFT 940 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum NEXT 940 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum RIGHt 940 CALCulate n DELTam...

Page 1115: ...CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion CSTep 831 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DEModulation CONTinuous 965 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DEModulation HOLDoff 965 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DEModulation SELect 965 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DEModulation STATe 966 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks ANNotation LABel STATe 953 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks LIST SIZE 954 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNC...

Page 1116: ...ak STATe 790 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary RMS AVERage RESult 792 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary RMS PHOLd RESult 793 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary RMS RESult 793 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary RMS STATe 790 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary SDEViation AVERage RESult 793 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary SDEViation PHOLd RESult 794 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtio...

Page 1117: ... n PSEarch PEAKsearch SUBRanges 774 CALCulate n STATistics APD STATe 778 CALCulate n STATistics CCDF X t 785 CALCulate n STATistics CCDF STATe 778 CALCulate n STATistics NSAMples 779 CALCulate n STATistics PRESet 782 CALCulate n STATistics SCALe AUTO ONCE 783 CALCulate n STATistics SCALe X RANGe 783 CALCulate n STATistics SCALe X RLEVel 783 CALCulate n STATistics SCALe Y LOWer 784 CALCulate n STAT...

Page 1118: ...w n SGRam SPECtrogram COLor LOWer 918 DISPlay WINDow n SGRam SPECtrogram COLor SHAPe 918 DISPlay WINDow n SGRam SPECtrogram COLor UPPer 918 DISPlay WINDow n SGRam SPECtrogram COLor STYLe 918 DISPlay WINDow n SIZE 821 DISPlay WINDow n STATe 1085 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe X SPACing 831 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SPACing 850 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe 849 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe AUTO ONCE 849 D...

Page 1119: ...Tiate SEQuencer ABORt 688 INITiate SEQuencer IMMediate 688 INITiate SEQuencer MODE 688 INITiate SPURious 765 INITiate IMMediate 694 INPut ATTenuation 846 INPut ATTenuation AUTO 846 INPut ATTenuation PROTection RESet 864 INPut CONNector 864 INPut COUPling 865 INPut EATT 847 INPut EATT AUTO 847 INPut EATT STATe 847 INPut FILTer HPASs STATe 865 INPut FILTer YIG STATe 866 INPut GAIN STATe 848 INPut GA...

Page 1120: ... MSIS 995 MMEMory NAME 995 MMEMory NETWork DISConnect 995 MMEMory NETWork MAP 995 MMEMory NETWork UNUSeddrives 996 MMEMory NETWork USEDdrives 996 MMEMory RDIRectory 996 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM ALL 997 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM DEFault 998 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM HWSettings 998 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM LINes ALL 998 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM NONE 999 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM SGRam...

Page 1121: ...FREQuency 1019 SOURce EXTernal ROSCillator SOURce 887 SOURce EXTernal STATe 886 SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate OFFSet 886 SOURce TEMPerature FRONtend 1025 STATus OPERation CONDition 1046 STATus OPERation ENABle 1047 STATus OPERation NTRansition 1047 STATus OPERation PTRansition 1048 STATus OPERation EVENt 1046 STATus PRESet 1045 STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit CONDition 1046 STATus QUEStionable ACPLimi...

Page 1122: ...Nt 1046 STATus QUEStionable PTRansition 1048 STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature CONDition 1046 STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature ENABle 1047 STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature NTRansition 1047 STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature PTRansition 1048 STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature EVENt 1046 STATus QUEStionable TIME CONDition 1046 STATus QUEStionable TIME ENABle 1047 STATus QUEStionable TIME NTRansition 1047 STAT...

Page 1123: ...em PSA WIDeband 1051 SYSTem REBoot 1049 SYSTem REVision FACTory 1052 SYSTem REVision STRing 1052 SYSTem RSW 1052 SYSTem SECurity STATe 1042 SYSTem SEQuencer 689 SYSTem SHUTdown 1049 TRACe n COPY 913 TRACe n DATA 922 TRACe n DATA MEMory 924 TRACe n DATA X 924 TRIGger SEQuence BBPower HOLDoff 1087 TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe 851 TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME 851 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff 851 TRIGg...

Page 1124: ... 519 Alpha RRC filter SEM 218 Alphanumeric parameters 84 AM modulation Measurement example 126 127 AM modulation depth 285 About 285 Configuring 286 Determining 288 Markers 287 Markers remote control 801 Measurement remote control 801 Programming example 802 Results 285 Results remote control 801 Search signals 287 Search signals remote control 801 AM Modulation Depth 114 Amplitude Configuration s...

Page 1125: ...eference level 397 438 Softkey 397 438 Auto Peak detector 452 Auto peak search 296 Auto scaling 401 Auto settings Meastime Auto softkey 438 Meastime Manual softkey 438 Automatic coupling Frequencies external generator 339 346 Automatic login mechanism Activating Deactivating 666 AUX control TTL synchronization external generator 332 AUX PORT Connector 56 AV trace information 78 Average count 407 4...

Page 1126: ...ing 255 Crest factor 253 Gate remote control 780 Gate ranges 257 Gated trigger 254 257 Measurement 114 Measurement remote control 778 Measurement example 263 Percent marker 254 256 Percent marker remote control 779 Performing 255 261 Results 253 Results remote control 779 Scaling remote control 782 see also Statistics 251 Using gate ranges 261 cdma2000 BTS Application 100 cdma2000 MS Application 1...

Page 1127: ...4 530 Mode 653 Transducer lines 573 Compatible mode channel setting 76 Compensation After calibration external generator 352 Computer name 649 Changing 36 CONDition 629 Connector AC power supply 53 AUX PORT 56 Baseband Input 50 Display Port 54 DVI 54 External mixer 52 External Mixer B21 376 GPIB interface 57 IF OUT 2 GHz 55 IF VIDEO DEMOD 55 LAN 54 Noise source control 46 OCXO 57 PHONES 45 Power S...

Page 1128: ...tion 153 162 399 Number of channels 152 Number of channels remote control 701 Optimizing 182 Performing 148 Performing measurement 172 174 Power mode 154 164 Power Unit 154 163 Predefined Settings 150 160 Predefined standards 183 RBW 143 Reference channel 152 162 Reference channel remote control 707 Reference level 145 Repeatability 140 Results 136 721 Setting up channels 173 Setting up channels r...

Page 1129: ...rt Connector 54 Display theme Selecting see User Manual 92 Displayed items Touchscreen 592 DNS server IP Address 660 LAN configuration 36 Double dagger 622 DOWN 620 Drop out time Trigger 420 431 Trigger Power sensor 328 Duplicating Measurement channel remote 683 Duty cycle Power sensor 327 DVI Connector 54 Dwell time 297 303 EMI detectors 291 Dynamic range Intermodulation free 279 Measuring 270 E ...

Page 1130: ...ce level 337 Reference line 337 Reference line position 349 Reference line value 349 Reference position 349 Reference trace 337 Reference value 349 Reflection measurement 333 Reflection open measurement 348 Reflection short measurement 347 Remote control 883 Settings 342 Transducer factor 337 348 Transmission measurement 332 347 TTL synchronization 332 External mixer Connector 52 External Mixer B2...

Page 1131: ...326 External generator 346 External reference 570 IF Out 383 Power sensor 326 Range 385 Range defining 391 Reference 568 Reference remote control 1018 Span 388 Start 389 Step size 385 Stop 389 Sweep 414 Frequency axis Scaling 303 386 389 Frequency counter see also Signal count 488 Frequency coupling Automatic external generator 339 External generator 338 346 Reverse sweep external generator 340 TT...

Page 1132: ...tor 343 GPIB bus control Remote 680 GPIB interface Configuring see User Manual 57 Connector 57 Remote control 95 see User Manual 95 GPIB Language 645 Group Delay Application 100 GSM Application 100 H Handover frequency External Mixer B21 remote control 870 External Mixer B21 359 368 Hard drive Removable 53 Hardcopy see Screenshots 73 Hardware Check 580 Diagnostics 589 Information 577 Supported 580...

Page 1133: ...77 Options 578 Version 578 Inherent noise Cancellation 153 162 399 Initial configuration 539 Input Connector remote 864 Coupling 319 Coupling remote 865 Overload 314 Overload remote 864 RF 319 Settings 318 398 Signal parameters 314 Source Configuration softkey 318 Source Radio frequency RF 319 INPUT OVLD Error 82 1101 INPUT OVLD status display 82 1101 Inserting Limit line values 534 Transducer fac...

Page 1134: ...Emissions 241 Threshold 526 532 Time Domain Power measurement 266 Traces 530 View filter 530 Violation 526 Visibility 530 X axis 533 X Offset 530 Y axis 533 Y Offset 531 Limits Absolute SEM range 213 Absolute Spurious Emissions range 246 Relative SEM range 213 Line impedance stabilization network see LISN 295 Linear scaling X axis 303 386 389 Lines Configuration Softkey 527 528 Display 524 528 534...

Page 1135: ... 506 Next minimum remote control 934 937 Next peak 506 Next peak remote control 934 937 Noise 488 490 Noise measurement 509 Noise measurement remote control 956 Peak 506 Peak remote control 934 937 Peak list remote control 953 Phase noise measurement 510 Phase noise measurement remote control 956 Position 299 495 Positioning 506 Positioning remote control 928 Programming example 967 Querying posit...

Page 1136: ... Key 493 MKR Key 498 506 MKR FUNCT Key 507 Mnemonics 616 Optional 618 MOD marker functions 80 Mode channel setting 76 Modes see Operating mode 96 Modulation Depth 114 Marker Demodulation 517 Monitor External 600 Settings 600 Motherboard Temperature 590 MSR Basics 205 Configuration 158 219 Configuration softkey 219 Settings Multi SEM 216 MSR ACLR Adjacent channel bandwidths 169 Adjacent channel def...

Page 1137: ...tivating 510 Marker 509 Remote control 956 Noise source control Connector 46 NOR External generator 336 341 NOR channel bar 78 Normalization Approximate external generator 336 External generator 336 348 NTRansition 629 Number of Readings Power sensor 327 Numerator Frequencies external generator 339 346 Numeric parameters 84 Numeric values Special 620 O OBW 188 Power 191 Power remote control 727 Ad...

Page 1138: ...ure user mode 39 541 Service functions 589 Peak excursion 486 500 505 518 Peak list 487 Configuring 517 Displaying 517 Evaluation method 441 Exporting 519 556 Marker numbers 519 Maximum number of peaks 518 Peak excursion 500 505 518 Remote control 953 Sort mode 518 State 518 Trying out 67 Peak search 296 486 Area spectrograms 504 Automatic 303 487 500 505 Deactivating limits 192 501 506 Excursion ...

Page 1139: ... see User Manual 46 Zeroing 325 330 Power supply Connector 53 Power Unit Softkey 154 163 Power save mode Activating see User Manual 92 PPE 628 PPE register 632 Preamplifier SEM range 212 Setting 399 Softkey 399 Spurious Emissions range 245 Predefined standards CP ACLR 150 160 183 Preset Bands External Mixer B21 remote control 871 Channel settings 538 External Mixer B21 368 Key 538 Recalling settin...

Page 1140: ...control Spurious Emissions 241 Rules SEM 199 Rules Spurious Emissions 240 SEM 199 Symmetrical SEM 200 RBW see Resolution Bandwidth 403 RBW channel setting 76 Ready for trigger Status register 633 Realtime spectrum Application 101 Rear panel Overview 52 Rebooting Remote control 1049 Recalling Calibration settings external generator 348 Settings 542 543 546 550 Settings for preset 553 Softkey 546 Re...

Page 1141: ...0 Reset values Remote 681 Resetting RF input protection 314 864 Resolution bandwidth Auto Softkey 303 410 CP ACLR 143 Harmonics 274 Impact 403 Manual Softkey 303 410 SEM range 211 Spurious Emissions range 244 Statistics 263 Resolution bandwidth EMI 290 304 Restoring Channel settings 313 Standard files 224 Restricted operation Secure user mode 38 541 Restrictions Storage space 38 540 Result display...

Page 1142: ...n colors see User Manual 37 Screenshots Printing 561 564 Saving 561 564 Trying out 73 Search In Help 93 Search limits Activating 192 500 505 Deactivating 192 501 506 OBW 189 191 Search Mode Spectrogram markers 501 Search range Zoom area 448 Search settings Trying out 67 Search Signals Softkey 282 287 Searching Configuration softkey 498 501 Second harmonic intercept 270 Secure user mode Activating ...

Page 1143: ... 108 Mode remote 688 Programming example 690 Remote 694 Remote control 682 RUN SINGLE 107 Setting up 108 Single Sweep 107 Softkey 108 State 108 Trying out 65 Sequential commands 624 Errors 1103 Service functions 583 588 Numeric mode 589 Passwords 589 Results 589 Service packs 28 Service request SRQ 631 641 Service request enable Remote 681 Service request enable register SRE 631 Set CP Reference S...

Page 1144: ...6 Carrier Noise Config 186 Center 388 Center Mkr Freq 507 Channel Bandwidth 187 192 Channel defined Sequencer 108 Clear Spectrogram 416 475 Color Mapping 474 Colors 563 Comment 563 Continue Single Sweep 115 415 Continuous Sequencer 108 Continuous Sweep 115 415 474 Copy Trace 482 CP ACLR Settings 149 CP ACLR Standard 150 160 Device 563 Device Setup 561 Display Config 440 Export 554 Export config 55...

Page 1145: ...43 Manual Softkey 388 Span RBW coupling 404 Special characters SCPI 619 Spectrograms Activating Deactivating 473 Clearing 416 475 Color curve 462 476 481 Color mapping 461 474 475 480 Color mapping remote control 917 Color scheme 461 476 Configuring 479 Configuring remote control 914 Continue frame 460 Display 458 Displaying 478 Evaluation method 442 Frame count 460 Frames remote control 914 Histo...

Page 1146: ...e 629 EVENt 629 model 629 NTRansition 629 parts 629 PTRansition 629 STAT QUES POW 864 STATus OPERation 633 STATus QUEStionable 634 STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit 636 STATus QUEStionable DIQ 631 STATus QUEStionable EXTended 636 STATus QUEStionable EXTended INFO 637 STATus QUEStionable FREQuency 637 STATus QUEStionable LIMit 638 STATus QUEStionable LMARgin 639 STATus QUEStionable POWer 639 STATus QUES...

Page 1147: ...splay 45 SWT channel setting 76 Symmetric setup SEM 215 SEM ranges 200 SYNC TRIGGER Connector 56 Syntax elements SCPI 622 System Configuration 577 Configuration remote 1038 Messages 579 Preset operating mode 582 SYSTEM Keys 45 T Tabs All 86 Channels 96 MultiTab 75 MultiView 97 Switching 75 Task bar Accessing 30 TCP IP Address External generator 344 External generator 343 TD SCDMA BTS Application 1...

Page 1148: ...72 Exporting 470 471 472 554 555 Hold 466 Mode 465 Mode CP ACLR 145 Mode remote 910 Saving 545 Settings 452 Settings remote control 909 Settings predefined 467 Softkeys 468 Traces to be Checked Limit lines 530 Tracking see External generator 345 Tracking bandwidth 391 Tracking generator see External generator 331 Tracking threshold 391 Transducer factor 296 Transducers Activating Deactivating 573 ...

Page 1149: ... Tx channel MSR Center frequency 166 MSR technology 167 Tx channels in MSR sub blocks 166 MSR configuring 166 MSR weighting filters 167 U UNCAL Error 82 1101 UNCAL status display 82 1101 UNDO Key 50 Units 620 Power sensor 326 Reference level 396 397 Transducer factors 575 Y axis statistics 260 UP 620 Update rate Display 592 Updating Firmware 580 603 Upper Level Hysteresis Softkey 438 USB Address 6...

Page 1150: ...822 Windows 7 27 Windows 7 Access 29 WLAN Application 102 Wordpad Accessing 30 WRONG_FW Error 82 565 580 1101 X X axis Adjusting Spurious Emissions 246 Limit lines 533 Scaling 303 386 389 Transducer lines 575 X Offset Limit lines 530 X value Marker 299 495 Y Y axis Limit lines 533 Max Min statistics 260 Optimizing display 401 Scaling 395 401 Settings 399 Y Offset Limit lines 531 YIG Bypass channel...

Reviews:

No comments

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands